U.S.A
Sumitomo Machinery Corporation of America(SMA)
4200 Holland Blvd. Chesapeake, VA 23323, U.S.A.
TEL (1)757-485-3355 FAX (1)757-485-7490
CanadaSM Cyclo of Canada, Ltd. (SMC)
1453 Cornwall Road, Oakville, Canada ON L6J 7T5
TEL (1)905-469-1050 FAX (1)905-469-1055
MexicoSM Cyclo de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. (SMME)
Av. Desarrollo 541, Col. Finsa, Guadalupe,
Nuevo León, México, CP67132
TEL (52)81-8144-5130 FAX (52)81-8144-5130
BrazilSumitomo Industrias Pesadas do Brasil Ltda.
(SHIB)
Rodovia do Acucar (SP-075) Km 26
Itu, Sao Paulo, Brasil
TEL (55)11-4886-1000 FAX (55)11-4886-1000
Chile
SM-Cyclo de Chile Ltda. (SMCH)
Camino Lo Echevers 550, Bodegas 5 y 6,
Quilicura, Región Metropolitana, Chile
TEL (56)2-892-7000
FAX (56)2-892-7001
Argentina
SM-Cyclo de Argentina S.A. (SMAR)
Ing Delpini 2230, B1615KGB Grand Bourg,
Malvinas Argentinas, Buenos Aires, Argentina
TEL (54)3327-45-4095 FAX (54)3327-45-4099
GuatemalaSM Cyclo de Guatemala Ensambladora, Ltda.
(SMGT)
Parque Industrial Unisur, 0 Calle B 19-50 Zona 3,
Bodega D-1 Delta Bárcenas en Villa Nueva, Guatemala
TEL (502)6648-0500 FAX (502)6631-9171
Colombia
SM Cyclo Colombia, S.A.S. (SMCO)
Parque Industrial Celta, Km 7.0 Autopista Medellín,
Costado Occidental, Funza, Cundinamarca, Colombia
TEL (57)1-826-9766
Peru
SM Cyclo de Perú, S.A.C (SMPE)
Jr. Monte Rosa 255, Oficina 702, Lima,
Santiago de Surco, PerúTEL (51)1-713-0342
FAX (51)1-715-0223
Germany
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH
(SCG)
Cyclostraße 92, 85229 Markt Indersdorf, Germany
TEL (49)8136-66-0
FAX (49)8136-5771

Austria
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH(SCG)SCG Branch Austria Office
Gruentalerstraße 30A, 4020 Linz, Austria
TEL (43)732-330958 FAX (43)732-331978

Korea
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Korea, Ltd. (SCK)Royal Bldg. 19 Rm. 913, 5 Saemunan-ro 5-Gil Jongro-Gu
Seoul, Korea 03173
TEL (82)2-730-0151
FAX (82)2-730-0156

Belgium
Hansen Industrial Transmissions NV (HIT)
Leonardo da Vincilaan 1, Edegem, Belgium
TEL (32)34-50-12-11 FAX (32)34-50-12-20

TaiwanTatung SM-Cyclo Co., Ltd. (TSC)
22 Chungshan N. Road 3rd., Sec. Taipei, Taiwan 104,
R.O.C.
TEL (886)2-2595-7275 FAX (886)2-2595-5594

FranceSM-Cyclo France SAS (SMFR)
8 Avenue Christian Doppler, 77700 Serris, France
TEL (33)164171717
FAX (33)164171718
Italy
SM-Cyclo Italy Srl (SMIT)
Via dell' Artigianato 23, 20010 Cornaredo (MI), Italy
TEL (39)293-481101 FAX (39)293-481103
Spain
SM-Cyclo Iberia, S.L.U. (SMIB)
C/Gran Vía Nº 63 Bis, Planta 1, Departamento 1B
48011 Bilbao–Vizcaya, SpainTEL (34)9448-05389 FAX (34)9448-01550
United Kingdom
SM-Cyclo UK Ltd. (SMUK)Unit 29, Bergen Way, Sutton Fields Industrial Estate,
Kingston upon Hull, HU7 0YQ, East Yorkshire,
United Kingdom
TEL (44)1482-790340 FAX (44)1482-790321
TurkeySM Cyclo Turkey Güç Aktarım Sis. Tic. Ltd. Sti.
(SMTR)
Barbaros Mh. Çiğdem Sk. Ağaoğlu, Office Mrk. No:1 Kat:4 D.18
Ataşehir, İstanbul, Turkey
TEL (90)216-250-6069 FAX (90)216-250-5556
India
Sumi-Cyclo Drive India Private Limited (SDI)
Gat No. 186, Raisoni Industrial Park, Alandi Markal Road,
Fulgaon-Pune, Maharashtra, India
TEL (91)96-0774-5353
China
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive China, Ltd. (SCT)
11F, SMEG Plaza, No. 1386 Hongqiao Road,
Changning District, Shanghai, China （P.C. 200336）
TEL (86)21-3462-7877 FAX (86)21-3462-7922
Hong Kong
SM-Cyclo of Hong Kong Co., Ltd. (SMHK)
Rm 1301, CEO Tower, 77 Wing Hong Street,
Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon, Hong Kong
TEL (852)2460-1881 FAX (852)2460-1882

Singapore
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte.
Ltd. (SCA)
15 Kwong Min Road, Singapore 628718
TEL (65)6591-7800
FAX (65)6863-4238
Philippines
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd.
Philippines Branch Office (SMPH)
C4 & C5 Buildings Granville Industrial Complex, Carmona,
Cavite 4116, Philippines
TEL (63)2-584-4921
FAX (63)2-584-4922
Vietnam
SM-Cyclo (Vietnam) Co., Ltd. (SMVN)
Factory 2B, Lot K1-2-5, Road No. 2-3-5A,
Le Minh Xuan Industrial Park, Binh Chanh Dist.,
HCMC, Vietnam
TEL (84)8-3766-3709 FAX (84)8-3766-3710
Malaysia
SM-Cyclo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. (SMMA)
No.7C, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/56, Kota Kemuning,
Seksyen 31, 40460 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan,
Malaysia
TEL (60)3-5121-0455 FAX (60)3-5121-0578

HF-430NEO Series Operating and Maintenance Manual

Worldwide Locations

HF-430NEO Series
High-performance Inverter
5.5〜55kW/200V Class
5.5〜55kW/400V Class

Operating and Maintenance ManualIndonesia
PT. SM-Cyclo Indonesia (SMID)
Jalan Sungkai Blok F 25 No. 09 K, Delta Silicon III,
Lippo Cikarang, Bekasi 17530, Indonesia
TEL (62)21-2961-2100 FAX (62)21-2961-2211
Thailand
SM-Cyclo (Thailand) Co., Ltd. (SMTH)
195 Empire Tower, Unit 2103-4, 21st Floor, South
Sathorn Road, Yannawa, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120,
ThailandTEL (66)2670-0998
FAX (66)2670-0999
Australia
Sumitomo (SHI) Hansen Australia Pty. Ltd.
(SHAU)
181 Power St, Glendenning, NSW 2761, Australia
TEL (61)2-9208-3000 FAX (61)2-9208-3050
Japan
Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd. (SHI)
ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-6025, JapanTEL (81)3-6737-2511 FAX (81)3-6866-5160

NOTICE

Specifications, dimensions, and other items are subject to change without prior notice.

Power Transmission & Controls Group
Headquarter ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan

No.DM3401E-1.0
EA10 Printed 2020.01

1. Make sure that this operating and maintenence manual isdelivered to the end user of inverter unit.
2. Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter
unit, and store it in a safe place for reference.

Manual DM3401E-1

Copyright © 2020 Sumitomo Heavy Industries,Ltd. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, ortransmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Sumitomo. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of
the information contained herein. Moreover, because Sumitomo is constantly striving to improve its
high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every
precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Sumitomo assumes no responsibility forerrors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information
contained in this publication.

Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing HF-430NEO series inverter.
This instruction manual describes how to handle and maintain HF-430NEO. Please read this manual
carefully before using HF-430NEO, and keep it handy for those who operate, maintain and inspect it.
For the purpose of reducing paper consumption and provision of the latest information, we enclose theinstruction manual only, while providing the User's Guide for more detailed description through electronic
data instead of CD or printed document.

■About the instruction manual(this document)
The instruction manual provides the minimum information necessary for handling the product.
Please make sure to read the Instruction manual as well as the User's Guide for more detailed information.

■About the User's Guide
The User's Guide provides detailed information necessary for handling the product.
Please make sure to read User's Guide for proper use.
If future updated descriptions differ from the Instruction Manual, the description in the User's Guide will
have higher priority. Always use HF-430NEO strictly within the range described in the User's Guide andperform proper inspection and maintenance to prevent failures or accidents.
The latest version of the User's guide can be obtained through our website.

■Handling an optional products
If you use HF-430NEO with optional products, you should also read the instruction enclosed in those
products.

■For a proper use
Before using HF-430NEO, please read carefully HF-430NEO's Instruction manual, User's Guide and each
optional products instruction manuals.
In addition any personnel handling or performing maintenance of the product must read carefully
HF-430NEO's Instruction manual, User's Guide and each optional products instruction manuals.
Before any attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect this equipment, a complete understanding of
the equipment specifications, safety instructions, precautions, handling and operation instructions isrequired. Please follow all the specifications and instructions for a proper use. Additionally, periodicallyreview HF-430NEO's Instruction manual, User's Guide and each optional products instruction manuals.

■Precautions
It is prohibited to reproduce or reform this document partially or totally in any form without the publisher's
permission. The contents of the document are subject to change without prior notice.
Any handling, maintenance or operation method NOT described on HF-430NEO's Instruction manual,
User's Guide and each optional products instruction manuals is not covered by the product warranty.
Please DO NOT perform any procedure NOT described on HF-430NEO and each optional products
instruction manuals since it can be the cause of unexpected failures or accidents.
We are not responsible for any impact from operations regardless of unexpected failure or accident due
to operation or handling of the product in a manner not specified on HF-430NEO's Instruction manual,
User's Guide and each optional products instruction manuals. We appreciate your understanding.
Note that, in case HF-430NEO's Instruction manual, User's Guide and each optional products instruction
manuals are enclosed, they should be delivered to the end user of HF-430NEO. Also make sure to
download and keep accessible any other related guides or instruction manuals for the end user.

S-1

Table of Contents
Table of Contents●●

Introduction.................................................... S-1
Table of Contents .......................................... S-2

Chapter 1 Safety Instructions
1.4 Compliance to European Directive (CE) ..... 1-6
1.5 Compliance to UL Standards ....................... 1-7
1.6 Precautions for installation ........................... 1-9

1.1 Type of Warnings ............................................ 1-1
1.2 Description of Safety Symbols ...................... 1-1
1.3 Cautions........................................................... 1-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2.7 Applicable circuit breaker........................... 2-11
2.8 Chopper Braking Resistor ........................... 2-13
2.9 Wiring ............................................................. 2-14
2.10 Wiring of the control circuit ..................... 2-17
2.11 Control circuit wiring section ................... 2-18
2.12 Connection for PLC ................................... 2-25
2.13 Residual risk ............................................... 2-26

2.1 Check the Inverter .......................................... 2-1
2.2 Install the Inverter .......................................... 2-2
2.3 Before reading this guide .............................. 2-5
2.4 Inverter Wiring ................................................ 2-7
2.5 Wiring of the main circuit .............................. 2-8
2.6 Recommended wire gauges, wiring
accessories and crimp terminals ................... 2-9

Chapter 3 Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment
3.8 Operate using 3WIRE terminal ......................3-4
3.9 Adjust the analog input (VRF/IRF) ................3-5
3.10 Adjust the analog output (AMV/AMI/FRQ)3-5
3.11 Adjust the analog input (VF2) .....................3-6
3.12 Prevent input terminal malfunction ...........3-6
3.13 Stabilize an output terminal ........................3-6

3.1 Set the load rating .......................................... 3-1
3.2 Set the motor data ......................................... 3-1
3.3 Frequency setting from keypad .................... 3-2
3.4 Run using the operator keypad .................... 3-2
3.5 Multispeed terminals command .................. 3-3
3.6 Operate using FR/RR terminal ..................... 3-3
3.7 Potentiometer frequency command............ 3-4

Chapter 4 Parameter Setting
4.4 Parameter naming ........................................ 4-13
4.5 Parameter arrangement .............................. 4-13
4.6 Parameter explanation ................................ 4-13

4.1 Keypad overview............................................. 4-1
4.2 Monitor naming ............................................ 4-10
4.3 Description of motor functions .................. 4-10

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.3 Possible errors and solutions ........................5-5

5.1 Error events ..................................................... 5-1
5.2 Confirming status ........................................... 5-3

Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance
6.5 Checking method for Inverter/Converter ....6-4
6.6 Smoothing capacitor life span curve ............6-5
6.7 Lifespan alarm output.....................................6-5
6.8 Input/output Voltage, current and power
measurement methods ................................6-6

6.1 Inspection and maintenance notes ............. 6-1
6.2 Daily and periodic inspections ..................... 6-2
6.3 Insulation resistance test .............................. 6-3
6.4 Dielectric withstand test ............................... 6-3

S-2

Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Specifications
7.3 Common Specifications .................................7-3
7.4 Current delating ..............................................7-4

7.1 200V class specifications .............................. 7-1
7.2 400V class specifications .............................. 7-2

Appendix
Parameter list ................................................. App.1-1
Quick start ...................................................... App.2-1
Index ............................................................... App.3-1

Warranty
Warranty ......................................................... App.4-1
To inverter users ............................................ App.4-2

S-3

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1

Chapter 1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Types of Warnings
In the Instruction Manual, the severity levels of safety precautions and residual risks are classified as: "DANGER","WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Display meanings

DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which would most likely result in serious personal
injury or death, and may result in major physical loss or damage.

WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which may result in serious personal injury or death,and may result in major physical loss or damage.

CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which may result in moderate or slightpersonal injury or damage, and may result only physical loss or damage.
Furthermore, " CAUTION” level description may lead to a serious risk depend on the circumstances. Be sure to follow
the instruction because whichever contains important safety description.

1.2 Description of Safety Symbols
It describes annotation of the symbols in context. Be sure to follow and pay attention of content.
Symbols meaning
Indicates a danger, warning or caution notice for fire, electric shock and high temperature while handlingthe product. Details are indicated in or near by pictures or words.
The drawing on the left indicates “a non-specific and general danger or caution”.
The drawing on the left indicates “a possible damage due to electric shock”.
Indicates “what you must not do” to prohibit the described acts in the operation of the product.
Indicates “what you must do” according to the instructions in the operation of the product.

1.3 Cautions
1.3.1 Please be Careful!

DANGER•

If handled incorrectly or improperly, it might cause death, serious physical injuries, or damage to the inverter, motor
or even the entire system.

•

Before installation, wiring, operation, inspection, or usage please read and fully understand this guide.

•In order to explain this device details the illustrations in this guide might show this device without covers.

•

Before operating this device please return all the covers to the original position, and follow all the necessary
regulations and instructions written in this guide.

CautionDo

CautionDo

1-1

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
1.3.2 Precautions during the installation!

WARNING● Risk of Fire!
•

DO NOT place inflammable objects nearby.
DO NOT let scraps of wire, welding sputtering, irons scraps or other objects get inside the device.

•

Avoid installing this device in places with high temperature, high humidity, Condensation-prone conditions,
dusty conditions, corrosive gas, grinding fluid mist and hydrogen sulfide or salt damage prone conditions. Additionally,
it is recommended to install this device in ventilated room not exposed to direct sunlight.

Fire •
HazardProhibitedDo● Risk of Injury!
Injury•DO NOT install or operate products with damage or missing parts.

Prohibited● Risk of injury due to the inverter falling!
Fall
Injury •DO NOT hold its cover parts when carrying the inverter.

Prohibited••

Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in this Basic Guide.
Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations.

Do● Risk of failure of the inverter!
Failure••The device is a precision equipment, do not drop it, or give it a strong shock.
DO NOT get on (step on) or place heavy objects on this device.

Prohibited

1.3.3 Precautions for Wiring

DANGER● Risk of an electric shock and/or fire!
Electric
shock Fire•

•
•

Do

Be sure to ground the inverter.
Entrust the wiring work only to a qualified electrician.
Before the wiring work make sure to turn off the power supply and wait for more than 10 or 15 minutes dependingon the invertor model＊.
(Confirm than the charge lamp is OFF and the DC voltage between terminals P and N is 45V or less.)＊For HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022, HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-022 models the wait time is 10 minutes.
For HF4322-030 to HF4322-055, HF4324-030 to HF4324-055 models the wait time is 15 minutes.

● Risk of failure of the inverter!
Failure•Do not pull the wire after wiring.

Prohibited

1-2

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1● Risk of an electric shock and/or injury!
Electricshock
Injury•Perform the wiring only after installing the inverter.

Do● Risk of short circuit and ground fault!
Short circuit
Ground •fault

Do not remove rubber bushings from the wiring section.
Otherwise, the edges of the wiring cover may damage the wire.

Prohibited

WARNING
InjuryFire● Risk of injury or fire!
•

Do not connect AC power supply to any of the output terminals (U, V, and W).

•

Make sure that the voltage of AC power supply matches the rated voltage of your inverter.

ProhibitedDo● Risk of electric shock and injury!
Electric •shock •
InjuryBefore operating slide switch SW in the inverter, be sure to turn off the power supply.
Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling-fan operation, the inverter power is not always off, even when
the cooling fan is stopped. Therefore, be sure to confirm that the power supply is off before wiring.

Do● Risk of fire!
Fire

•
•
•

DO NOT use a single-phase input.
DO NOT connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals (P1, P, and N).
DO NOT use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter to stop its operation.

•

Tighten each screw to the specified torque. No screws must be left loose.

••

Connect an earth-leakage breaker to the power input circuit.
Use only the power cables, earth-leakage breaker, and magnetic contactors that have the specified capacity (ratings).

ProhibitedDo

1.3.4 Precautions to Run and Test Running

DANGER● Risk of electric shock or fire!
Electric
shock •Fire•

While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch any internal part or terminal of the inverter.
Also do not check signals, or connect or disconnect any wire or connector.
While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch any internal part of the inverter.
Also do not insert a material such as a rod and etc.

Prohibited

1-3

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1● Risk of electric shock!
Electric •
shock

•

Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the inverter power.
Do not open the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside.
Do not operate switches with wet hands.

Prohibited● Risk of injury or fire!
InjuryFire •

While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch the terminal of the inverter, even if it has stopped.

Prohibited● Risk of injury and damage to machine!
Injury •DamageDo not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because free-running status occurs inretry mode.

Prohibited● Risk of injury!
Injury

•

•
Do

•

•
Prohibited

If the retry mode has been selected, the inverter will restart suddenly after a break in the tripping status.
Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the inverter is under such circumstances.
(Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured, even when the inverter restarts suddenly.)
The [STOP] key on the operator keypad is effective only when its function is enabled by setting.
Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
If an operation command has been input to the inverter before a short-term power failure, the inverter may restart
operation after the power recovery. If such a restart may put persons in danger, design a control circuit that disables
the inverter rom restarting after power recovery.
If an operation command has been input to the inverter before the inverter enters alarm status, the inverter will
restart suddenly when the alarm status is reset. Before resetting the alarm status, make sure that no operationcommand has been input.

WARNING● Risk of injury and damage to machine!
InjuryDamage ••Do•

The inverter easily allows you to control the speed of operating motor. Confirm the capacity and ratings of the motoror machine before operating.
When you run the motor at a high frequency, check and confirm to each a permitting revolution of the gear motorand machine.
Check the rotate motor direction, abnormal sound, and vibrations while operating.

● Risk of burn injury.

● Risk of injury!

Burn
InjuryInjury••・ Install an external brake system if needed.

Inverter heat sink will heat up during operation.
Do not touch the heat sink.
Do

Prohibited

1-4

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
1.3.5 Precautions for Maintenance/Inspection

DANGER● Risk of electric shock!
Electric
•
shock

Do

•

Prohibited

Before inspecting the inverter, be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for more than 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the invertor model＊. (Before inspection, confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and theDC voltage between terminals P and N is 45 V or less.)
Commit only a designated person to maintenance, inspection, and the replacement of parts.
(Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories, e.g., bracelets, before maintenance and inspection work andto use insulated tools for the work.)＊For HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022, HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-022 models the wait time is 10 minutes.
For HF4322-030 to HF4322-055, HF4324-030 to HF4324-055 models the wait time is 15 minutes.

1.3.6 Precautions for disposal

DANGER● Risk of injury and explosion!
Injury•Explosion••Do

For disposal of the inverter, outsource to a qualified industrial waste disposal contractor. Disposing of the inverteron your own may result in an explosion of the capacitor or produce poisonous gas.
A qualified waste disposer includes industrial waste collector/transporter and industrial waste disposal operator.
Follow the act related to procedures stipulated in the waste management and public cleansing for disposing of
the inverter.

1.3.7 Other Cautions

DANGER● Risk of electric shock, fire and injury!
Electric
shock•
Fire Injury

Never modify the inverter.

Prohibited

CAUTION● Risk of significantly shortening the life cycle of a product!
Life cycle•

Do

Sterilizing and disinfecting a packaging wood materials use a means other than wood fumigation method.
If the product is included in the fumigation treatment, electronic parts receive a critical damage from emitted gases
or steams. Especially, halogen disinfectants (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine) can cause corrosion in
the capacitor.

1-5

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
1.4 Compliance to European Directive (CE)
1.4.1 Caution for EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

HF-430NEO inverter conforms to requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive (2014/30/EU). However, when using
the inverter in Europe, you must comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and otherstandards in Europe:
WARNING: This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and maintained by qualified engineers who have expert knowledge ofelectric work, inverter operation, and the hazardous circumstances that can occur. Otherwise, personal injury may result.
1. Power supply requirements
a. Voltage fluctuation must be -15% to +10% or less.
b. Voltage imbalance must be ±3% or less.
c. Frequency variation must be ±4% or less.
d. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage must be ±10% or less.
2. Installation requirementa. HF-430NEO includes a built-in EMC filter. The built-in EMC filter must be activated.
b. According to EN61800-3 it is mandatory to mention that any inverter with only C3 filter inside may NOT be connected to a low
voltage public power supply in residential areas since for these installations C1 is required.
c. In case of external filter for C2, an additional note is required according to EN61800-3 that “this product may emit high frequency
interference in residential areas which may require additional EMC measures”.
d. According to the EN6100-3-12, an additional AC reactor or DC choke should be installed for reducing harmonics in power line.
3. Wiring requirementsa. A shielded wire (screened cable) must be used for motor wiring, and the length of the cable must be according to the following
table (Table 1 on page 1-5).
b. The carrier frequency must be set according to the following table to meet an EMC requirement (Table1 on page 1-6).
c. The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring.
4. Environmental requirements(to be met when a filter used)a. HF-430NEO inverter that is activated built-in EMC filter must be according to HF-430NEO specifications.
Table 1Model
HF4322-5A5
HF4322-7A5
HF4322-011
HF4322-015
HF4322-022
HF4322-030
HF4322-037
HF4322-045
HF4322-055

Cat.

C3

Cable
Length(m)

CarrierFrequency
(kHz)

5

2

10

1

5

2

Model
HF4324-5A5
HF4324-7A5
HF4324-011
HF4324-015
HF4324-022
HF4324-030
HF4324-037
HF4324-045
HF4324-055

Cat.

Cable
Length(m)

CarrierFrequency
(kHz)

5

C3

10

2

5

1.4.2 Caution for Machinery Directive(Functional Safety)

When using STO (Safe Torque Off) function please be sure to read the "Safetyfunctional Guide" of separate!
HF-430NEO conforms to STO (Safe Torque Off) defined in Functional Safety IEC 61800-5-2.
And further download "Safety function Guide (NT2512)”
from our website and carefully read it .
About the applicable model, refer to "Appendix EC Declaration of Conformity (Copy)" on page A-1 of "Safety function
Guide (NT2512)".

1-6

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
1.5 Compliance to UL standards
1.5.1 UL CAUTION

GENERAL:
HF-430NEO inverter is open type AC Inverter with three phase input and three phase output. It is intended to be used in
an enclosure. It is used to provide both an adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency to the AC motor. The inverter
automatically maintains the required volts-Hz ratio allowing the capability through the motor speed range. It ismulti-rated device and the ratings are selectable according to load types by operator with key pad operation.
Markings:
Maximum Surrounding Temperature:- ND (Normal Duty):
50degC- LD (Low Duty):
45degC- VLD (Very Low Duty): 40degC
Storage Environment rating:- 65degC (for transportation)
Instruction for installation:- Pollution degree 2 environment and Overvoltage category III
Electrical Connections:
See “7.5 Connect Wire to the Main Circuit Terminal Block” of user's guideInterconnection and wiring diagrams:
See “7.7 Control Circuit Terminal Area” of user's guide
Short circuit rating and overcurrent protection device rating:
200V class series models- Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum”.
400V class series models- Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 500 V maximum”.
Integral:- Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must
be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes

1-7

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
Terminal size and terminal tightening torque for field wiring:Model

HF4322-5A5

HF4322-7A5

HF4322-011

HF4322-015

HF4322-022

HF4322-030

HF4322-037

HF4322-045

HF4322-055-

Load Type
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND

Required
Torque(N.m)

3Conductor
size
(AWG)

Model

8

HF4322-5A5

6

HF4322-7A5

8
4

Load Type

4

HF4322-011

6
2.5-3.0

5.5 – 6.6

6.0

3

HF4322-015

4
2/0
1/0
1

HF4322-022

Parallel of 1/0

HF4322-030

2/0
6.0 – 10.0

Parallel of 1/0

15.0

4/0
Parallel of 2/0

6.0 – 10.0

10.0-12.0

Parallel of 1/0
Parallel of 3/0

HF4322-037

HF4322-045

HF4322-055

350kcmil

VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND
VLD
LD
ND

Required
Torque(N.m)

Conductor
size
(AWG)
10
12

3

8
10

8
4
4
6
1
2
3

6.0

15.0

15.0
6.0 – 10.0
15.0

1
1/0
1
Parallel of 1/0
2/0
1/0

Use 75degC only for temperature rating of field wiring.
Use Cupper conductors only.

Required protection by Fuse and circuit-breakers:
200V class series models
Fuse
Model
HF4324-5A5
HF4324-7A5
HF4324-011
HF4324-015
HF4324-022
HF4324-030
HF4324-037
HF4324-045
HF4324-055

Type

Circuit Breaker

Maximum Rating
Voltage (V)Maximum Rating

Current (A)Voltage (V)Current (A)

240

50
60
75
100
175
200
250
300
350

100
150
Class J or T

600

200
300
400
500

400V class series models
Model
HF4324-5A5
HF4324-7A5
HF4324-011
HF4324-015
HF4324-022
HF4324-030
HF4324-037
HF4324-045
HF4324-055

Type

Fuse
Maximum Rating
Voltage (V)Current (A)Circuit Breaker
Maximum Rating
Voltage (V)Current (A)75Class J or T

100

600

200
250

1-8

480

20
30
40
50
75
100
125
150
200

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
1.6 Precautions for installation◆ Notes for HF4322-011 (200V class 11kW)

For the use of HF4322-011 at low duty (LD)/very low duty (VLD), follow the installation procedures shown in the figure
below.
Change [Ub-03] to 00 and [Ub-03] to 01 to set VLD and LD, respectively.
Procedures:(1) Remove four truss head screws that hold the (upper and lower) brackets provided by factory configuration.
(2) Change the position of the screw holes for the (upper and lower) brackets.
(3) Tighten the (upper and lower) brackets using four truss head screws removed in (1).
(Tightening torque 2.2 to 2.5 Nm)(4) Install HF4322-011 on the wall using four screws prepared on your own.

Step (1)

Step (2)Screws prepared on your own
Step (4)Truss head screw
Step (3)Figure Front and right side
Step (3)Screws prepared on your own
Screws prepared on your own Step (4)Figure How to install

1-9

※Note
By shifting the mounting bracket, the depth dimensionof the inverter will be increased by 15mm.
Please be careful as to installation in the cabinet or etc.

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1◆ Notes for HF4322-022 (200V class 22kW)

For the use of HF4322-022 at very low duty (VLD), follow the installation procedures shown in the drawings below.
Change [Ub-03] to 00 to set VLD.

Procedures:(1) Tighten spacers to the (upper and lower) brackets as shown in Figure 1 using M3×8 screws included in the package.
(Tightening torque 0.6 to 0.8 Nm)(2) Install HF4322-022 on the wall using four screws prepared on your own.

Step (1)M3×8 screw

Step (1)Spacer

Step (2)Screws preparedon your own

Step (1)Spacer

M3×8 screw

Step (2)Screws preparedon your own
Figure Front and right side diagrams

Figure How to install

Note :
By adding spacers, the depth dimension of the inverter will be increased by 10mm. Please be careful as to installation in the cabinet or
etc.

1-10

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
Safety Guideline

Safety Guideline

SicherheitsrichtlinienEN

As "Warning" and "Caution" are critical information to prevent
hazardous situation, make sure to read this guideline fully along with
the instruction manual and follow the instructions therein.

Warning

CautionDa es sich bei „Warnung“ und „Achtung“ um überaus wichtige Hinweise
zur Verhinderung von Gefahrensituationen handelt, müssen Sie dieseRichtlinien sowie die Betriebsanleitung gründlich lesen und alle darin
angesprochenen Anweisungen befolgen.

: Improper handling may cause hazardous
situation (electric shock, fire, personal injury,etc.), resulting in a potentially serious personal
injury and/or death.

Warnung: Improper handling may cause hazardous
situation (fire, injuries, physical damage, etc.),
resulting in a possible medium damage or
personal injury. It may cause physical damages
only.

Achtung

Warning
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

GR

Please ensure the grounding (ground wire).
An electrician with expertise should work on wiring.
Make sure the power is turned OFF before starting up the system.
Make sure that the unit is installed before wiring.
Do not touch internal components or terminals of the inverter (orservo amplifier) or attach/remove the wiring or connectors while an
inverter is energized.
Do not open the front cover of the inverter when it is energized or
has residual voltage left.
Do not manipulate controls using wet hands.
Do not touch terminals or connectors even while the inverter (orservo amplifier) is energized but suspended.
Make sure that the inverter has been switched to a mode in which it
will not be operative after recovered when otherwise it may behazardous to the operator.
Please provide an emergency stop switch separately.
Reset the alarm after making sure that an operation command has
been disabled.
Turn OFF the power and wait for 10 minutes or more before working
on a service.
Unauthorized operators should not work on maintenance, service,
and part replacement.

: Unsachgemäße Handhabung führt unter
Umständenzu
Gefahrensituationen(elektrischer Schlag, Feuer, Personenschaden,usw.), welche wiederum zu schwerwiegenden
körperlichen Verletzungen und/oder Tod
führen können
: Unsachgemäße Handhabung führt unter
Umständen zu Gefahrensituationen (Feuer,
Verletzungen, Sachschaden, etc.), welche
wiederum zu mittelschweren Sach- oder
Personenschäden führen können.

Warnung• Stellen Sie eine ordnungsgemäße Erdung (Erdungskabel) sicher.
• Nur erfahrenes Personal sollte an der Verkabelung arbeiten.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Strom abgestellt ist, bevor Sie mit derArbeit am System beginnen.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Einheit korrekt eingebaut ist, bevor
Sie mit dem Verlegen der Kabel beginnen.
• Berühren Sie keine inneren Bauteile oder Klemmen desFrequenzumrichters (oder Servoverstärkers) und und befestigenoder entfernen Sie keinesfalls die Verkabelung oder Anschlüsse,solange der Frequenzumrichter am Stromnetz hängt.
• Öffnen Sie nicht die vordere Abdeckung des Frequenzumrichters,solange dieser am Stromnetz hängt oder Restspannung hat.
• Berühren Sie keine Bedienelemente mit nassen Händen.
• Berühren Sie keine Klemmen oder Anschlüsse, auch dann nicht,
wenn der Frequenzumrichter (oder Servoverstärker) bereits
abgeklemmt ist, da gefährliche Restspannungen vorhanden seinkönnen.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass sich der Frequenzumrichter in einem
Modus befindet, in dem er nach Netzwiederkehr nicht arbeitet, daansonsten eine Gefahrensituation für den Bediener besteht.
• Sorgen Sie bitte für die Bereitstellung eines separaten
Not-Aus-Schalters.
• Setzen Sie den Alarm zurück, nachdem Sie sichergestellt haben, dassein Betriebsbefehl deaktiviert wurde.
• Schalten Sie den Strom AUS und warten Sie mindestens 10 Minuten
bevor Sie mit den Wartungsarbeiten beginnen.
• Nicht autorisiertes Personal darf keine Reparatur- und
Wartungsarbeiten vornehmen und keine Teile austauschen
austauschen,

Caution• Attach the inverter to such incombustible as metal, and keep
combustibles away.
• Do not contaminate the inverter with foreign materials, including
dusts, etc.
• Install the inverter on a vertical wall without oscillations which canreliably support the unit weight described on the instruction
manual.
• Keep it away from hot and humid ambient environment withcorrosive gas, and explosive gas, etc. and install in a room without
direct sunlight.
• Make sure that the product's rated voltage matches the alternator's
voltage.
• Do not connect the alternator to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• Do not connect a resistance directly to a direct current terminal.
• Use a power line, leakage detection breaker, or electromagnetic
contactor with a designated (rated) capacity or equivalent.
• Do not stop the operation of the inverter (or servo amplifier) byturning ON/OFF the electromagnetic contactor placed at the power
supply and output.
• Tighten a screw with a rated torque. In addition, do not leave thescrew loosened.
• Do not touch the cooling fan.
• The cooling fin and the damping resistor are heated and hot. Do nottouch.
• Check if rotation, abnormal noise, oscillations of the motor could be
detected during operation.

Achtung• Bringen Sie den Frequenzumrichter an nicht brennbaren
Oberflächen wie Metall an und halten Sie ihn von brennbaren
Flächen fern.
• Verunreinigen Sie den Frequenzumrichter nicht mit Fremdstoffen,
wie z.B. Staub o.ä.
• Installieren Sie den Frequenzumrichter an einer senkrechten,
feststehenden Wand, die das in der Bedienungsanleitung
angegebene Gewicht des Frequenzumrichters sicher tragen kann.
• Installieren Sie den Frequenzumrichter in einem Raum ohne direkte
Sonneneinstrahlung und vermeiden Sie feucht-warme Bedingungen
und korrosives sowie explosives Atmosphäre.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Nennspannung des Produkts mit derNetzspannung übereinstimmt.
• Schließen Sie den Generator nicht an Abgangsklemmen (U, V, undW) an.
• Schließen Sie keinen Widerstand direkt an eine Gleichstromklemmean.
• Verwenden Sie für die Netzversorgung einen Motorschutzschalter,ein Schaltschütz oder etwas Ähnliches mit passender Leistung.
• Schalten Sie den Frequenzumrichters (oder Servoverstärker) nichtüber das Netzschütz aus.
• Ziehen Sie die Schraube mit dem angegebenen Drehmoment fest.
Es ist überaus wichtig, dass Sie die Schraube immer festziehen.
• Berühren Sie nicht das Gerätelüfter.
• Der Bremswiderstand und der Kühlkörper werden heiß. Fassen Sie
diese nicht an.
• Überprüfen Sie, ob der Motor dreht, ungewöhnliche Geräusche
macht oder ob Vibrationen während des Betriebs auftreten.

1-11

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
Consignes de sécurité

Linee guida sulla sicurezzaFR

Les sections «Danger» et «Attention» fournissent d’importantes
informations sur la prévention des situations dangereuses. Veillez parconséquent à lire les présentes consignes dans leur intégralité,
conjointement avec le manuel d'instructions, et à respecter les
instructions contenues dans ce manuel.

DangerAttention

IT

Poiché "Avvertenza" e "Attenzione" forniscono informazioni
fondamentali per prevenire situazioni pericolose, leggere interamente
le presenti linee guida e il manuale di istruzioni, attenendosi alleistruzioni fornite.

: une mauvaise manipulation peut entraîner
une situation dangereuse (choc électrique,incendie, blessure, etc.) et par conséquent, desblessures potentiellement graves voire
mortelles.

Avvertenza: une mauvaise manipulation peut entraîner
une situation dangereuse (incendie, blessures,
dégâts matériels, etc.) et par conséquent, desblessures ou dégâts matériels moyennement
sévères. Cela peut entraîner des dégâts
matériels uniquement.

Attenzione: L'errata
manipolazione
può
generaresituazioni
pericolose(scossa
elettrica,
incendio, lesioni personali, ecc.), inoltre
potrebbe causare gravi lesioni personali e/o ildecesso.
: L'errata
manipolazione
può
generaresituazioni pericolose (incendio, lesioni, danni
fisici, ecc.), inoltre potrebbe causare danni dimedia entità o lesioni personali. Può causaresolo danni fisici.

Avvertenza

Danger• Controllare la messa a terra (filo di messa a terra).
• Gli interventi sul cablaggio devono essere eseguiti da un elettricista
esperto.
• Assicurarsi che l'alimentazione sia SCOLLEGATA prima di avviare ilsistema.
• Verificare che l'unità venga installata prima del cablaggio.
• Non toccare i componenti interni o i morsetti dell'inverter (o delservoamplificatore), non collegare/rimuovere il cablaggio o iconnettori quando un inverter è sotto tensione.
• Non aprire il coperchio anteriore dell'inverter quando è sotto
tensione o in presenza di tensione residua.
• Non toccare i comandi con le mani bagnate.
• Non toccare i morsetti o i connettori neanche quando l'inverter (o ilservoamplificatore) è sotto tensione ma è sospeso.
• Assicurarsi che l'inverter sia stato commutato su una modalità in cui
non sarà operativo dopo il ripristino dell’alimentazione, poiché
altrimenti potrebbe rappresentare un pericolo per l'operatore.
• Predisporre separatamente un interruttore di arresto di emergenza.
• Reimpostare l'allarme dopo essersi assicurati che sia stato
disabilitato un comando operativo.
• Scollegare l'alimentazione e attendere 10 o più minuti prima di unintervento di assistenza.
• Gli operatori non autorizzati non devono eseguire interventi dimanutenzione, assistenza e sostituzione dei componenti.

• Veuillez vérifier la mise à la terre (câble de mise à la terre).
• Un électricien qualifié doit intervenir sur le câblage.
• Assurez-vous que l'alimentation est coupée avant de démarrer lesystème.
• Assurez-vous que l'unité est installée avant le câblage.
• Ne touchez pas les composants internes ni les bornes de l'onduleur(ou servoamplificateur), ni ne fixez/déposez le câblage ou lesconnecteurs lorsque l'onduleur est alimenté.
• N'ouvrez pas le capot avant de l'onduleur lorsque celui-ci est
alimenté ou parcouru par une tension résiduelle.
• Ne manipulez pas les commandes avec des mains mouillées.
• Ne touchez pas les bornes ni les connecteurs même lorsquel'onduleur (ou servoamplificateur) est alimenté mais que son
fonctionnement est suspendu.
• Après rétablissement de l'alimentation électrique, assurez-vous quel'onduleur est dans un mode dans lequel il est inopérant, sinon ilpeut présenter un risque pour l'opérateur.
• Veuillez fournir un contacteur d'arrêt d'urgence séparément.
• Réinitialisez l'alarme après vous être assuré qu'une commande defonctionnement a été désactivée.
• Coupez l'alimentation et attendez 10 minutes minimum avantd'effectuer un entretien.
• Les opérateurs non autorisés ne doivent pas effectuer demaintenance, d'entretien ou de remplacement de pièces.

Attenzione

Attention• Collegare l'inverter a materiali non combustibili come il metallo etenere lontani i combustibili.
• Non contaminare l'inverter con materiali estranei, quali le polveri,
ecc.
• Installare l'inverter su una parete verticale che non sia soggetta aoscillazioni e che sia in grado di supportare in maniera affidabile ilpeso dell'unità descritto nel manuale di istruzioni.
• Mantenerlo lontano da ambienti caldi e umidi, da ambienti con gas
corrosivi ed esplosivi, ecc.; installarlo in una stanza in cui non penetri
luce solare diretta.
• Assicurarsi che la tensione nominale del prodotto corrisponda alla
tensione dell'alternatore.
• Non collegare l'alternatore ai morsetti di uscita (U, V e W).
• Non collegare una resistenza direttamente a un morsetto che portacorrente continua.
• Utilizzare una linea di alimentazione, un interruttore di rilevamento
di dispersione, oppure un contattore elettromagnetico con capacità
designata (nominale) o equivalente.
• Non interrompere il funzionamento dell'inverter (o delservoamplificatore) accendendo o spegnendo il contattore
elettromagnetico posizionato sull'alimentazione e sull'uscita.
• Serrare una vite con coppia nominale. Inoltre, non lasciare la vite
allentata.
• Non toccare la ventola di raffreddamento.
• L'aletta di raffreddamento e la resistenza di smorzamento vengono
riscaldate e scottano. Non toccare.
• Controllare se, durante il funzionamento, si rilevano rotazione,
rumori anomali, oscillazioni del motore.

• Fixez l'onduleur à un matériau non combustible tel que le métal, etmaintenez les combustibles à l'écart.
• Ne contaminez pas l'onduleur avec des matériaux étrangers,
notamment de la poussière, etc.
• Installez l'onduleur sur une paroi verticale sans oscillation etpouvant supporter le poids de l'unité, indiqué dans le manueld'instructions.
• Conservez-le à l'abri de la chaleur, de l'humidité, des gaz corrosifs etexplosifs, etc., et installez-le à l'abri du soleil.
• Assurez-vous que la tension nominale du produit correspond à latension de l'alternateur.
• Ne connectez pas l'alternateur aux bornes de sortie (U, V et W).
• Ne connectez pas de résistance directement à une borne de courant
continu.
• Utilisez une ligne d'alimentation, un disjoncteur anti-fuite ou uncontacteur électromagnétique avec une capacité (nominale)désignée ou équivalente.
• N'interrompez pas le fonctionnement de l'onduleur (ouservoamplificateur)enallumant/coupant
lecontacteurélectromagnétique placé au niveau de l'alimentation électrique etde la sortie.
• Serrez une vis à un couple nominal. En outre, ne laissez pas la vis
desserrée.
• Ne touchez pas le ventilateur de refroidissement.
• Le ventilateur de refroidissement et la résistance d'amortissement
sont chauffés et chauds. N'y touchez pas.
• Recherchez d'éventuels bruits anormaux, rotations ou oscillations dumoteur pendant son fonctionnement.

1-12

Safety Instructions

Chapter 1
Directrices de seguridad

Indicações de segurança

ES"Advertencia" y "Precaución" indican elementos de información
esenciales para evitar situaciones peligrosas. Por lo tanto, asegúrese deleer detenidamente estas directrices junto con el manual de
instrucciones, y de seguir las indicaciones que contienen.

Advertencia

PrecauciónPO

As secções "Aviso" e "Cuidado" contêm informações essenciais paraevitar situações de perigo; certifique-se de que lê estas indicações na
totalidade, juntamente com o manual de instruções e siga as
instruções neles contidas.

: Una manipulación incorrecta puede originar
situaciones peligrosas (descargas eléctricas,
incendios, lesiones personales, etc.), quepueden causar lesiones personales graves e
incluso la muerte.

Aviso

Cuidado: Una manipulación incorrecta puede originar
situaciones peligrosas (incendios, lesiones,daños físicos, etc.), que pueden causar daños
materiales o lesiones personales. Puede que
cause solamente daños físicos.

: O manuseamento incorreto pode causar uma
situação de perigo (choque elétrico, incêndio,lesões, etc.), resultando em potenciais lesões
pessoais sérias e/ou morte.
: O manuseamento incorreto pode causar uma
situação de perigo (incêndio, lesões, danosfísicos, etc.), resultando num possível dano oulesão pessoal de dimensões médias. Podecausar apenas danos físicos.

Aviso

Advertencia• Certifique-se de que o dispositivo é ligado à terra corretamente(cabo de ligação à terra).
• A instalação elétrica deve ser efetuada por um eletricista com
formação para o efeito.
• Certifique-se de que a alimentação está DESLIGADA antes de ligar osistema.
• Certifique-se de que a unidade está instalada antes da montagem
da instalação elétrica.
• Não toque em terminais ou componentes internos do conversor (ouservomecanismo) nem ligue/retire os cabos ou conectores quando
o conversor está com corrente.
• Não abra a cobertura dianteira do conversor quando este está com
corrente ou tem tensão residual.
• Não manipule os controlos com as mãos molhadas.
• Não toque em terminais ou conectores mesmo quando o conversor(ou servomecanismo) está com corrente mas suspenso.
• Certifique-se de que o conversor foi ligado num modo em que não
estará operacional após a restauração da alimentação de corrente,caso contrário pode ser perigoso para o operador.
• Disponibilize um interruptor de paragem de emergência
separadamente.
• Reponha o alarme depois de se certificar de que o comando defuncionamento foi desativado.
• DESLIGUE a alimentação e espere pelo menos 10 minutos antes derealizar um trabalho.
• A manutenção, revisão e a substituição de peças não devem serrealizadas por operadores não autorizados.

• Asegure la conexión a tierra (cable de masa).
• Un electricista cualificado debe ocuparse del cableado.
• Asegúrese de que la alimentación está desconectada antes deactivar el sistema.
• Asegúrese de que la unidad está instalada antes de tender elcableado.
• No toque los componentes internos ni los terminales del inversor (oservoamplificador), ni conecte/desconecte el cableado o losconectores con el inversor conectado a la alimentación.
• No abra la cubierta delantera del inversor si está conectado a laalimentación o si tiene tensión residual.
• No manipule los controles con las manos húmedas.
• No toque los terminales o los conectores con el inversor (o elservoamplificador) conectado a la alimentación, ni siquiera aunqueesté suspendido.
• Asegúrese de que el inversor se encuentra en un modo en el que nopueda reactivarse cuando se restablezca la alimentación y esto
suponga un peligro para el operario.
• Asegúrese de incorporar un interruptor de parada de emergencia
independiente.
• Restablezca la alarma una vez se haya asegurado de haberdesactivado el comando de funcionamiento.
• Desconecte la alimentación y espere como mínimo 10 minutos
antes de iniciar un trabajo de reparación.
• Los operarios que no cuenten con la autorización necesaria no
deben realizar tareas de mantenimiento, reparación ni sustitución depiezas.

CuidadoPrecaución• Ligue o conversor a materiais não combustíveis, como metal, emantenha-o afastado de materiais combustíveis.
• Não contamine o conversor com materiais estranhos, incluindo
poeiras, etc.
• Instale o conversor na vertical, numa parede sem oscilações e com
capacidade para suportar de forma fiável o peso da unidade descrito
no manual de instruções.
• Certifique-se de que o dispositivo não é colocado em locais com
ambientes húmidos e quentes com gás corrosivo e gás explosivo,
etc.. Instale-o num compartimento sem luz natural direta.
• Certifique-se de que a tensão nominal do produto corresponde àtensão do alternador.
• Não ligue o alternador a terminais de saída (U, V, e W).
• Não ligue uma resistência diretamente a um terminal de correntecontínua.
• Utilize um cabo de alimentação, um disjuntor de deteção de fugas
ou um contactor eletromagnético com uma capacidade (nominal)
designada ou equivalente.
• Não interrompa o funcionamento do conversor (ouservomecanismo)
LIGANDO/DESLIGANDO
ocontactor
eletromagnético localizado na fonte e saída de alimentação.
• Aperte o parafuso ao binário nominal. Para além disso, não deixe oparafuso desapertado.
• Não toque no ventilador de arrefecimento.
• O ventilador de arrefecimento e a resistência de amortecimentoestão quentes. Não toque.
• Verifique se ocorrem oscilações, ruídos irregulares ou rotação domotor durante o funcionamento.

• Instale el inversor sobre materiales no combustibles, como metales
en general, y mantenga los materiales combustibles a una distancia
prudencial.
• Evite contaminar el inversor con materiales extraños, como el polvo,
etcétera.
• Instale el inversor en una pared vertical sin oscilaciones y lo bastante
resistente como para soportar el peso de la unidad, tal y como se
describe en el manual de instrucciones.
• Mantenga la unidad alejada de ambientes calurosos y húmedos con
gases corrosivos y explosivos. Realice la instalación en una sala sin
luz solar directa.
• Asegúrese de que la tensión nominal del producto coincide con latensión del alternador.
• No conecte el alternador a los terminales de salida (U, V y W).
• No conecte una resistencia directamente a un terminal de corriente
continua.
• Use un cable de alimentación, un disyuntor de detección de fugas o
un contactor electromagnético con la capacidad nominal designada
o equivalente.
• No detenga el inversor (o el servoamplificador) apagando oencendiendo el contactor electromagnético ubicado en la fuente dealimentación y en la salida.
• Apriete el tornillo al par especificado. Asegúrese de no dejar eltornillo sin apretar.
• No toque el ventilador.
• El disipador de calor y la resistencia de amortiguación se calientan
considerablemente. No los toque.
• Compruebe si se producen rotaciones, ruidos u oscilaciones
anormales en el motor durante su funcionamiento.

1-13

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2.1 Check the Inverter
Check the contents in the package, and confirm the inverter model with a specification label.

M3×8 screw : 4pcs
Spacer: 4pcs(HF4322-022)

Eye bolts for hanging the inverter
HF4322-030 to 055
Instruction Manual
HF-430NEO
HF4324-030 to 055(This document)(enclosed in the package)
Configuration and description contents vary depending on the model. Refer to User's Guide for more details

The unit number of the product is as follows:

HF4322-037 example illustration in below.
Optional slots
 Refer to each optional
product instruction for

ＨＦ４３２ ４ - ５ Ａ ５
(1)

(2)

(3)

Heat sink

Operator keypad(1) Series name HF-430NEO

USB (Micro-B)(2) Input power specification
2: three-phase 200V class;
4: three-phase 400V class(3) Applicable motor
5A5 : 5.5kW 7A5 : 7.5kW
011 : 11kW
015 : 15kW
022 : 22kW
030 : 30kW
037 : 37kW
045 : 45kW
055 : 55kW

Control circuit
terminal block
Wire separation plate
Backing plate

Main circuit
terminals
Terminal block cover・Specification label example
Description example for HF4324-5A5

Specification label

Inverter model
Input ratings(Frequency/voltage/No. ofphases/Current)
Output ratings(Frequency/voltage/No. ofphases/Rate current)
MFG No.; factory serial No.

Versions due to differences in firmware etc. are displayed.

2-1

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.2 Install the Inverter
Transportation• The inverter is made of plastics component. When carrying the inverter, handle it carefully to prevent the parts

from damaging.
• Do not carry the inverter by holding the front or terminal block cover. Doing so may cause the inverter to fall.
• Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or its parts are missing.

Ambient temperature• Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the ambient temperature goes above or below the allowable range

defined by the standard inverter specification.
Ambient temperature:
ND rated: -10 to 50°C
LD rated: -10 to 45°C
VLD rated : -10 to 40°C
• Keep sufficient space around the inverter. Measure the temperature in a position about 5 cm distant from thebottom-center point of the inverter, and check that the measured temperature is within the allowable range.
Operating the inverter at a temperature outside this range will shorten the inverter life (especially the capacitor life),
resulting in damage to the inverter.

Do not install on a high temperature, high humidity or easily condensation area
• Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the relative humidity goes above or below the range (20% to 90% RH),

as defined by the standard inverter specification. Avoid a place where the inverter is subject to condensation.
• Condensation inside the inverter will result in short circuits, which may cause damage to the inverter. Also avoid

places where the inverter is exposed to direct sunlight.
•

Install inverter on nonflammable (E.g. metal) surface• The inverter will reach a high temperature (up to about 150°C) during operation. Install the inverter on a verticalwall surface made of nonflammable material (e.g., metal) to avoid the risk of fire.
• In particular, keep sufficient distance between the inverter and other heat sources (e.g., braking resistors andreactors) if they are installed in the vicinity.

10 cm or more

5 cm or more

5 cm or more

In order to replace life cycle parts on following
models require a clearance of 22cm or more:• HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022• HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-022
In order to replace life cycle parts on following
models is required to remove the installed units:• HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-011• HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-011
Wall

10 cm or more・Keep enough clearance between the inverter and the above andbelow wiring ducts to prevent cooling air ventilation from obstructing.
For dimension drawing of inverter see chapter 2-3.

Inverter

Air flow2-2Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Installation environment• Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the inverter is subject to dust, corrosive gases, explosive gases,

flammable gases, grinding fluid mist, or salt water.
• Foreign particles entering the inverter will be the cause of failure. If you use the inverter in a considerably dusty

environment, install the inverter inside a totally enclosed panel.

Installation method and position• Install the inverter vertically and securely with screws or bolts on a surface that is free from vibrations and that canbear the inverter weight.
• If the inverter is not installed properly, its cooling performance may be degraded and tripping or inverter damage

may result.

Mounting in an enclosure• When mounting multiple inverters in an enclosure with a ventilation fan, carefully design the layout of theventilation fan, air intake port, and inverters. An inappropriate layout will reduce the inverter-cooling effect andraise the ambient temperature. Plan the layout properly so that the inverter ambient temperature will remain
within the range specified in the specification table.
Ventilation
Ventilation
Screw

Screw

Inverter

Screw

Inverter(Unacceptable)(Acceptable)

Screw

Position of ventilation fan• When the inverter is installed below ventilation fan, the incoming dust may adhere to the inverter.
Place in a position to avoid this falling dust.

Reduction of enclosure size
• External heat sink installation may reduce internal heat emission and reduce the enclosure size.
• External heat sink mounting for the inverter (5.5〜37kW) requires an optional metal fitting.
• Other models than above can be installed with the originally attached metal fitting.

To mount the inverter for external heat sink, cut out the enclosure panel according to the specified cutting dimensions.
• The cooling section (including the heat sink) positioned outside the enclosure has a cooling fan. Therefore, do notplace the enclosure in any environment where it is exposed to water drops, oil mist, or dust.
• The heat sink part reaches a high temperature. Install a protection cover as needed.
• Watt loss (W) (at 100% load, approximate)
HF4322Model No.
5A5
7A5
011
015
022
030
037
ND
348
376
498
742
1163
1317
1534
Watt loss
LD
365
400
625
922
1263
1536
1801
(W)
VLD
420
520
754
1059
1377
1698
2092
Model No.
Watt loss
(W)

ND
LD
VLD

5A5
235
260
290

7A5
240
280
306

011
260
306
380

015
361
444
482

HF4324022
687
805
860

030
783
854
920

037
812
880
971

045
1625
1940
2300

055
1878
2669
3046

045
1047
1218
1300

055
1130
1488
1592

Note: This data are reference values at our site and varies depending on the power supply environment and motor power
factor.

2-3

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Procedure to hang an inverter
When lifting the inverter, please lift according to the figure below.
(1) Rigidly tighten the accessory hanging bolts to top of left and right.

(2) Keep an angle less than 45 degree when hanging with wire.

2-4

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.3 Dimension Drawing

・If you add optional parts to the inverter, some extra space is required in the direction of the depth of the inverter
depending on the wiring layout. Keep a clearance of 50 mm or more. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each
optional product.
Model
200V class:400V class:

W(mm)
210

Dimension

Model

HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-011（5.5 to 11kW）
HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-011（5.5 to 11kW）

H(mm)
260

D(mm)
170

200V class:400V class:

HF4322-015 , HF4322-022（15 and 22kW）
HF4324-015 , HF4324-022（15 and 22kW）

W(mm)
245

Dimension

H(mm)
390

D(mm)
190

210
245
2-7×9.5 long hole

229

390

376

2-φ7

246

260

189

7

1.6

1.6

70

84

190

170

7

Model

Dimension

Model

200V class:400V class:

HF4322-030（30kW）
HF4324-030（30kW）

W(mm)
300

H(mm)
540

200V class : HF4322-037, HF4322-045（37 and 45kW）
400V class : HF4324-037 to HF4324-055（37 to 55kW）

D(mm)
195

W(mm)
390

300

265

2-φ12

520

550

15

2-φ10

510

12

300

195

250

265

2.3

2.3

540

D(mm)
250

390

300

10

H(mm)
550

2-5

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Model
200V class:

HF4322-055（55kW）

W(mm)
480

Dimension

H(mm)
700

D(mm)
250

480
380

670

380

250

12

2.3

700

2-φ12

2-6

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.4 Inverter Wiring
Applicable peripheral equipment

Notes:• The description of peripheral equipment is for 3-phase, 4-pole squirrel-cage motor.
• Select breakers with proper interrupting capacity. (Use inverter-ready breakers)• Use earth-leakage circuit breakers (ELB or MCB) to ensure safety.
• Use copper electric wire (HIV cable) with allowable temperature rating 75°C or more.
• If the power line exceeds 20 m, use cable with major wire size for the power line.
• Tighten each terminal screw with the specified tightening torque.
Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits and fire.
Excessive tightening torque may cause damage to the terminal block or inverter body.
• When selecting a rated sensitivity current for earth-leakage circuit breaker, use a separated
breaker considering a total cable length of between Inverter-Power supply and Inverter–Motordistance. Do not use a high-speed type of earth-leakage circuit breaker. Use a inverter-readybreaker, because the high-speed type may malfunction.
• When using a CV cable for wiring through a metal conduit, the average current leakage would be
30mA/km.
• When using a high relative dielectric constant cable such as IV cable, the leakage current is about
eight times as high as the standard cable. Therefore, when using an IV cable, use Earth-leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) with rated sensitivity current by eight times higher in the table below. If thetotal cable length exceeds 100 m, use a CV cable.
•Do not pull the power line cable after wiring. Doing so may cause screw loosening.

Powersupply
<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

Total cable length
100 m or less
300 m or less

<5>

<6>

PR
N

t1

<3>
<4>

<8>

INV P
r1

Name
Electric wire
Earth-leakage circuit breaker ELCB or
Magnet circuit breaker MCB
Magnetic contactor MC
Input AC reactor(For harmonic control, power supply
coordination, and power factor
correction)

<2>

<7>
R S T
P1

No.
<1>

<9>

<10>

<5>

Noise filter for inverter<6>

Zero-phase reactor

Function<8>

Radio noise filter on the input side
(Capacitor filter)
DC reactor

<11>

<9>

Braking resistor

<12>

<10>

Regenerative braking unit

<11>

Noise filter on the output side

U V W

<7>

<13>

<12> Zero-phase reactor

M
Motor

<13>

Sensitivity current (mA)50100

Output AC reactor

2-7

See "Recommended cable gauges, wiring accessories, and crimp
terminals” on Chapter 2.6.
Use input reactor for harmonic wave control, or when power supply
voltage imbalance exceeds 3% or more, or when the power supply
capacity is over 500 kVA or more, or when the power voltage may
change rapidly. This reactor also improves the power factor.
This noise filter reduces the conductive noise that is generated by
the inverter and transmitted in cables. Connect this noise filter tothe primary side (input side) of the inverter.
The inverter may generate radio noise through power supply wiring
during operation.
Use this noise filter to reduce the radio noise (radiant noise).
Use this noise filter to reduce the radiant noise radiated from input
cables.
Use DC reactor to reduce the harmonic generated by the inverter.
Use these devices to increase the braking torque of the inverter for
operation in which the inverter turns the connected load on and offvery frequently or decelerates the load running with a high momentof inertia.
Connect this noise filter between the inverter and motor to reduce
the radiant noise radiated from cables for the purpose of reducing
the electromagnetic interference with radio and television reception
and preventing malfunctions of measuring equipment and sensors.
Use this noise filter to reduce the noise generated on the output
side of the inverter.
(This noise filter can be used on both the input and output sides.)Inverter driven motor may cause large vibrations compared tocommercial power supply direct start motor.
Connect Output AC reactor between inverter and motor to lessen
the pulsation of motor. Also, connect output AC reactor, when thecable length between inverter and motor is longer (10 m or more),to prevent thermal relay malfunction due to the harmonic waves
generated by switching operation of inverter. Note that the thermal
relay can be replaced with a current sensor to avoid the
malfunction.

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.5 Wiring of the main circuit

Wire the main circuit of the inverter.
The following illustration shows the power supply and wiring connections to a motor only.
Open a terminal block cover to wire the terminal block in the main circuit.
Internal EMC filter
Earth-leakage
circuit breaker

Magnetic
contactor

ELB

MC

Jumper or terminal

Jumper

R/L1
N/- PR

Disable Enable
Three-phase
AC power
supply

P1

P/+

S/L2
U/T1

T/L3

V/T2
200V class:
200 to 240Vac
400V class:
380 to 500Vac

M

W/T3

J51 connector

Control circuit
power supply

Three-phase
AC motor

r1

Main circuit
terminal section

Type-D grounding(200 V class model)
Type-C grounding(400 V class model)

t1
G

G

Explanation of main circuit terminal block
Symbol
R,S,T(L1,L2,L3)
U,V,W(T1,T2,T3)
P1, P
(+)

Terminal name

Description

Main power input

Connect to the AC power supply.

Inverter output

Connect a Three-phase motor.

DC choke
connection terminal

Remove the P1-P jumper from terminals, and connect the optional DC
choke for power factor improvement.
Connect the optional external braking resistor.
See “Chapter 7 Specifications” for built-in braking circuit inverter
models.

P,PR(+)

External chopper braking
resistor connection terminal

P,N
(+,-)

Regenerative braking unit
connection terminal

Connect the optional regenerative braking unit.

E(G)Inverter ground terminal

This serves as a ground terminal for the inverter chassis to ground.
Connect 200V class and 400V class models to Type-D grounding andType-C grounding, respectively.

・See “Chapter 1 Safety Instructions” for response to CE and UL standards.
・The screw size may vary depending on terminal. Refer to Page 2-9/2-10 for the size of the terminal screw for the powerline cable while for other terminals, refer to the drawings of the wiring on Page 2-14 or later.
・The tables on Page 2-9/2-10 list the specifications of cables, crimp terminals, and terminal screw tightening torques forreference.
・Recommended wire gauges vary depending on the rated load settings (ND/LD/VLD).

2-8

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2

2.6 Recommended wire gauges, wiring accessories and crimp terminals■200V classModel

HF4322-5A5

HF4322-7A5

HF4322-011

HF4322-015

HF4322-022

HF4322-030

Ratingsetting
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND

HF4322-037

HF4322-045

HF4322-055

LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD

Power line cable
AWG(mm2)
R,S,T,U,V,W,
P,P1,N

Groundingcable
AWG(mm2)

8(8.4)

8(8.4)

External braking
Tightening
Power line cable
Crimp
resistor
torque( N•m)
Terminal screw
terminal
between P andPower/Ground
Power/Groundsize
2)(maximum value)
PR AWG(mm8(8.4)

8-5/8-5
M5

8(8.4)

8(8.4)

8-5/8-5

6(13.3)6(13.3)6(13.3)6(13.3)

14-5/8-5
14-6/14-6

4(21.2)4(21.2)

22-6/14-6

4(21.2)6(13.3)4(21.2)3(26.7)3(26.7)1(42.4)
1/0(53.5)
2/0(67.4)
2/0(67.4)1(42.4)
1/0(53.5)
2/0(67.4)

M6

22-6/14-6
38-6/14-6
60-8/14-6
70-8/14-6
70-8/22-8

1/0×2(53.5×2)

60-8/22-8
M8

4/0(107.2)

100-8/22-8

4(21.2)
1/0×2(53.5×2)

60-8/22-8-

1/0×2(53.5×2)

60-8/22-8

2/0×2(67.4×2)
350kcmil(177)70-8/22-8
180-10/38-8

3/0×2(85.0×2)

3(26.7)M10

80-10/38-8

3.0/3.0(3.0/3.0)

4.0/4.0(5.2/5.2)
2.5-3.0/4.9(4.1/5.2)
5.5-6.6/4.9(9.0/5.2)
6.0/11.7(9.0/12.5)
15.0/11.7(15.0/12.5)
6.0-10.0/11.7(12.0/12.5)
6.0-10.0/11.7(12.0/12.5)
10.0-12.0/11.7(16.5/12.5)

・The wire gauges in the above table shows the designed values based on HIV cable (with thermal resistance of 75°C).
・Please use the round type crimp terminals (for the UL standard) suitable for the use electric wire when you connect theelectric wire with the main circuit terminal block. Please put on pressure to the crimp terminals with a crimp tool thatthe crimp terminal maker recommends.
・When applying the UL standard, please refer to "1.5 Compliance to UL standards ". Tightening torque is recommended“maximum value” in the above table.

2-9Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■400V classModel

HF4324-5A5

HF4324-7A5

HF4324-011

HF4324-022

HF4324-011

HF4324-030

HF4324-037

HF4324-045

HF4324-055

Ratingsetting
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD
ND
LD
VLD

Power line cable
AWG(mm2)
R,S,T,U,V,W,
P,P1,N

Groundingcable
AWG(mm2)

External braking
Tightening
Power line cable
Crimp
resistor
torque( N•m)
Terminal screw
terminal
between P andPower/Ground
Power/Groundsize
2)(maximum value)
PR AWG(mm12(3.3)12(3.3)12(3.3)10(5.3)10(5.3)10(5.3)10(5.3)10(5.3)10(5.3)

5.5-5/5.5-58(8.4)

8(8.4)

8(8.4)

8-5/8-58(8.4)

8(8.4)

8(8.4)

8-6/8-6

5.5-5/5.5-5
M5

3.0/3.0(3.0/3.0)

4.0/4.0(5.2/5.2)
6(13.3)4(21.2)3(26.7)2(33.6)1(42.4)6(13.3)8(8.4)

M6

4(21.2)

14-6/8-6
22-6/8-6
38-6/14-6
60-6/14-6

6(13.3)

2.5-3.0/4.9(4.1/5.2)

1(42.4)15.0/11.7(15.0/12.5)

M8

1/0(53.5)
1/0(53.5)
2/0(67.4)

60-8/14-8-

1(42.4)60-8/22-8
70-8/22-8

4(21.2)

1/0×2(53.5×2)

60-8/22-8

15.0/11.7(15.0/12.5)
6.0-10.0/11.7(12.0/12.5)

・The wire gauges in the above table shows the designed values based on HIV cable (with thermal resistance of 75°C).
・Please use the round type crimp terminals (for the UL standard) suitable for the use electric wire when you connect theelectric wire with the main circuit terminal block. Please put on pressure to the crimp terminals with a crimp tool thatthe crimp terminal maker recommends.
・When applying the UL standard, please refer to "1.5 Compliance to UL standards ". Tightening torque is recommended“maximum value” in the above table.

2-10Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.7 Applicable circuit breaker■200V class• For ND rating

Applicable devices (Input Voltage 200 to 220V)

Motor

Without reactor(DCL or ACL)
Earth-leakage breakerCircuit(ELB)
Breaker(kW)

Mitsubishi Elec.

Applicable
Model

Rated
Current（A）

Model

HF4322-5A5
HF4322-7A5
HF4322-011
HF4322-015
HF4322-022
HF4322-030
HF4322-037
HF4322-045

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55

NV63-SV

50
60
75
100
125
175
200
250
300
350

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

NV400-CW

Examplemodel

Magnetic
Contactor

With reactor(DCL or ACL)
Earth-leakage breakerCircuit(ELB)
BreakerMagnetic
Contactor

Fuji Elec.

Mitsubishi Elec.

Fuji Elec.

Example model

NF63-SV

Example model

SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N10SC-N11

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

NF400-CW

NV63-SV

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

NV400-CW

Rated
Current
（A）
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
225
250

Examplemodel
NF63-SV

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

NF400-CW

Example
model
SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N6
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N10• For LD/VLD rating
Applicable devices(Input Voltage 200 to 220V)
Without reactor(DCL or ACL)

Applicable
Model

Motor

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

CircuitBreaker(kW)
Mitsubishi Elec.
Examplemodel
HF4322-5A5
HF4322-7A5
HF4322-011
HF4322-015
HF4322-022
HF4322-030
HF4322-037
HF4322-045
HF4322-055

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75

NV63-SV
NV125-SV

Current
Rate
40
50
75

NV400-CWNF630-CW

150
200
250
300
400
500

Magnetic
Contactor(MC)

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

Fuji Elec.
Examplemodel
NF63-SV
NF125-SV

125
NV250-SV

With reactor(DCL or ACL)

NF400-CWNF630-CW

Mitsubishi Elec.

Magnetic
Contactor(MC)
Fuji Elec.

Examplemodel

Examplemodel

Current
Rate

Examplemodel

Example
model

SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S

NV32-SV
NV63-SV

30
40
60

NF32-SV
NF63-SV

SC-5-1
SC-N1
SC-N2

SC-N4
NF250-SV

CircuitBreaker

SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N10SC-N11
SC-N12

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

NV400-CW

100
125
150
200
225
300
400

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

NF400-CW

SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N10SC-N11・Device model name on above table shows example selection.
The device selection should be made in base on rated current, short circuit current capability and accordance to the local
electrical legislation.
・Applicable motor capacity is based on 200Vac, 60Hz, 4 pole IE3 motor.
・Refer to the wire gauge table on chapter 2.6 for power line cable.
・When selecting oversize inverter capacity compare to motor rating, select magnetic contactor according to the inverter
capacity.

2-11

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■400V class• For ND rating

Applicable devices (Input Voltage 400 to 440V)
Without reactor(DCL or ACL)

Applicable
Model

Motor

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

CircuitBreaker(kW)
Mitsubishi Elec.

HF4324-5A5
HF4324-7A5
HF4324-011
HF4324-015
HF4324-022
HF4324-030
HF4324-037
HF4324-045
HF4324-055

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55

(DCL or ACL)
With reactor
Magnetic
Contactor(MC)
Fuji Elec.

Examplemodel

Current
Rate

Examplemodel

Examplemodel

NV32-SV

30

NF32-SV

SC-5-1

NV63-SV

50
60
75
100
125
150
175
200

NF63-SV

SC-N1
SC-N2

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

Mitsubishi Elec.
Examplemodel
NV32-SV

NV63-SV

SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7

CircuitBreaker

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

Current
Rate
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150

Magnetic
Contactor(MC)
Fuji Elec.

Examplemodel
NF32-SV

NF63-SV

Examplemodel
SC-5-1SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N6

• For LD/VLD rating
Applicable devices (Input Voltage 400 to 440V)
Without reactor(DCL or ACL)

With reactor(DCL or ACL)

Applicable
Model

Motor

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

CircuitBreaker(kW)
Mitsubishi Elec.
Examplemodel

HF4324-030
HF4324-037
HF4324-045

5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55

HF4324-055

75

HF4324-5A5
HF4324-7A5
HF4324-011
HF4324-015
HF4324-022

NV32-SV
NV63-SV

NV125-SV

NV250-SV
NV400-CWCurrent
Rate
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250

Magnetic
Contactor(MC)

Earth-leakage breaker(ELB)

Fuji Elec.
Examplemodel

Examplemodel

NF32-SV

SC-5-1

NF63-SV

SC-N1
SC-N2

NF125-SV

NF250-SV
NV400-CW

Mitsubishi Elec.
Examplemodel
NV32-SV

NV63-SV

SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8

CircuitBreaker

NV125-SV

NV250-SV

Current
Rate
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200

Magnetic
Contactor(MC)
Fuji Elec.

Examplemodel

Examplemodel

NF32-SV

SC-5-1

NF63-SV

SC-N1
SC-N2

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7

・Device model name on above table shows example selection. The device selection should be made in base on rated
current, short circuit current capability and accordance to the local electrical legislation.
・Applicable motor capacity is based on 400Vac, 60Hz, 4 pole IE3 motor.
・Refer to the wire gauge table in chapter 2.6.
・When selecting oversize inverter capacity compare to motor rating, select according to the inverter capacity.

2-12Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.8 Chopper Braking Resistor• HF-430NEO has a built-in chopper braking circuit in model below.

HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022
HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-037• By using an optional braking resistor, permit to use for high regeneration load application such as lift or high speed
load.
• Using optional braking unit, permit to use on high regenerative load application even for models without built-in
chopper braking circuit.
• The table below shows an example selection of braking resistor to output 100% of braking torque for each motor
rating on list.

■200V class
Model

Applicable
motor
(kW)

HF4322-5A5
HF4322-7A5

5.5
7.5

HF4322-011

11

HF4322-015

15

Min.
Resistor
(Ω)
16
10

7.5

18.5
HF4322-022

5
22Braking Resistor
Braking
Thermalresistor Connection
relayModel No.
Setting(A)X435AC069
2S
5.5(10Ω750W)
X435AC094(7Ω750W)
3S
6.7＊
X435AC064
4S
11.0(2.5Ω750W)
X435AC054
5S
14.1(1.6Ω750W)
X435AC065
6S
16.5(1.1Ω750W)

HF4322-030

Braking Unit and Braking Resistor
Braking
unit
Model

Min.
Resistor(Ω)

Braking resistor
Model No.

Connection

Thermalrelay
Setting(A)

-

-

-

-

-

BRD-E3-30K

4

8S

22.4

5S×2P

27.4

6S×2P

33.0

8S×2P

44.7

HF4322-037
-

-

-

-

BRD-E3-55K

HF4322-045

2

HF4322-055

X435AC066(0.6Ω750W)
X435AC054(1.6Ω750W)
X435AC065(1.1Ω750W)
X435AC066(0.6Ω750W)

・Using 5 series and parallel resistors, will require in total 10 resistors.
・P : parallel connection S: series connection＊Braking torque＝70％■400V class
Model

Applicable
motor
(kW)

HF4324-5A5

5.5

HF4324-7A5

7.5

Min.
Resistor(Ω)
70

35
HF4324-011

11

HF4324-015

15

24

HF4324-022

18.5
22

20

HF4324-030

30
15

HF4324-037

37

HF4324-045

45-

HF4324-055

Braking Resistor
Braking
Thermalresistor Connection
relayModel No.
Setting(A)Y135AA209
3P
2.7

Braking Unit and Braking Resistor
Braking
Unit
Model

Min.
Resistor(Ω)

-

-

-

10

X435AC065(1.1Ω750W)
X435AC064(2.5Ω750W)

Braking Resistor
Connection
Model No.

Thermalrelay
Setting(A)(250Ω400W)

X435AC058(30Ω750W)
X435AC103(20Ω750W)
X435AC069(10Ω750W)
X435AC063(4.5Ω750W)
X435AC064(2.5Ω750W)
X435AC054(1.6Ω750W)
-

2S

3.5

3S

3.9

4S

5.5

6S

8.2

8S

11.0

10S

13.7

-

-

55

2-13

BRD-EZ3-55K

-

-

12S

16.5

8S×2P

21.9

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.9 Wiring
Model

Main Circuit Terminal

200V class : HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-011（5.5 to 11kW）
400V class : HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-011（5.5 to 11kW）

Motor output wire
5.5kW,7.5kW
Screw size
r1,t1 : M4
Ground terminal: M5
Other terminal: M5

Control circuit
terminal
Main circuit terminal

r1

T1

OFF G

ON

R
S
T
U
V
W
(L1) (L2) (L3) (T1) (T2) (T3)
E
P1
P
N PR
E
(G)
(+) (-)(G)

11kW
Screw size
EMC filter
r1,t1 : M4
enabledGround terminal: M6 EMC filter
Other terminal: M6 disabled

Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)＊Switch the short circuit connector to enable or disable the EMC filter.
Model
200V class : HF4322-015,HF4322-022（15 and 22kW）
r1

Control circuit
terminal

Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)r1

PR

Power input wire

Main circuit terminal

R
(L1)

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P
(+)

P1

N
(-)

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

Motor output wire
E(G)Earth terminal(With short bar)・To enable the EMC filter, fix the grounding screw equippedwith short bar to the earth terminal for enabling the EMC filter.

E(G)Earth terminal for enabling
EMC filter
15kW
Screw size
r1,t1 : M4
Ground terminal: M6
Other terminals : M6

Fix the short bar
by using 2 screws.

P1-P short bar

22kW
Screw size
r1,t1 : M4
Ground terminal: M6
Other terminals : M8

Earth terminal(With short bar)

When J51 connector is removed, charge lamp doesn't indicate r1-t1 status. Please make sure that power is off andcare for safety. For own safety, make sure to power off before handling the inverter.
Model
400V class : HF4324-015,HF4324-022（15 and 22kW）
Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)Control circuit
terminal

r1

Power input wire

t1

Main circuit terminal
OFF G

R
(L1)

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

E
(G)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

PR

E
(G)

ON

EMC filter
enabled
EMC filter
disabled

・Switch the short circuit connector to enable or disable the EMC filter.

2-14

Motor output wire

Screw size
r1,t1 : M4
Gound terminal: M6
Other terminal: M6
P1-P short bar

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Model

Main Circuit Terminal

200V class : HF4322-030（30kW）

Short circuit
connector for
EMC filter

Charge Lamp

Motor Output wirePower Input wire

Disable

r1

t1

R
(L1)
Screw size
r1,t1 : M4
Ground Terminal: M6
Other Terminal : M8

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

E(G)

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

EnableModel
400V class : HF4324-030（30kW）
Short circuit
connector for
EMC Filter
Disable

r1

R
(L1)

t1

Screw size
r1, t1: M4Ground terminal: M6
Other terminals: M8

EnableMotor output wirePower input wire

Charge Lamp

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

PR

U
(T1)

E(G)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

Model
200V class : HF4322-037（37kW）

Charge Lamp

r1

DisableEnableR(L1)

t1

Short circuit bar
for EMC Filter

Switching(screw)

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

E(G)

Screw Size
r1, t1 : M4
Ground Terminal: M8
Other Terminal: M8・Switch the short circuit bar to enable or disable the EMC filter.

DisableMotor Output wirePower Input wire

Enable

2-15

N
(-)

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

W(T3)

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Model

Main Circuit Terminal

400V class : HF4324-037（37kW）
Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)Short circuit
connector for
EMC Filter
Disabler1

Motor output wirePower input wire
R
(L1)

t1

Screw size
r1, t1: M4Ground Terminal: M8
Other : M8

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

PR

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

E(G)

W
(T3)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

Enable・Switch the short circuit connector to enable/disable the EMC filter.
Model
200V class : HF4322-045（45kW）
Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)
r1

R(L1)
Short circuit bar
for EMC Filter

Disable

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

PR

E(G)

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

Screw size
r1,t1: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Other terminals: M8

EnableMotor output wirePower input wire

t1

Model
400V class : HF4324-045（45kW）
Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)
r1

R(L1)
DisableMotor output wirePower input wire
t1

Short circuit bar
for EMC Filter

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

E(G)

Enable・Switching method of EMC filter
Switch the short circuit bar to enable/disable the EMC filter.

DisableSwitching(screw)

Enable

2-16

PR

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

Screw size
r1,t1: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Other terminals: M8

N
(-)

W
(T3)

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
Model

Main Circuit Terminal

200V class : HF4322-055（55kW）

Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)
r1

R(L1)
DisableMotor output wirePower input wire

t1

Short circuit bar
for EMC Filter

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

N
(-)

U
(T1)

E(G)

V
(T2)

W
(T3)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

EnableScrew size
r1,t1: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Other terminals: M8

Model
400V class : HF4324-055（55kW）
Charge lamp
(Turn-on while
powered)r1

Disablet1

Motor output wirePower input wireR
(L1)

Short circuit bar
for EMC Filter

S
(L2)

T
(L3)

P1

P
(+)

E(G)

Screw size
r1,t1: M4
Ground terminal: M8
Other terminals: M8・Switching method of EMC filter
Switch the short circuit bar to enable/disable the EMC filter.

DisableSwitching(screw)

Enable

2-17

U
(T1)

V
(T2)

E(G)
P1-P short bar

Enable

N
(-)

W
(T3)

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.10 Wiring of the control circuit
・An example for sink logic.
24V power
supply terminal

Sink or source logic
for input terminal isswitched by SW6.
Input terminals

P24

PCS
PFR
RR

3

FA
(SW5)
IN

DFL

1
Analog input 2

(+)
(-)

Analog input 3 (±)(0)

Thermistor

RY
RL/ZS RC

DFM
AUT
MBS
JOG
ES

2

EX

DRV
X2
X3
OM

20mA
(SW2)

(SW3)

L

10V AMV
20mA
10V AMI

Voltage input

L 20mA(SW4) COM

Current input

Voltage input

P24 P24

Current input

DC24V

Interface
24V power source terminal

FRQ

COM

P-

TH+
TH-

SP
SN
SP
SN

P24S
STC

Functional safety input
STO input

Output terminals*Sink/source supported

X1

P-

RST

＋V (SW1)
10V
VRF
20mA
IRF 10V

Relay
1A contact points

UPF
SourceDFH

VF2

Alarm relay
1C contact points（Alarm：Initial set）

FB

(SW6) P24
Sink

DHH
BC

Analog input 1

FC

Control circuit terminal
section

CMS

RP

ST1

ED+

ST2

ED-

RS485

Functional safety
confirmation output
STO output

Switch configuration
Description

2-18

(SW1)

(SW5)

AMI

AMV

IRF

VRF

P.SEL

20mA

20mA

20mA

20mA

EX

10V

10V

10V

10V

(SW6)

SRC
SW6

(SW2)

SW5

(SW3)

SW1

(SW4)

SW2

It changes the input specification of Analog input 1
VRF
Analog input 1 (VRF terminal).
(SW1) switch
10V: Voltage input is available.
20mA: Current input is available.
It changes the input specification of Analog input 2
IRF
Analog input 2 (IRF terminal).
(SW2) switch
10V: Voltage input is available.
20mA: Current input is available.
It changes the output specification of Analog output 1
AMV
Analog output (AMV terminal).
(SW3) 1 switch
10V: Voltage output is applied.
20mA: Current output is applied.
It changes the output specification of Analog output 2
AMI
Analog output (AMI terminal).
(SW4) 2 switch
10V: Voltage output is applied.
20mA: Current output is applied.
It changes the power source for input terminals.
IN: Internal power source.
P.SEL
Power supply
EX: External power source.
(SW5) input switch(While setting EX, it requires an external power supply
between input terminals and COM terminal)
It changes the sink or source logic for input terminal.
Input terminal
SRC/SINK
This is enabled when SW5 is in IN position.
Sink/Source(SW6)
SINK: Switch to Sink logic.
logic switching
SRC: Switch to Source logic.

SW3

Switch Name

SW4

Label

IN

SINK

Control circuit terminal

・Be sure to power-off previous to change any switches.
Otherwise, may damage the inverter.

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■Recommended terminals for wiring• The following ferrule terminals are recommended for signal cable for easy wiring and improving reliability ofconnectivity.
Power cablesize
mm2 (AWG)

Ferruleterminal model＊

L1 [mm]0.25 (24)0.34 (22)0.5 (20)0.75 (18)AI 0,25-8YE
AI 0,34-8TQ
AI 0,5-8WH
AI 0,75-8GY

8L2 [mm] d [mm]

 D [mm]

12.5

0.8

2.0

14

1.1
1.3

2.5
2.8

Ferrule terminal with sleeves＊Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
Crimping tool: CRIMPFOX UD 6-4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3

■Wiring procedure
1. Push the gray part on the control circuit terminal block into the socket with a slotted screwdriver (with a wide of
2.5mm or less). (Insertion hole will open)
2. Insert the wire or ferrule terminal into the wire insertion hole (round) while pressing the gray part with a slottedscrewdriver.
3. The wire is connected to the circuit when release the screw driver.
• Even for pulling out the wire from the socket, press the gray part with a slotted screwdriver (the insertion hole will be
opened while pressing).

2.5mm

Push the gray part into
the socket with a slottedscrewdriver

2-19

Insert the wire

The wire is connected to thecircuit when release thescrew driver.

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.11 Control circuit wiring section

Control circuit terminal
SW6

SW5

■Input terminals• All COMs have the same electric potential.
• Change SW5 to external power source (EX) to connect thepower source between Input terminals and COM.
• Sink or source logic of the input terminal is switched by SW6.

(Wiring example)
Input terminal
DHH

DFH

RST

BC

ES

JOG

MBS

AUT

BC

DFM

DFL

RR

FR

BC

• [ ] it means factory default settings.
Terminal
name

Input
terminal

DFH

Pulse input-A

DHH

Pulse input-B

COM

Input
(common)

Pulse

Contact

FR, RR,
DFL,DFM
AUT,MBS,
JOG, ES,RST

CommonDigital inputIntelligent input terminal

Terminal
label

Description
Terminal functions are selectable according to theparameter settings for each terminal.
Switching SW6 to SRC or SINK allows you to select SINKor Source logic.

This is a terminal for pulse input.
A and B terminals can be used also as an input terminal.
Terminal functions are selectable according to theparameter settings for each terminal.
The maximum input pulse rate is 32kpps.
This is a common terminal for digital input terminals(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A and B).
Three COM terminals are available.

Electric characteristics
Voltage between each input andCOM terminals• ON voltage Min.DC18V• OFF voltage Max.DC3V• Max. allowable voltage DC27V• Load current 5.6mA(at DC27V)
Voltage between an input andCOM terminals• ON voltage Min.DC18V• OFF voltage Max.DC3V• Max. allowable voltage DC27V• Load current 5.6mA(at DC27V)• Max input pulse rate 32kpps-■Terminal’s default function ([symbol: setting No.])
Terminal label[AUT: 015]Command change[MBS: 032]Free-run stop
[JOG: 029]Jogging[ES: 033]External trip
[RST: 028]Reset

Description
Change to the main speed command [AA101] (OFF) or sub-speed command [AA102](ON).
[MBS] ON sets the motor in a free-run state.
Run at a frequency of [AG-20] upon receipt of the operation command by [JOG] ON.
[ES]ON issues Trip [Er012].
Reset at every trip.

[FR:001]Forward rotation and [RR:002] Reverse rotation
Forward

ReverseOFF

OFF

No command

ON

OFF

Forward rotation command operation

OFF

ON

Reverse rotation command operation

ONON

No command (inconsistent logic)[DFL:003]Multispeed-1 and [DFM:004]Multispeed-2 commands
Multispeed-1
Multispeed-2
Description
DFL
DFM
The set frequency sourceOFFOFF
is enabled.
The frequency source ofONOFF[Ab-11] is enabled.
The frequency source ofOFFON[Ab-12] is enabled.
The frequency source ofONON[Ab-13] is enabled.

Description＊Setting DFH and DHH allows you to set up to 16-speed.

2-20Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■Output terminals(Wiring example)

Control circuit terminal

Alarm relay
Output terminal

FA

[FL]

FB

FC

[RL]

X

RY

: Equipment including lamps, relays and PLC

RY: Relays

X2

X1

DRV

UPF

RY

RY

RY

RY

RY

OM

RC

•[
Terminal
label
Open collector

X3

X

X

Terminal
name] : It means factory default settings.

Description

Electric characteristics

UPF
DRV
X1
X2
X3

Outputterminal

Terminal functions are selectable according to theparameter settings for each terminal.
This is available for both SINK and Source logics.

OM

Output(common)This is a common terminal for output terminals UPF to X3.

RYRC

1a relayterminal

Digital output

Relays for A contact output

Power supply ON
CC17

FA
FB
FC

1c relayterminal

Open collector output
Between each terminal and OM• Voltage drop when turned on:
4 V or less
• Max. allowable voltage 27V• Max. allowable current 50mA
Maximum contact capacity• AC250V, 2A(resistance)• AC250V, 1A(inductive load)(Minimum contact capacity)• DC1V, 1mA

Relays for C contact output[CC-17] =01 (Factory setting)Power supply OFF is same as fig. 1.

Relay

Output terminals

OutputRelay
Output terminal

0100

NormalOperation
Fig. 1
Tripping

Maximum contact capacity
FB/FC:• AC250V, 2A(resistance)• AC250V, 0.2A(inductive load)
FA/FC:• AC250V, 1A(resistance)• AC250V, 0.2A(inductive load)
Minimum contact capacity(common)• AC100V, 10mA
• DC5V, 100mA■Terminal’s default function
Terminal label[DRV: 001]Running signal[UPF: 002]Frequency-arrival signal[X1:003]Frequency-arrival signal 2[X2:007]Ready[X3:035]
Overload notice advance signal[ZS: 040]0Hz speed detection signal

Description
Turns ON during operation (PWM output).
Turns ON when the output frequency reaches the control frequency.
Turns ON when the output frequency reaches the control frequency [CE-10] to [CE-13].
Turns ON when is ready for operation.
Turns ON when the current exceeds the overload warning level.
Turns ON when the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold frequency [CE-33].

[AL: 017]Operation• In case of [CC-17] =01 (Factory setting)Power
StatusFA-FC
FB-FC
supplyNormalON
ClosedOpen
operationON
Tripping
Open
ClosedOFF–
Open
Closed• In case of [CC-17] =00
PowerStatussupplyNormalON
operationON
Tripping
OFF
–

2-21

FA-FC

FB-FC

Open

ClosedClosedOpen

Open
ClosedInstallation and Wiring

Chapter 2
SW4■Analog input/output(Wiring example)

SW3 SW2

SW1
Control circuit terminal

Analog input/output
AMI AMV COM COM

Power supply

Analog input
Analog output

IRF

1

Frequency
meter

Voltage/current switchable analog input/output terminal

VF2

＋V

VRF
2

・When variable resistor is connected on ＋V-VRF-COM
terminal, voltage input is given to inverter, Sw1 for analog
input 1 (VRF) is to be set on "voltage" side therefore.
・If a frequency meter connected in left example is current type
(4 to 20mA), set SW3 for analog output 1 (AMV) as current
output.

3

Potentiometer for frequency source(0.5kΩ to 2kΩ)
* 1kΩ, 1W or more recommended
Terminallabel

Terminal nameL

COM for analog
power supply

H

Speed setting
power supply

VRF

Analog input
terminal 1(Voltage/current
selector SW1)

IRF

Analog input
terminal 2(Voltage/current
selector SW2)

VF2Analog input
terminal 3

AMV

Analog output
terminal 1(Voltage/current
selector SW3)

AMI

Analog output
terminal 2(Voltage/current
selector SW4)

Description
COM terminals for analog input terminals (VRF, IRF,
VF2) and analog output terminals (AMV, AMI).
Two COM terminals are available.
DC10V power supply. Used for voltage input withanalog input terminals (VRF, IRF, VF2) using avariable resister.

Either VRF or IRF can be used by switching theselector switch to DC0 to 10V voltage input or
0- to 20ｍA current input. Used as speed input andfeedback input.

DC-10 to 10V voltage input is available.
Used as speed input and feedback input.

Either AMV or AMI can be used as an output for
inverter monitoring data by switching the selector
switch to DC0 to 10V voltage output or 0 to 20ｍA
current output.

Electric characteristics-

Max. allowable input current 20mA
For voltage input:• Input impedance Approx.10kΩ
• Allowable input voltage DC-0.3V to 12V
For current input:• Input impedance Approx.100Ω
• Max. allowable input current 24mA
Voltage input only:• Input impedance Approx.10kΩ
• Allowable voltage input DC-12V to 12V
For voltage output:• Max. allowable output current 2mA• Output voltage accuracy ±10%
(Ambient temperature: 25±10 degrees C)
For current input:• Allowable load impedance 250Ω or less
• Output current accuracy ±20%
(Ambient temperature: 25±10 degrees C)

NOTE) Refer to chapter 3.7 to 3.13 for adjustment example.

■External thermistor(Wiring example)

Control circuit terminal

External thermistor
terminals
TH+

THThermistor

Analog input

Thermistor terminal• Twist the cables connected from a thermistor to the TH terminal only between TH+ and TH-, and separate the twisted cables fromother cables.
• Since very low current flows through the cables connected to the thermistor, separate the cables from those (power line cables)
connected to the main circuit. The length of the cables connected to the thermistor must be 20m or less.
Terminallabel

Terminal name

TH+

External
thermistor input

TH-

Commonterminal for
external
thermistor input

Description
Connect to an external thermistor to make the inverter trip if anabnormal temperature is detected.
Connect the thermistor to TH+ and TH-. The impedance to detect
temperature errors can be adjusted within the range 0Ω to
10,000Ω.
[Recommended thermistor properties]
Allowable rated power: 100 mW or more
Impedance at temperature error: 3kΩ

2-22

Electric characteristics
DC0 to 5V[Input circuit]
DC5V
1kΩ

TH
Thermistor

TH-

2kΩ

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■Functional safety STO terminals
Terminal
label

Control circuit terminal

Terminal name

STO Safety terminal

24V output power source
terminal
COM terminal for
functional safety
Logic switching terminal
STO input1
STO input2
Output terminal formonitoring
Output COM terminal formonitoring

P24S
CMS
STC
ST1
ST2
ED+
ED-

ST2

STC

STC

CMS

ST1

Safety confirmation
terminal

ED-

ED+

P24S

Note: Do not connect P24S, CMS, STC, ST1, ST2 to other control circuit terminals.

■FRQ output terminals(Wiring example)

Control circuit terminal

Digital output
FRQ

P-

Frequency meter(PWM)• FRQ output is selectable from PWM output with a fixed cycle of 6.4ms or pulse output with a variable cycle.
• FRQ output is adjustable by parameter settings.

NOTE) Refer to chapter 3.10 for adjustment example.

Monitor output

FRQ output terminal

Terminal label

Terminal name

FRQ

Digital monitor(voltage)P-

COM for digitalmonitorDescription

Electric characteristics

Digital monitor output is selectablefrom PWM output with 6.4ms cycle
or pulse output with a variable duty
cycle of approx. 50%.
This is a common terminal for digitalmonitor.
This is also used as 0V reference
potential for P24.

Pulse train output DC0 to 10V
Max. allowable output current
1.2mA
Maximum frequency 3.60kHz

2-23

-

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2■Serial communication(Wiring example)

Control circuit terminal

Modbus communication
CM1

SP

SN

(+)

(-)

SP

Connect CM1
Into the SG (signal ground) of
external devices,SN

RP

For enabling the termination
resistor, short-circuit between
RP and SN.

• SP and SN with the same name are internally connected, which are available for a plurality of wiring.
• For the use of Modbus communication, refer to the “User’s guide” to obtain a more detailed description.

Serial communication

RS485 communication

Terminal
label

SP
SN
RP
(P-)

Terminal name

Description

Electric characteristics

SP terminal:
SN terminal:
RP terminal:
MODBUS
terminal(RS-485)

RS-485 differential(+) signal
RS-485 differential(-) signal
Connect to SP through a termination
resistor
CM1 terminal: Connect to the signal ground of
external communication devices.
There are two SP and two SN terminals, which areconnected internally.
The maximum baud rate is 115.2kbps.

■24V power supply input/output(Wiring example)

Termination resistor (120Ω) integrated
Enabled: RP-SN shorted
Disabled: RP-SN opened

Control circuit terminal

External 24V
terminal

P24

Power supply
24V terminal

PCS

PExternal DC24V power supply• If connecting DC24V external power supply into the terminal PCS and P-, it is able to change parameters, perform

Power input

24V power supply

optional communication, digital/analog input/output and running without the main power supply.
Terminallabel

Terminal
name

P24

24V output
power source
terminalThis terminal supplies DC24V power for contact
signals.

Max. output 100mA

Terminal for
external 24V
input (24V)
Terminal for
external 24V
input (0V)

Input external DC24V power supply to the inverter.
24V power supply input permit to change parametersettings and perform optional communication
operations without control power supply.

Allowable input voltage
DC24V±10%Max. allowable current 1A

PCS

P-

Description

2-24Electric characteristics

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.12 Connection for the Programmable controller■Connection for the Programmable controller and Input terminals

SW5(SW5＝IN)

Sink
logic

IN

In case of external power supply(SW5＝EX）

S

IN

S
P24

BC

FR

SW6

EX
SW5

EX

In case of internal power supply

SRC

FR
DHH

DHH

COM

COM

BC

SINK

Inverter

Output module
COM

Output module

InverterCOM

BC

Source
logic

DC24V

DC24V

P-

FR

FR

DHH

DHH

SW6

SRC

BC

S

S

SINK

Inverter

Output module

Output module

Inverter■Connection for the Programmable controller and Output terminals

OM

UPF

DC24V

Sink logic

COM

OM

Inverter

DC24V

Source logic

COM

DRV

UPF

DRV

Inverter

Input module

2-25

Input module

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2
2.13 Residual risk
Parts subject to residual risk
Please check for any residual risk upon completion of the installation
before power on.

(C)

(B)

Residual risk checklist No.
No.
(A)
(B)
(C)
-

Name of part
Main circuit
terminal block
Heat sink
Input/output
terminal block
Unspecified
parts

DANGERWARNINGCAUTION

8,10

-

4

1
-

11,13
9,12,14-(A)

2,3,5,6,7

Residual risk checklist
No.

Operational
phase

Work

1

2

Part

Residualrisk

Do not let the product fall. Do not apply
force when handing the cover andoperator keypad.

□-

Shortened lifetime of parts due to theuse in places where the product is
exposed to direct sunlight or thetemperature is not within the specified
range.

Verify that the ambient temperature is
within the specified range throughout
the year by means of cooling or
ventilation.

□

Short-circuit failure due to the use inplaces where the temperature is notwithin the specified range orcondensation occurs.

Verify that the ambient temperature is
within the specified range throughout
the year by means of cooling or
ventilation. Install the product in places
where no condensation occurs.

□

Installation

4

(B)

5

-

6

-

7

-

8
9

WiringCAUTIONDANGER
-

10

(A)
Use
Maintenance

11

DANGER(A)
Installation
Maintenance✓

Damage due to rough transportation.

Installation

Preventive measures(B)

CAUTION

3

Details of harm or damage

WiringInspection

DANGER(C)

A cooling fan reaching a highInstall the product on a non-flammabletemperature exceeding 150 °C causes a
metal wall.
fire on a flammable wall.
Damage to parts due to entry of dust and Install the product inside a totally
corrosive gases.
enclosed panel.
Shortened lifetime of parts due toreduced cooling capability by placing the Install the product vertically.
product horizontally.
A cooling fan failed due to water drops or With the heat sink positioned outside,oil mist when the heat sink is positioned install the product in places free fromoutside.
water drops and oil mist.
A fire is caused inside by an arc due toRegularly check the tightening of screws.
screws loosened by vibrations.
A fire from flammable materials caused Regularly check the tightening of screws.
by an arc due to screws loosened by
Do not place flammable materials near
vibrations.
the product.
Do not open the cover when the power
is on. Wait for 10 minutes or more after
Electric shock by touching a high voltage the power is off, and then confirm thatpart with the cover removed.
the voltage between P and N issignificantly less than 45Vdc to start thework.
Do not open the cover when the power
is on. Wait for 10 minutes or more after
Electric shock by touching a high voltage the power is off, and then confirm thatpart with a tool with the cover removed. the voltage between P and N issignificantly less than 45Vdc to start thework.

・The installation, wiring and setting work must be conducted by qualified engineers.

2-26

□
□
□
□
□
□

□

□

Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2

No.

Operational
phase

Work

Part

Residual
risk

12
(a)
12
(b) Installation

Wiring-DANGER

12(c)
12 Use(d) Maintenance

WiringInspection-

DANGER

Preventive measures✓

Motor insulation damage due to surge
caused by long distance motor wiring.

When the motor wiring distance exceeds
20m or more, try to shorten the wiring.
Use LCR filter or output AC reactor.

□

Motor damage due to insulation failurecaused by motor voltage unmatched.

Use motor according to the inverter
voltage class.

□Motor damage due to unstable power
supply, caused by power supply
unbalance, low voltage or excessive
voltage drop.

Confirm the inverter power supply
voltage, feeding method and capacity.

□

Motor damage due to continue ran inopen phase on motor output line.

Verify the motor output line that not
being in open phase.

□

Details of harm or damage

Set adequate value for related function
parameter of motor electronic thermal
level [bC-01] to [bC125].
Set adequate value for base frequency,
motor rated current, control mode,
motor constant, load rating, direct
current output related parameters.
(representative parameter)
Motor related parameter:
IM: [Hb102] to [Hb118]
SM(PMM): [Hd102] to [Hd118]
Control mode: [AA121]
Load rating: [Ub-03]
DC braking: [AF101] to [AF109]

12 Use(e) Maintenance

Setting-

DANGER

Motor damage due high current on
motor caused by inadequate parametersetting.

13 UseOperation(C)

DANGER

The motor once stopped runs
automatically.

If automatic restart after motor stop is
set by a function, make sure to clearly
describe that in the system.

□-

DANGER

Damage or injury occurrence from ahidden risk.

Confirm that system is structured for failsafe considering a risk assessment.

□

-

-

Obtain the latest version of user’s guide
Damage or injury occurrence by missing
to make those information available.
acquisition of information related to risk
Inform users appropriately.

□

14
General15

General・The installation, wiring and setting work must be conducted by qualified engineers.
・For using [SET] function of input terminal, similarly, set the related 2nd parameters settings.

2-27

□

Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3

Chapter 3 Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment
This chapter describes basic settings, frequency source required for operation, examples of run command source settingsand examples of adjusted I/O terminals. See “Chapter 4 Settings” for detailed operating instructions.

3.1 Set the load rating
Select [Ub-03] load specification selection on the parameter setting screen.
M1

STOP

M1

STOP

Ub-03
Load type selection

AA121
Control mode_M1

01
2

V-Low Duty
Low Duty
Normal Duty

0

Back

oFR

VFC-VC

1 VFC-VP
2
3
Back

Save

60.00 Hz

VFC-FREE
VFC-A. bst
oFR

60.00 Hz

Save

・When [Ub-03] is changed, the parameters set for the current are automatically adjusted in proportion to the changed
rated current, and the set values are changed.
・Therefore, Please set [Ub-03] at first because of the rated current value will be changed in overload restriction,
electronic thermal or warning functions.
■Parameter
Parameter

Details

Setting data

[Ub-03]

Select the load
specification.

00: V-Low Duty (VLD)
01: Low Duty (LD)
02: Normal Duty (ND)

＊The underlined value is set by default.

3.2 Set the motor data
Set the parameters listed in the table below on the parameter setting screen according to the motor you use (e.g.
induction motor and permanent-magnet motor).

■Parameter
Induction motor (IM)Parameter

Details[AA121]

Control pulse setting[Hb102][Hb103][Hb104][Hb105][Hb106][Hb108]Capacity selection
Motor poles setting
Base frequency
Maximum frequency
Rated voltage
Rated current

Synchronous motor (permanent-magnet motor) (SM(PMM))
Setting data
00: V/f control
constant torquecharacteristic , etc.
0.01 to 75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (poles)

Parameter

Details[AA121]

Control pulse setting[Hd102][Hd103][Hd104][Hd105][Hd106][Hd108]Capacity selection
Motor poles setting
Base frequency
Maximum frequency
Rated voltage
Rated current

10.00 to 590.00 (Hz)
1 to 1000 (V)0.01 to 10000.00 (A)Setting data
11: SM(PMM)
Sensor less vector
control
0.01 to 75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (poles)
10.00 to 590.00 (Hz)
1 to 1000 (V)0.01 to 10000.00 (A)Note: Motor constant setting is required for driving SM.

3-1

Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3

The frequency source and run command source are necessary to drive the motor.

3.3 Frequency setting from keypad
・Select [AA101] = 07 Frequency source from parameter setting screen.
・Changing frequency setting from each source(1) [FA-01] for frequency setting from keypad or(2) [Ab110] for frequency setting at multispeed profile.
E.g.) For [FA-01]
H03

M1

STOP
Output frequency

0.00 Hz
FA-01
Set Speed-M(Keypad)
60.00 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

oFR

60.00 Hz---

■Frequency source•
Change the frequency source setting [Ab110] to "Multispeed-0 speed No.1" by using the up and down arrow keys.
■Parameter
Parameter[AA101][FA-01] ＊[Ab110] ＊Details
Frequency source setting from
keypadMain speed command
Multispeed-0 speed No. 1

Setting data
07
0.00Hz＊While [AA101] = 07, a change made in either [FA-01] or [Ab110] will be automatically reflected in the other.
When no change can be made or is reflected in [FA-01], the operator keypad is not specified as a command source by
the terminal function or [AA101].
You need to set the frequency value to a value other than 0.00.

3.4 Run using the operator keypad
・Select [AA111] = 02 on the parameter setting screen to RUN from keypad.
■Run/stop commandPress the RUN key and STOP key on the operator keypad to start andstop the inverter, respectively.
■Parameter
Parameter[AA111]

Details
Run by pressing the RUN key
of keypad.

Setting data
02

RUN key (start)

3-2

STOP key (stop)Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3

3.5 Multispeed terminals command・While multispeed command is off, the speed command will follow the parameter setting [AA101].
・To use multispeed 0, select [AA101] = 07 frequency source selection.
Input terminals

BC

DFM

DFL

RR

FR

BC

■Frequency command source
・Change the frequency command by turning ON/OFF from multispeed input terminals [DFL] and [DFM].
■Parameter
Parameter[AA101][FA-01] *1)[Ab110] *1)[Ab-11] *2)[Ab-12] *2)[Ab-13] *2)[CA-03][CA-04]

Details
Frequency setting from keypad
Main speed source
Multispeed 0 setting 1st motor ([DFL]OFF/[DFM]OFF)Multispeed 1 setting ([DFL]ON/[DFM]OFF)Multispeed 2 setting ([DFL]OFF/[DFM]ON)Multispeed 3 setting ([DFL]ON/[DFM]ON)
The terminal 3 for [DFL]
The terminal 4 for [DFM]

Setting data
07

0.00Hz001
002*1) While [AA101] = 07, a change made in either[FA-01] or [Ab110] will be automatically reflected in the other.
When no change can be made nor is reflected in [FA-01], the operator keypad is not specified as a command
source by the terminal function or [AA101].
*2) Set the frequency value for multispeed selection.

3.6 Operate using FR/RR terminal
・Select [AA111] = 00 [FR] [RR] terminal from parameter setting screen.
Input terminals

DFL

RR

FR

BC

■Run/stop command・Run or stop by turning either [FR] terminal or [RR] terminal ON/OFF.
■Parameter
Parameter[AA111][CA-01][CA-02]

Details
Run using FR/RR terminal
The terminal 9 for [FR]The terminal 8 for [RR]

Setting data
00
001
002

3-3

Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3

3.7 Potentiometer frequency command・Select [AA101] = 01 VRF terminal input from parameter setting screen.
＊Select voltage input (0 to 10V) for VRF switch of control circuit board.
Analog input/output

VRF ＋V

IRF
1

20mA
SW1

COM VF2

Control circuit terminal

VRF

2 3

Potentiometer for frequency
command (0.5kΩ to 2kΩ)Recommendation: 1kΩ 1W

10V■Frequency command・Adjust the position of the knobs on the potentiometer to change the frequency command.

■Parameter
Parameter[AA101]

Details
Set as frequency command for VRF input terminal.

Setting data
01

■Regarding Frequency command input from the IRF terminal.
・The IRF terminal is current input (4 to 20 mA) in factory setting. It can switch to voltage input by setting the IRF switch
on the control board to the voltage side.
・When setting the voltage input to 0 to 10 V, please change the parameter [Cb-15] from the initial value of 20.0 to 0.0.
To set the frequency command with the IRF terminal input, please select the parameter [AA101] = 02.

3.8 Operate using 3WIRE terminal
・Select [AA111] = 01 to 3WIRE function from parameter setting screen. In this section, 3WIRE functions are assigned into
the input terminals.
＊Terminal FR[CA-01] = 016 ; terminal RR[CA-02] = 017 ; terminal DFL[CA-03] = 018■Run/stop command・To run turn ON [STA] terminal, and turn ON [STP] terminal to stop. Select the rotation direction with [F/R] terminal.
Input terminals
DFL
[F/R]

RR
[STP]

FR
[STA]

BC

■Parameter
Parameter[AA111][CA-01]

Details
Set the operation command for 3WIRE function.
The terminal FR is [STA].

Setting data
01016

[CA-02]The terminal RR is [STP].

017[CA-03]

The terminal DFL is [F/R].

018

3-4

Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3

3.9 Adjust the analog input (VRF/IRF)
E.g.) Adjust operation (E.g. for VRF)

E.g.) Make a fine adjustment (E.g. for VRF)

・Set the ratio to input to limit the operating range of thefrequency command.
(When selecting the frequency through terminal input)
Maximum
frequency
100%[Cb-31]=200.0(%)
100(%)[Cb-30]=50.0(%)

While setting [Cb-07] =00, the frequency
command from 0% to[Cb-05] will be set by[Cb-03].
(When [Cb-07] = 01,
the frequency
command from 0% to[Cb-05] is 0Hz)

[Cb-04]

Change the
Slope angle[Cb-31]=100.0(%)

50[Cb-31]=50.0(%)
00[Cb-30]=0.0(%)[Cb-03]

Max.

Parallel
slide

-50

0

[Cb-06][Cb-05](0V/0mA)

Analog input(V/mA)[Cb-30]=-50.0(%)

100(10V/20mA)■Parameter
Parameter
VRF
IRF

Details[Cb-03] [Cb-13] Set the frequency source ratio to the start ratio of the analog input.
[Cb-04] [Cb-14] Set the frequency source ratio to the end ratio of the analog input.
[Cb-05] [Cb-15] Set the start ratio of the analog input 0 to 10V/0 to 20mA.
[Cb-06] [Cb-16] Set the end ratio of the analog input 0 to 10V/0 to 20mA.
[Cb-30] [Cb-32] Adjust the zero-point reference line for voltage input 10V/current input 20mA and the maximum frequency.
[Cb-31] [Cb-33] Adjust the slope of the reference line for voltage input 10V/current input 20mA.
・IRF adjustment can be done in similar way to VRF by using IRF parameters in order to VRF.
Use the switch on control circuit terminal board to change for voltage/current input.

3.10 Adjust the analog output (AMV/AMI/FRQ)E.g.) Adjust operation (E.g. for AMV)
・Set a value equivalent to 0% output first.

・Then, adjust a value equivalent to 100% output.

[Cd-23]=50.0(%)[Cd-24]=200.0(%)

t/T(%)
100

Outputrange

50

Parallelslide

0[Cd-24]=100.0(%)

t/T(%)
100

0

Max.

Change the
slope
angle

50

[Cd-24]=50.0(%)
Outputrange

0

Output scale0[Cd-23]=0.0(%)

Max.
Full scale (FS)

-50

-50
[Cd-23]=-50.0(%)[Cd-24]=-50.0(%)■Parameter
Parameter
AMV
AMI

Details

FRQ

Adjust the zero-point reference line for voltage output 10V/current output 20mA and data at 100%.
Adjust the slope for voltage output 10V/current output 20mA and data at 100%.
[Cd-13] Adjust the zero-point reference line for 100% duty cycle output and data at 100%.
[Cd-14] Adjust the slope for 100% duty cycle output and data at 100%.
＊Analog output terminals AMV/AMI can be switched to voltage or current output with a Dip Switch on the control board.
Factory setting is AMI=voltage output and AMI=current output. When changing the voltage or current output of AMV or AMI,
please always review the above table parameter [Cd-23] [Cd-24] [Cd-33] [Cd-34].

[Cd-23][Cd-33]-[Cd-24][Cd-34]-

3-5

Operation Setting and Examples of I/O Adjustment

Chapter 3
3.11 Adjust the analog input (VF2)E.g.) Adjust operation (E.g. for VF2)

E.g.) Make a fine adjustment[Cb-35]=200.0(%)

Forward operation
Maximum frequency100(%)[Cb-34]=50.0(%)(-10V)
-100%

Slope

[Cb-35]=100.0(%)

0[Cb-24]0[Cb-25][Cb-26][Cb-23]

100%(+10V)

Analog input
(Ai3)

Max.

-100
[Cb-34]=0.0(%)[Cb-35]=50.0(%)

Parallelmovement

Reverse operation
Maximum frequency[Cb-34]=-50.0(%)■Parameter
Parameter
VF2[Cb-23][Cb-24][Cb-25][Cb-26][Cb-34][Cb-35]

Details
Set the frequency source ratio to the start ratio of the analog input.
Set the frequency source ratio to the end ratio of the analog input.
Set the start ratio of the analog input -10V to 10V.
Set the end ratio of the analog input -10V to 10V.
Adjust -10V on the reference line for -10V/10V and the frequency.
Adjust the slope of the reference line.

3.12 Prevent input terminal malfunction
・Set a response time for input terminal to prevent a malfunction due to noise input.

3.13 Stabilize an output terminal
・Set the delay time to stabilize an output terminal from a sensitive reaction of internal functions.

Operation of
the input
terminal
Operation of
the internalfunctions

ON

ON

Selected output OFF
function
Operation ofOFF
the output
terminal

OFF
ON
OFF
[CA-41][CA-41]

ON[CC-20][CC-21]

On-delay time

Off-delay time[CC-20][CC-22][CC-24][CC-26][CC-28][CC-30][CC-32][CC-21][CC-23][CC-25][CC-27][CC-29][CC-31][CC-33]■Parameter
Input
terminal
FR
RR
DFL
DFM
AUT
MBS

Responsetime[CA-41][CA-42][CA-43][CA-44][CA-45][CA-46]

Input
terminal
JOG
ES
RST
DFH
DHH

Responsetime[CA-47][CA-48][CA-49][CA-50][CA-51]

Outputterminal
UPF
DRV
X1
X2
X3
RL
FL

3-6

Parameter setting

Chapter 4

Chapter 4 Parameter Setting
4.1 Keypad overview
4.1.1 How to use the keypad＊Image colour may differ from the real product.
No.

⑥

①

Name

①

F1 key②

F2 key③

RUN key②⑧⑥

STOP/RESET
keys
UP/DOWN
LEFT/RIGHT keys
& SEL key(centre)Monitor screen⑦

RUN LED⑧

POWER LED

④

⑦

⑤

③

④
⑤

Description
Transition to home, cancel, etc.
Function of the key is indicated at
the bottom left of the screen.
Save data, etc. Function of the key
is indicated at the bottom right ofthe screen.
Motor motion starts when thiskey is pressed.
Decelerate to stop or reset thetripping.
To move between thescreen/data use UP/DOWN
LEFT/RIGHT. To select the data,press the SEL key.
Display parameters and data.
Turns ON while RUN command isin execution.
Turns ON while the keypad is
powered-on.

4.1.2 Display mode ⑥
(A)

(B)

<a>
<h>

<b>
<g>

No.

<c> <d><f> <e>

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)

(C)

(E)

(F)

Operation status
Warning status
Data/parameters
Function assigned to F1 key
Function of RUN key(G)

Frequency reference, Torque reference, Inverter
Name, Clock, etc.
Selected by F2 Option
Function assigned to F2 key

No.

Name

<a>
<b>
<c>
<d>
<e>
<f>
<g>
<h>

Pow

Description
Type of power supply (Input)

SET

SET terminal for 1st/2nd motor setting.

Prm

Parameter display mode

(F)

(D)

Description

(G)

No.

Screen number

STO

Functional Safety. STO

Cntrl

Control mode-

Reserved

Spcl

Special functions

With the system configuration, you can set the keypad display language. Refer to “4.1.11 System setting (07)”.
Menu 07: System setting = 01 → Language selection = 02 (English)

4-1

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.3 Monitor mode
For screens not described below, refer to User’s Guide.
Pressing F1 key will return to any monitor screen.

＜Monitor screen＞
RUN
FR＜Parameter setting screen＞
H01

M1

Output frequency

H03

M1

RUN
FR

＜Wide monitor screen＞

Output frequency
29.51 HzFA-01

29.51Hz11.9 A
Input Terminal
LLLLLLLLLLL
Menu

46.49 HzoFR

46.49 Hz[0.00-60.00]
OptionMenu

oFR

46.49 Hz

RUN
FR

M1

Menu

OptionH06

Retry history

1. E007
2. E001
3. E001
4. E009
5. E012

1. r007
2. r009
3. r009
4. r009
5. r001

19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/12

----

oFR

oFR

10:10
08:55
08:52
10:10
22:52

46.49 Hz

Detail

M1

20:10
18:54
08:32
06:18
22:49

46.49 Hz

Detail＜Home screen option＞＜Menu screen＞
STOP

M01

Home Screen Option

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Scroll mode
User mode
Short menu
Compare mode
Motor setup
Read / Write
System setting

01
02

Home

oFR

----

Home

o01

M1

STOP

Menu

46.49 Hz

Option46.49 Hz

H09

M1

RUN
FR

Trip history
Total count 20 times
19/07/15
19/07/15
19/07/15
19/07/12
19/07/10

oFR＜Retry history screen＞＜Trip history screen＞

----

H04

dA-01
Output frequency

29.51 Hz

Output Current

M1

RUN
FR

CTL name
Lower center dataoFR

46.49Hz----By selecting the F2(2) key option from the home screen, you can change the content of display of assist bar.

＜Menu screen＞
No.

Name

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Scroll mode
User mode
Short menu
Compare mode
Motor setup
Read / Write
System setting

Description
Parameters can be change while monitoring.
The user mode display user-registered parameters only.
The short menu displays regularly used parameters for the inverter
This mode display the parameters that have been modified from initial settings.
This mode display the parameters that are related to basic motor settings.
Data can be stored in the keypad and then copied to other inverter unit.
With the system configuration, set and adjust keypad related parameters.

4-2

Reference
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.104.1.11

Parameter setting

Chapter 4＜Home Screen Option Menu＞
Option01 Controller (Inverter) name00 Frequency command
01 Torque command
02 Lower center data
02 Real time
03 Controller name

Description
You can specify 8-digit string from alphanumeric letters and symbols.
The current frequency command is displayed.
The current torque command is displayed (during torque control).
The current time is displayed.
The specified controller (inverter) name is displayed.

4.1.3.1 Parameter setting screen
Change the parameter.

Press the SEL (O) key.
H03

M1

STOP
Output frequency

M1

STOP
Output frequency

29.51 Hz29.51 Hz

FA-01

FA-01
29.51 Hz29.51 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Menu

H03

oFR

29.51 Hz[0.00-60.00]

OptionBackoFR

29.51 Hz----An area in the screen will be highlighted.
With UP/DOWN () keys select either parameter or monitor area then will be highlighted.
If SEL (O) key is pressed, the parameter code can be changed.
M1

STOP

H03

Output frequency
29.51 Hz
FA-01
Set Speed-M1 (Keypad)
29.51 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

oFR

----

29.51 Hz

Using UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT () keys the function code to be monitored can be changed, pressing again the SEL(O) key give access to the function parameter. Press 1 key to return back.
＜In case of changing numeric type parameter value＞
M1

RUN
FR

＜In case of changing choice type parameter value＞
The lower area of the display shows the selectable item.

H03

M1

STOP
AA111

Output frequency
29.50 Hz

0
1
2
3

FA-01
39.50 Hz

Term.[FR] / [RR]
3 WireRUNkey(Keypad)
RS485[0.00-60.00]
Back

oFR

29.51 HzWith UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT (changes.

Back

Save

oFR

29.51 HzSave

) keys change the parameters value, And then press the SEL (O) key to save the

4-3Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.3.2 Monitor
To change the monitor details.

Press the SEL (O) key while on the monitor screen,highlighting the first line as result.

H01

M1

RUN
FR

Output frequency

Output frequency
46.49 Hz46.49 Hz

Output Current

Output Current
11.9 A

11.9 A

Input Terminal

Input Terminal

LLLLLLLLLLL
Menu

oFR

Then with UP/DOWN (

H01

M1

RUN
FR

46.49 HzLLLLLLLLLLL

OptionBackoFR

46.49 Hz----) is possible to highlight the one desired of the three monitors.

Pressing the SEL (O) key, the code can be accessed.
RUN
FR

H01

M1

dA-01
Output frequency
29.51 Hz

Back

oFR

46.49 Hz----

Making use of UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT (then with the SEL (O) key confirm the change.
Press 1 key to return back.

) keys, the code of the parameter to be monitored can be changed, and4.1.3.3 Trip history screen＜On tripping event＞

TRIP＜In case checking trip history＞

H07

M1

NRDY

TRIP

M1

NRDY

Trip event
Overcurrent error

Trip history
Total count 18 times

E001 19/07/15 10:10
Output frequency：29.51Hz
Output current ：47.71A
voltage：290.2Vdc
Status1：Run

1. E001
2. E001
3. E001
4. E009
5. E01219/07/15
19/07/15
19/07/15
19/07/12
19/07/10

----

oFR

List

oFR

46.49 Hz

DC

----

H06

10:10
08:55
08:52
10:10
22:52

46.49 Hz

DetailWith UP/DOWN () keys, the trip status can be confirmed. Also, the background will become red.
In the Trip history screen press the SEL (O) key, and with UP/DOWN () keys highlight a history, then press SEL (O) key
to access the details regarding that trip status.
＊For more details about the detailed history, please refer to “Chapter 5 Troubleshooting”.
Put a battery (CR2032) for using clock function.

4-4

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.3.4 Retry history screen
To display time in retry history, you need to configure clock settings.
To use the clock function, you need an optional battery(CR2032).
On the screen that is displayed upon power-on, using the right and left (Set-up procedure) keys, navigate to "H09".
ActionRetry history
6. r001 19/07/10 19:22
7. r001 19/07/01 15:39
8. r009 19/06/24 21:44
9. r001 19/06/20 01:34
10. r007 19/06/12 21:11

Using the up and down (want to check.

) keys, select history information you

Retry details (No. 10)
Overvoltage error
r007 19/06/12 21:11
Out Freq:40.03Hz
Current
11.22APN Voltage:411.0Vdc
Status 1:
Run

Press the SEL(O) key to show details of the selected history
information.

Detailed retry history (No. 10)
Overvoltage error
Status 3:
Status 4:
Status 5:
Run time:
On time:Speed control------19998 hr
25454 hrUsing the up and down () keys, you can check details.
Press the F1(1) key to return to the monitor.

・The retry history screen "Why retry monitor" shows details of the errors that have occurred and the total number oftimes retry was performed.
・For details of errors, see "Chapter 18 Troubleshooting".
M1

STOP

H09

Retry history
1. r007
2. r009
3. r009
4. r009
5. r001

19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/14
19/07/12

Menu

oFR

20:10
18:54
08:32
06:18
22:49

46.49Hz

Option4-5

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.4 Test run
This explains the method to how to do a test run using the keypad.
＜Home screen＞

H01

M1

RUN
FR

Output frequency
46.49 Hz
Output Current
11.9 A
Input Terminal
LLLLLLLLLLL
oFR

46.49 Hz

(E)↑

(F)↑

Menu

Option4.1.4.1 Confirm the operation command.
・In the position (E) of the upper illustration, when is displayed FR or RR, the RUN key of the keypad is enabled.
⇒Go to [4.1.4.2]
・In the cases that is not displayed, and want to operate from the keypad, or want to change the RUN commandreference to FR terminal, is necessary to change the RUN command selection.
⇒Go to [4.1.4.4 ]

4.1.4.2 Frequency reference status checking.
・In the upper illustration, in the position (F), when values other than 0.00 are displayed, the frequency reference isalready set.
⇒Go to [4.1.4.3]

・In the case that 0.00 is displayed, is necessary to change the value of the frequency reference.
In the case that you want to change to an analog input and such, the frequency command selection must be changed.
⇒Go to [4.1.4.5]

4.1.4.3 Start the output by pressing the RUN key and the motor will accelerate.
・When the motor does not rotate, please refer to the troubleshooting.

4.1.4.4 RUN command reference change① Press the RIGHT( ) key, after moving to the parameter setting screen and by pressing the SEL(O) key, the parameter
section of the parameter setting screen will blink.
M1

STOP

H03

Output frequency
0.00 Hz29.51 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

oFR

29.51 Hz

----

4-6

Parameter setting

Chapter 4② Change the code with UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT (
M1

STOP

) keys to [AA111].

H03

Output frequency
0.00 Hz
AA111
00:Term.[FW] / [RR]
Back

oFR

29.51 Hz----

③ Press the SEL(O) key and then with UP/DOWN() keys select the RUN operation to be executed between all the
choices. In this case [03:Keypad’s RUN key] is the one selected.
M1

STOP

H03

AA111
0
1
2
3

Term.[FR] / [RR]
3 WireRUNkey(Keypad)
RS485

Back

oFR

29.51 HzSave

④ To save the changes press the SEL (O) key and then in the position (E) FR or RR should be displayed. Press the F1 key,
and will go to Home screen.

⇒Go to [4.1.4.2]

4.1.4.5 Changing frequency reference①

Press the RIGHT ( ) key and after moving to the parameter setting screen, press the SEL (O) key, the parameter
section of the parameter setting screen will blink.
M1

STOP

H03

Output frequency
0.00 Hz0.00 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

②

oFR

0.00 Hz----With UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT() keys change the code to [FA-01], then [Main speed reference (keypad)] shallbe displayed, the frequency setting can be chosen.
⇒Go to ③
If the displayed screen is different, change the frequency reference source. ⇒Go to ⑤

4-7

Parameter setting

Chapter 4③

Press the SEL(O) key, with UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT(
M1

STOP

) keys change the frequency value.

H03

Output frequency
0.00 HzFA-01
46.49 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

Save

0.00 Hz

oFR

(F)↑
④

To save the changes press the SEL (O) key, and after that in the position (F) should be displayed the set frequency.
Press the F1 key, and will go to Home screen.

⇒Go to [4.1.4.3]⑤ With UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT () keys change the function code to [AA101].
M1

STOP

H03

Output frequency
0.00 Hz
AA101
01:Term.[VRF]
Back

⑥

oFR

0.00 Hz----

Press the SEL(O) key and with UP/DOWN([07: Keypad] is selected in this case.

) keys, select the frequency reference source to be used.

M1

STOP

AA101
7 Keypad
8 RS485
9 Option-1
10 Option-2
Back

⑦

oFR

0.00 HzSave

To save changes press the SEL (O) key, and then in the position (E), FR or RR should be displayed. Press the F1 key,
and will go to Home screen.

⇒Go to [4.1.4.2]

4-8

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.5 Scroll mode（01）In scroll mode, to set parameters by monitoring monitor, please refer to “4.1.3.1 Parameter setting screen.

4.1.5.1 Try scroll mode
① Press the F1 key [Menu] on [home] screen

H01

M1

STOP
Output frequency
Output Current

0.00 A
Input Terminal
LLLLLLLLLLL
oFR② With UP/DOWN (screen.

46.49 Hz

M01

Menu

0.00 Hz

Menu

M1

STOP

Option

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Scroll mode
User mode
Short menu
Compare mode
Motor setup
Read / Write
System setting

Home

oFR

0.00 Hz----) key select scroll mode to display scroll menu, then, press SEL (0) key to display scroll menu
M1

STOP

L01

Scroll menu
All Parameters
d:Monitor
F:Ref-Mon. / Setting
A:Standard Func.
b:Fine Tuning Func.

Back

oFR

0.00 Hz----③ Press SEL (0) key follow to UP/DOWN () key select the monitor group, then return to parameter list.
For example, selecting “A: Standard Func.” then press SEL (0) key.
M1

STOP

L02

A: Standard Fnc.

AA101 Main Speed sou . .
07:Keypad
AA102 Sub Speed sour . .
00:Disable
AA104 Sub Speed sett . .
0.00 HzS-MenuoFR

0.00 Hz

Next Gr.

④ Press the SEL (O) key, then, with UP/DOWN () keys select parameters to change.

4-9Parameter setting

Chapter 4⑤-1 When the parameter is to be set as alternative, Press UP/DOWN (store then return to parameter list.

) key to select data and press F2 (Save) key to

M1

STOP
AA101
7 Keypad
8 RS485
9 Option-1
10 Option-2
Back

oFR

Save

0.00 Hz⑤-2 When the parameter is to be set is a numerical value,
Press UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT () key to change data and press F2 (Save) key to store to return to parameter
list.
M1

STOP

H03

Output frequency
0.00 Hz
AA104
0.00 Hz[0.00-60.00]
Back

oFR

0.00 Hz

Save

・Press F1 (Return) key to return to parameter list without storing the parameter change.
・Parameter selected for reference screen is show in upper line on ⑤-2.
・When scroll screen is set as initial mode, dA-01, dA-02, dA-03 are displayed as initial setting.

4-10

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.5.2 Group Jump Function① Press LEFT/RIGHT () key to jump to 1st parameter of each group.

（…⇔All parameters ⇔ d:Monitor ⇔ F:Command Monitor/Setting ⇔…⇔ U:Initial Setting、PDN⇔All Parameters⇔…）② When to jump to the detailed subgroup (AA, Ab etc) in parameter group, press F2 key.
A group for example : …⇒AA⇒Ab⇒AC⇒…⇒AJ⇒AA⇒①LEFT/RIGHT (
M1

STOP

L02

) key to jump
M1

STOP

L02

A: Standard Fnc.

b: Fine Tuning Func

AA101 Main Speed sou . .
07:Keypad
AA102 Sub Speed sour . .
00:Disable
AA104 Sub Speed sett . .
0.00 HzbA101 Freq. H-Lim so . .
07:Keypd
bA102 Freq. upper Li . .
0.00 HzbA103 Freq. Lower Li . .
0.00 HzS-MenuoFRNext Gr.

0.00 HzS-Menu0.00 Hz

L02

M1

STOP

oFR

A: Standard Fnc.

Ab-01 Frequency conv . .
1.00
Ab-03 Multi-speed sel . .
00:Binary
0.00 HzS-MenuoFR

0.00 Hz

Next Gr.

②Jump byF2(Next)Key
M1

STOP

L02

A: Standard Fnc.

AC-01 Acc/Dec source . .
00:KeypadAC-02 Multi Acc/Dec . .
00:Common
AC-03 Accel pattern
00:Linear
S-MenuoFR

4-11

0.00 Hz

Next Gr.

Next Gr.

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.6 User mode（02）

L04

M1

STOP

・The user mode will display user-registered parameters only.
This will allow to quickly access the parameters that are frequently
used or are essential to the user.
・Select the "02 User mode" option from the menu screen, then press
the SEL(O) to display the main user mode screen.
・This user mode screen displays the parameters that have beenpreviously registered on the user parameters [UA-31] to [UA-62] inthat order.(「-----」will be displayed in case there is no registeredparameter)

User mode

46.49 HzdA-02 Output Current
0.00 Hz------oFR

Menu

46.49 Hz

Next Page＜Main user mode screen＞＜User mode parameter registration＞
・By pressing the RIGHT( )button, the screen will move to theparameter registration screen where the parameters UA-31 to UA-64
are displayed.
・Use the UP/DOWN()or the F2 key(Next page) to select therequired user parameter then press the SEL(0) to display the parametersetting screen, then search and register the required parameter.
・Registering a non-existent parameter will release the registration in thatuser parameter(「___no」 will be shown instead).

L04

M1

STOP
User mode

UA-31 User Parameter1
FA-01
UA-32 User Parameter2
dA-02
＿＿no
oFR

Menu

46.49 Hz

Next Page＜User mode screen＞(Parameter registration screen)

4.1.7 Short menu（03）

L04

M1

STOP

・The short menu displays regularly used parameters for the inverter
operation allowing the user to configure the inverter more quickly
and efficiently.
・Select the "03 Short menu" option from the menu screen, then press
the SEL(O) to display the short menu screen.
・The short menu will display the parameters shown in the table below.
(These are pre-defined parameters for the short menu)

Short menu

Ub-03 Load type sele . .
02:Normal Duty
7.50 kW
Hb103 Async Motor Po. .
1:4P
Menu

oFR

46.49 Hz

Next Page＜Short menu Screen＞＜Short menu pre-defined parameters＞
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Code
Ub-03
Hb102
Hb103
Hb104
Hb105
Hb106
Hb108
bC110
AA121
bb101
AA101
AA111
AC120
AC122

Name
Load type selection
Motor constant selection, 1st-motor
Motor poles setting, 1st-motor
Motor base frequency setting, 1st-motor
Motor maximum frequency setting, 1st-motor
Motor rated voltage, 1st-motor
Motor rated current, 1st-motor
Electronic thermal level setting,1st-motor
Control mode selection, 1st-motor
Carrier frequency setting, 1st-motor
Main speed input source selection, 1st-motor
Run-command input source selection, 1st-motor
Acceleration time setting 1, 1st-motor
Deceleration time setting 1, 1st-motor

No
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Code
AA115
Ab110
Ab-11
Ab-12
Ab-13
bA101
bA102
bA103
Cb-40
CC-07
CC-06
bA-61
bA-60
bA-63

＊The number in the No. column represents the short menu display order.

4-12

Name
STOP mode selection, 1st-motor
Multispeed-0 setting, 1st-motor
Multispeed-1 setting
Multispeed-2 setting
Multispeed-3 setting
Frequency limit selection, 1st-motor
Upper frequency limit, 1st-motor
Lower frequency limit, 1st-motor
Thermistor type selection
Relay output terminal [RL] function
Relay output terminal [FL] function
Dynamic brake selection
Dynamic brake usage rate
Dynamic brake resistor valueParameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.8 Compare mode (04)・The compare mode will only display the parameters that have been
modified from its initial settings, allowing the user to quickly verify or
modify the implemented changes.
・Select the "04 Compare mode" option from the menu screen, thenpress the SEL(O) to display the compare mode screen.
・The compare mode will not display the parameters that have not been
modified from their initial settings.
Additionally this mode will not display any monitor parameters(Groups d and F).

L03

M1

STOP
Compare mode

Ab110 Multi-Speed 0_M1
46.49 Hz
024:SET
UA-31 User Parameter1
FA-01
oFR

Menu

46.49 Hz

Next Gr.

＜Compare mode screen＞

4.1.9 Motor set up menu (05)・The motor setup menu displays the parameters that are related toa basic motor setting, allowing the user to quickly configure theinverter to operate a motor.
・Select the "05 Motor setup" option from the menu screen, thenpress the SEL(O) to display the motor setup screen.
・The motor setup menu will display the parameters shown in the tablebelow. (These are pre-defined parameters for the motor setup menu)

L04

M1

STOP
Motor setup

dC-45 IM/SM monitor
00:IM
HA-01 Auto-tuning sel
00:Disable
HA-02 Run-cmd at tun. .
00:RUNkey(Keypad)
Menu

oFR

46.49 Hz

Next Page＜Motor setup screen＞＜Motor setup pre-defined parameters＞
No.
1
2

Code
dC-45
HA-01

3

Name
IM/SM monitor
Auto-tuning selection

No.
20
21

Code
Hd103
Hd104

HA-02

RUN command selection at auto-tuning

22

Hd105

4
5
6
7

HA-03
Hb102
Hb103
Hb104

23
24
25
26

Hd106
Hd108
Hd110
Hd112

8

Hb105

27

Hd114

Sync. Motor constant Lq, 1st-motor

9
10
11
12
13
14

Hb106
Hb108
Hb110
Hb112
Hb114
Hb116

Online auto-tuning selection
Motor capacity setting, 1st motor
Motor poles setting, 1st-motor
Motor base frequency setting, 1st-motor
Motor maximum frequency setting,1st-motor
Motor rated voltage, 1st-motor
Motor rated current, 1st-motor
Motor constant R1, 1st-motor
Motor constant R2, 1st-motor
Motor constant L, 1st-motor
Motor constant Io, 1st-motor

Name
Sync. Motor poles setting, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor base frequency setting, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor maximum frequency setting,1st-motor
Sync. Motor rated voltage, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor rated current, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant R, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant Ld, 1st-motor

28
29
30
31
32
33

Hd116
Hd118
Hd130
Hd131
Hd132
Hd133

15

Hb118

Motor constant J, 1st-motor

34

Hd134

16
17

HA110
HA115

Stabilization constant, 1st-motor
Speed response, 1st-motor

35
36

Hd135
Hd136

18

Hb180

Output voltage gain, 1st-motor

37

Hd137

Sync. Motor constant Ke, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant J, 1st-motor
Mnimum frequency for Sync. M., 1st-motor
No-Load current for Sync. M., 1st-motor
Starting method for Sync. M., 1st-motor
IMPE 0V wait number for Sync. M., 1st-motor
IMPE detect wait number for Sync. M.,
1st-motor
IMPE detect number for Sync. M., 1st-motor
IMPE 0V voltage gain for Sync. M., 1st-motor
IMPE 0V Mg-pole position offset for Sync. M.,
1st-motor

19

Hd102

Sync. Motor capacity setting, 1st motor＊The number in the No. column represents the short menu display order

4-13

Parameter setting

Chapter 4
4.1.10 Read/Write function (06)
Data can be stored in the keypad and then copied to other inverter unit.
It is strongly recommended to make backup of the data just in case.
Refer to user’s guide for a more detailed explanation.
① Select R/W from menu
② ”Read” function is used for storing the data from the inverter to the keypad.
“Write” function is used for copying the data stored in the keypad to the inverter
M1

STOP

M01

M1

STOP

Menu

Menu

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Scroll mode
User mode
Short menu
Compare mode
Motor setup
Read/Write
System setting

01
02

READ
WRITE

Home

oFR

Back

oFR

46.49 Hz----46.49 Hz

R01

----

4.1.11 System setting (07)With the system configuration, you can set and adjust keypad related parameters.
M1

STOP

M01

Menu
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Scroll mode
User mode
Short menu
Compare mode
Motor setup
Read/Write
System setting

Home

oFR

46.49 Hz----

Available actions in the system configuration
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

Name
Language selection
DimmingLights-off time *1)
Dimming (at off)
Auto-home time
Initial display
Read lock
Trip flashing
Date and time *2)
Battery-less alarm
Background color
Inverter information monitor
Controller Type selectKeypad version
Keypad initialization

16

Self-check mode

17
18

Remote mode
Reserve

Description
Set the keypad display language. (02:English/03:Japanese)
Set the dimming.
Set the no-operation time to the lights-off.
Set the dimming at lights-off.
Set the no-operation time to home screen.
Set initial display. (01:Quick View/02:Verify View/03:Clear View/04:Scroll mode)
Set the READ data protection. (00:OFF/01:ON)
Set the backlight flashing by trip. (00:Invalid/01:Valid)
01:Time setting/02:Display format
Select the battery-less alarm. (00:Invalid/01:Valid)
Set the background color. (00:Blue/01:Green/02:Gray)
Check HF-430NEO information.
Select 01: HF-430NEO.
Display the keypad version.
Initialize the keypad. (00:No/01:Yes)
This function will be executed Self-check mode. (01:Key & Led check/02:TFT check
03:RTC check/04:Data Flash check/05:RS422 check/06:Debug mode 07:Version)
Select the Remote mode. (F1 Key) (00:Disable/01:Enable)
Do not change this parameter. (01:OFF)*1) The auto backlight-off function will deactivate during in trip status until trip reset.
*2) Battery is required to use date function. Recommend: CR2032, 3V
The battery is to be replacing every two years while the inverter is power off.

4-14

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[dA-01] to [dA-41]
4.2 Monitor naming (Nomenclature)[dA-42] to [dA-83]
Code/Name

dA-42 Electronic thermal load
rating monitor (Motor)dA - 01

dA-43 Electronic thermal load

Value in thegroup

dA-46 to 47 Reserved
dA-50 Control terminal type

4.3 Description of monitor functions＊For more detail, please refer to HF-430NEO user’s guide.

dA-51 Input terminal monitor

Monitors for all data
■Monitor mode (D code：Monitor)
Code/Name

dA-01

Range (unit)

Output frequency monitor

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)<Actual frequency output>

dA-02

0.00 to 655.35(A)Output current monitor

dA-03
Rotation direction monitor

dA-04 Frequency referencemonitor (after calculation)dA-08 Detect speed monitor-590.00 to 590.00(Hz)<Encoder feedback required>dA-12 Output frequency-590.00 to 590.00(Hz)dA-14Frequency upper limit monitor

dA-15 Torque referencemonitor (after calculation)dA-16 Torque limit monitor
dA-17
Output torque monitor *1)

dA-18 Output voltage monitor
dA-20
Current position monitor

dA-26 Pulse train position
deviation monitor
dA-28 Pulse count monitor
dA-30 Input power monitor
dA-32 Accumulated input
power monitor

dA-34 Output power monitor
dA-36 Accumulated output
power monitor

dA-38
Motor temperature monitor

dA-40 DC bus voltage monitor
dA-41
DBTR load rate monitor

dA-60
Analog input/output status monitor*2)

Pulse train input monitor (internal)0.00 to 590.00(Hz)00(P1-TM)/02(P1-TM2)
15(not connect)
LLLLLLLLLLL to
HHHHHHHHHHH[L:OFF/H:ON][Left](DHH)(DFH)(RST)(ES)(JOG)(MBS)(AUT)(DFM)(DFL)(RR)(FR)[Right]
LLLLLLL to HHHHHHH[L:OFF/H:ON][Left](FL)(RL)(X3)(X2)(X1)(DRV)(UPF)[Right]
AAAAAAAA to VVVVVVVV[A: Current/V: Voltage][Left](Ao4)(Ao3)(EIRF)(EVRF)(AMI)(AMV)(IRF)(VRF)[Right]-100.00 to 100.00(%)

Pulse train input monitor (option)dA-81 Option slot-1 status
dA-82 Option slot-2 status
dA-83 Option slot-3 status

0.0 to 500.0(%)-1000.0 to 1000.0(%)

When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03-536870912 to +536870911 (pulse)
Parameter setting other thanabove
-2147483648 to +2147483647(pulse)

-

dA-71

-1000.0 to 1000.0(%)<Torque control mode required>

0.0 to 800.0(V)00(no input)/01(P-1A)
02(P-2A)/03(P-1b)
04(P-2b)/05(P-1C)
06(P-2C)/07(STO)

dA-61 Analog input [VRF] monitor
0.00 to 100.00(%)
dA-62 Analog input [IRF] monitor
dA-63 Analog input [VF2] monitor -100.00 to 100.00(%)
dA-64 Analog input [Ai4] monitor
0.00 to 100.00(%)
dA-65 Analog input [Ai5] monitor
dA-66 Analog input [Ai6] monitor
dA-70-590.00 to 590.00(Hz)<as target value>
0.00 to 59000.00(Hz)monitor (signed)

dA-54 Output terminal monitor

F(forward)/r(reverse)d(0Hz output)/o(stop)

dA-06 Output frequency scaleconversion monitor

0.00 to 100.00(%)

rating monitor (Inverter)

dA-45 Safety STO monitor
Parameter
Group

Range (unit)

00:(none) /01:(P1-EN)
03:(P1-PN) /06:(P1-PB)
07(P1-CCL)
18:(P1-AG)
33:(HF-FB)*1) dA-17 is invalid when the Control mode selection(AA121/AA221) setting is 00 to 06 (V/f control mode).
*2) dA-60 is available also for the terminals of the option
terminal board-2147483647 to +2147483647(pulse)

0 to 2147483647(pulse)
0.0 to 75(kW)0.0 to 1000000.0(kWh)0.00 to 75(kW)0.0 to 1000000.0 (kWh)-20.0 to 200.0(degree Celsius)
0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.00 to 100.00(%)

4-15

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[db-01] to [db-64]
Code/Name[dC-01] to [dE-50]

db-01 to 23 Reserved
Code/Name

db-30 PID1 feedback value 1 monitor
db-32 PID1 feedback value 2 monitor
db-34 PID1 feedback value 3 monitor
db-36 PID2 feedback value monitor

Code/Name

Range (unit)-

dC-01 Inverter load type status
dC-02 Rated current monitor
dC-07

Range (unit)
0.00 to 100.00(%)

Main speed input source monitor(it also depends on [AH-04],[AH-05], [AH-06])

dC-08 Sub speed input source monitor
dC-10

0.00 to 100.00(%)

RUN command input source monitor(it also depends on [AJ-04],[AJ-05], [AJ-06])

dC-15

db-38 PID3 feedback value monitor

0.00 to 100.00(%)

db-40 PID4 feedback value monitor

0.00 to 100.00(%)

dC-16(it also depends on [AJ-44],[AJ-45], [AJ-46])

Life assessment monitor

db-42 PID1 target value monitor
db-44 PID1 feedback value monitor
db-50 PID1 output monitor
db-51 PID1 deviation monitor
db-52 PID1 deviation 1 monitor
db-53 PID1 deviation 2 monitor
db-54 PID1 deviation 3 monitor
db-55 PID2 output monitor
db-56 PID2 deviation monitor
db-57 PID3 output monitor
db-58 PID3 deviation monitor
db-59 PID4 output monitor
db-60 PID4 deviation monitor
db-61 Current PID P-Gain monitor
db-62 Current PID I-Gain monitor
db-63 Current PID D-Gain monitor
db-64 PID feedforward monitor

0.00 to 100.00(%)

Cooling fin temperature monitor(it also depends on [AJ-24],[AJ-25], [AJ-26])

Range (unit)

00(Very Low duty)01(Low duty)02(Normal duty)
0.0 to 6553.5(A)01 to 34 *1)
00 to 06,08,25 to 33 *1)
00 to 06 *2)-20.0 to 200.0(°C)
LL to HH
[L:Normal/H:Fatigued][Left](FAN lifespan)(board capacitor lifespan)[Right]

dC-20(it also depends on [AH-04],[AH-05], [AH-06])

Accumulated number of starts monitor-100.00 to +100.00(%)

dC-21 Accumulated number of-200.00 to +200.00(%)

dC-22 Accumulated RUN time monitor
dC-24

1 to 65535(cycles)

power-on times monitor

Accumulated power-on time monitor

1 to 1000000(hour)

dC-26 Accumulated cooling-fan run-100.00 to +100.00(%)

time monitor

dC-37 Icon 2 LIM monitor

00(Other than below )01(OC suppress)
02(OL restriction)
03(OV suppress)
04(TRQ Limit)
05(Freq. Limit)
06(Min. Freq.)

dC-38 Icon 2 ALT monitor

00(Other than below )01(OL notice )02(Motor thermal notice)03(Controller thermal
notice)04(Motor overheating
notice)dC-39 Icon 2 RETRY detail monitor

00(Other than below)
01(Waiting for retry)
02(Waiting for restart)

dC-40 Icon 2 NRDY detail monitor

00(Other than below )01(Trip occurrence)02(Power supply error)
03(Resetting)04(STO)05(Standby)
06(Data Warning, etc.)
07(Reserved)
08(Free run)09(Forced stop)

dC-45 IM/SM monitor

00 (IM selected)
01 (SM selected)

dC-50 Firmware ver. Monitor
dC-53 Firmware Gr. Monitor

00.000 to 99.255-200.00 to +200.00(%)-100.00 to +100.00(%)-200.00 to +200.00(%)-100.00 to +100.00(%)-200.00 to +200.00(%)
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 3600.0(s)0.0 to 100.0(s)-100.00 to 100.00(%)

00(Standard)*1)00(disabled)/01(VRF)/02(IRF)/03 (VF2)/04(Ai4)/05(Ai5)/06(Ai5)07(Multi-speed 0)/08(auxiliary speed)/09 to 23(Multi-speed1 to 15)/24(JOG[AG-20])/25(RS485)/26(option-1)/27(option-2)/28(option-3)/29(Pulse train input (internal))/30(Pulse train input (option)
31(Reserved) 32(PID)/33(Reserved)/34(AHD retention speed)/*2) 00([FR]/[RR] terminal)/01(3-wire)/02(Keypad’s RUN key)
03(RS485)/04(Option1)/05(Option2)/06(Option3)

4-16

Code/Name

Range (unit)

dE-50 Warning monitor

Refer to users guideParameter setting

Chapter 4[FA-01] to [FA-40]■Variable mode monitor(F code)(Reference Monitor/Setting)・If a parameter that is being monitored by one of the[FA] parameters can be modified, it can directly be
modified through that [FA] parameter.
Code/Name

FA-01
Main speed reference monitor

FA-02
Sub-speed reference monitor

Range (unit)
0.00 to 590.00(Hz)-590.00 to 590.000(Hz)(at monitor)
0.00 to 590.00(Hz)(at setting)FA-10
Acceleration time monitor

FA-12

0.00 to 3600.00(s)Deceleration time monitor

FA-15
Torque reference monitor

FA-16-500.0 to 500.0(%)

Torque bias monitor

FA-20
Position reference monitor

When[AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03-268435455 to+268435455 (pulse)
Other than above.
-1073741823 to+1073741823 (pulse)

FA-30
PID1 set-point 1 monitor

FA-32
PID1 set-point 2 monitor-100.00 to 100.00(%)( Adjustable with[AH-04][AH-05][AH-06] )FA-34
PID1 set-point 3 monitor

FA-36
PID2 set-point monitor

FA-38
PID3 set-point monitor-100.00 to 100.00(%)( Adjustable with[AJ-04][AJ-05][AJ-06] )FA-40
PID4 set-point monitor

4-17Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AA101] to [AA106]
4.6 Parameter explanation

4.4 Parameter naming (Nomenclature)

AA 1 01
WorkingParameter
groupInternal numberin the group

ｰ：Common for 1st and 2nd motor
1：1st motor enabled if function [SET] is OFF
2：2nd motor enabled if function [SET] is ON※By default the motor 1 is enabled in the case that
08:[SET] is not assigned in the Intelligent Input terminals[CA-01] to [CA-11].

※When option is connected, parameters to display orsetting range may be added. For more details, refer torespective User’s Guide.
■Parameter mode (A code：Standard Function)

Frequency reference selection[SET] function enable code example.
[SET]OFF[SET]ON[**-**] type[**1**] type[**-**] type[**2**] type・To set parameters, please read anunderstand HF-430NEO user’s guide first.
・For the motor protection, the following
parameters are necessary to be set.
-[Hb102] to [Hb108](If [IM])-[Hd102] to [Hd108](If [SM/PMM])-[bC110](Motor overload protection current)

Code/Name

Range (unit)

AA101 Main speed input source
selection, 1st-motor

AA102 Sub speed input source(Example)[SET]OFF[SET]ONselection, 1st-motor[AH-01][Ub-01]・・・[Hb102][Ab110][bA122]・・・[AH-01][Ub-01]・・・[Hb202][Ab210][bA222]
・・・

AA104
Sub speed setting, 1st-motor

AA105
Speed reference calculation symbol
selection, 1st-motor※When using 2nd motor parameter setting by [SET]
function of terminal, description as 1st motor settingin the following part is to be replaced with that of 2nd
motor setting.

4.5 Parameter arrangement
Next is the parameter explanation, such as the parametergroup and the internal group number line-up.
The [SET] classification numbers “-“ and “1” are lined
without distinction, except “2” which is lined-up after“-“ and “1”.
Example) Regarding the order[AA101]⇒[AA102]⇒[AA104]⇒[AA105]⇒…
⇒[AA123]⇒[AA201]⇒…⇒[AA223]⇒[Ab-01]⇒[Ab-03]⇒[Ab110]⇒[Ab-11]⇒…
(Parameters order depends on the last 2 digit.)⇒[Ab-25]⇒[Ab210]⇒[AC-01]⇒…
(At first the parameters which middle character is “-”or “1” are shown, next the parameters which middle
character is “2” are shown, then the group willchange.)Initialvalue
07

01 to 16 ＊00
0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

00(Disable)01(Addition)
02(Subtraction)
03(Multiplication)

00＊00(Disable)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])/03(Terminal[VF2]) 04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])/06(Terminal[Ai6])/07(Parameter Setting)/08(RS485)/09(Option1)
10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)/12(Pulse train input (internal))
13(Pulse train input (option))/14(Reserved)/15(PID)
16(Reserved)
・To change the frequency input reference, use [AA111].
Example: to set by [FA-01] -> [AA101] =07
To set by Analog (voltage) to set -> [AA101] =01(Ai1)・To change between main and sub speed is possible with themath operator.
・If [AA105]=00, the Intelligent input terminal 032[AUT] can change
between the main(OFF) and sub(ON) speed.
・Through the [AA105] selection, the operator for the main andsub speed frequency calculation is set.

Temporary frequency addition
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Add frequency setting, 1st-motor-590.00 to +590.00
(Hz)

0.00

AA106

・When the [ADD] terminal is active the frequency set in [AA106]
will be temporally added to the frequency reference.

※Depending on display restriction function, Parameters
may not be displayed in order.
Refer to [UA-10][UA-21][UA-22].

4-18

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AA111] to [AA115][bb-40][AA121] to [AA223]

RUN command selection
Code/NameAA111
RUN command input source
selection, 1st-motor

Range (unit)
00([FR]/[RR] terminal)
01(3-wire)
02(Keypad’s RUN-key
03(RS485)
04(Option-1)
05(Option-2)
06(Option-3)

Control mode selection
Initial value

02

AA121

・Select in which way will be operated.
In case it does not work, please review it.

Controlmode
selection,
1st-motor

Keypad keys settings
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

AA-12 RUN-key
command rotation direction

00(Forward)
01(Reverse)00

AA-13 STOP-key enable00(Disable)01(Enable)
02(Enable only at trip)

01

・[AA-12] specifies in which direction (forward/reverse)
will be the rotation after pressing the RUN key in theoperation keypad.
・[AA-13] changes the operation of the STOP key.
Independently of the actual setting of the STOP key it
performs a stop. The STOP circumstances can bechanged only by the setting selected in [AA-13].

RUN command direction restriction
Code/Name

AA114 RUN direction
restriction,1st-motor

Range (unit)
00(No restriction)
01(Only forward)
02(Only reverse)

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00 ([V/f] Fixed torque characteristics)
01 ([V/f] Reducing torque characteristics)
02 ([V/f] Free V/f )03 ([V/f] Auto torque boost )04 ([V/f with encoder]
Fixed torque characteristics
05 ([V/f with encoder]
Reduced torque characteristics
06 ([V/f with encoder] Free V/f
07 ([V/f with encoder] Auto torque boost
08 (Sensor less vector control
09 (Zero-Hz-range sensor less vector control
10 (Vector control with encoder
11(Synchronous start typesensor less vector control(SM/PMM))
12 (IVMS start type sensor less vector control(SM/PMM))00

Code/Name

Initial value
00

・It will prevent the output to go over the imposed
limitation in case of a mistaken operation.

・Generally for a light duty control (such as fans or pumps),
the [V/f] control with constant torque or the [V/f]control with reduced torque are more closer to theoperation characteristics of fans and pumps.
・For heavy load (Cranes, etc.), sensor less vector control is
the typically used. If it has an encoder the [vector
control with encoder] is used.
・For a magnet motor select the sensor less vector control(SM/PMM).
※With the Load Type(Ub-03) is in standard duty (ND) all
the options are available. But at the Load type is in Light
duty (LD), 09 and 10 is not available. And at the Loadtype is in very light duty (VLD) 09, 10 and 12 is notavailable.

Vector control with encoder mode
Code/Name

Restart operation after decel/free-run STOP
Code/Name

AA115 STOP mode
selection, 1st-motor

bb-40
Restart mode after FRS
releaseRange (unit)

AA123

Initial value

Vector control
mode selection,
1st-motor00(Deceleration stop)
01(Free-run stop)
00(Start with 0Hz)01(Start with frequency
matching)
02(Start with Active
frequency matching)03(Detect speed)＊

Range (unit)

Initial value00(Speed/Torque control mode)
01(Pulse train position control)02(Position control)
03(High-resolution position control)00・For Vector control with encoder ([A121]=10) selectSpeed/Torque control (00) or Position control (02).
・For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

00＊Feedback input to input terminals A and B or feedback input to
option cassette HF-FB is necessary.

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Range
InitialCode/Name(unit)
value

・For when a stop command is executed, deceleration
stop or free-run stop can be selected.
・If input terminal 032[MBS] is active (ON), free-run stop
is possible.
・With [bb-40], a restart with the release of the [MBS], ora restart operation that will be executed after thefree-run-stop operation will be selected.
・If selected free-run-stop (the torque will be lost), it canbe configured to stop by inertia in case of the [E007]
overvoltage error occurs during deceleration.

4-19

AA201 Main speed input source selection,
2nd-motor
AA202 Sub speed input source selection,
2nd-motor
AA204 Sub speed setting, 2nd-motor
AA205 Speed reference calculation symbol
selection, 2nd-motor
AA206 Add frequency setting, 2nd-motor
AA211 RUN command input source
selection, 2nd-motor
AA214 RUN-direction restriction selection,
2nd-motor
AA215 STOP mode selection, 2nd-motor
AA221 Control mode selection 2nd-motor
AA223 Vector control mode selection,
2nd-motor

Same as AA101
Same as AA102
Same as AA104
Same as AA105
Same as AA106
Same as AA111
Same as AA114
Same as AA115
Same as AA121
Same as AA123

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Ab-01] to [Ab-25][Ab210][AC-01] to [AC-02]

Scaled Output Frequency gain monitor [dA-06]
Code/Name

Ab-01
Frequency conversion gain

Range (unit)

Initial value

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

・For the 8 speeds selection, set [Ab-03]=01 assigning theintelligent terminals 007[SF1] to 013[SF7] makes
available the use of the speeds 0 to 7.
Multi-speed

SF7

SF6

SF5

SF4

SF3

SF2

SF1

Speed 0Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7

OFF
ON

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

・The visualized “Scaled Output frequency [dA-06]” isequal to the “Output frequency [dA-01]” multiplied by the“Frequency scaling conversion factor[Ab-01]”.

Multi-speed command
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Multi-speed operation selection

00(Binary(16 speeds))
01(Bit(8 speeds))

00

Ab-03
Ab110

Ab210 Multi-speed 0 setting, 2nd-motor

10.00

Multi-speed 0 setting, 1st-motor

Ab-11 Multi-speed 1 setting
Ab-12 Multi-speed 2 setting
Ab-13 Multi-speed 3 setting
Ab-14 Multi-speed 4 setting
Ab-15 Multi-speed 5 setting
Ab-16 Multi-speed 6 setting
Ab-17 Multi-speed 7 setting
Ab-18 Multi-speed 8 setting
Ab-19 Multi-speed 9 setting
Ab-20 Multi-speed 10 setting
Ab-21 Multi-speed 11 setting
Ab-22 Multi-speed 12 setting
Ab-23 Multi-speed 13 setting
Ab-24 Multi-speed 14 setting
Ab-25 Multi-speed 15 setting

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Range
InitialCode/Name(unit)
value
Same as Ab110

Input method for Accel/Decel time

20.00
30.00

Code/Name

40.00

AC-01
Acceleration/Deceleration
time input type selection

Range (unit)
00(Parameter setting)01(Option-1)
02(Option-2)
03(Option-3)
04(Reserved)

Initialvalue

00・[AC-01] changes the reference target for the Accel/Decelcommand.

0.00 to 590.00(Hz) ＊Individual Accel/Decel for Multispeed

0.00

Code/Name

AC-02 Acceleration
Deceleration selection＊The actual setting range depends on the maximum frequency
setting ([Hb105/205] [Hd105/205]).

・For the 16 speeds selection, set [Ab-03]=00 for
assigning the intelligent terminals 003[DFL] to006[DHH] makes available the use of the speeds 0 to
15.
Multi-speed

DHH

DFH

DFM

DFL

Speed 0Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Speed 8Speed 9Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 14
Speed 15

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Common setting)01(Multi stage accel/decel)

00

・When [AC-02]=00, the acceleration/deceleration time
settings [AC120][AC122] or [AC124][AC126] will be ineffect.
・2-stage acceleration/deceleration functions from
[AC115] to [AC117] can be set.
・When [AC-02]=01, the acceleration/deceleration time[AC-30] to [AC-88] for each multispeed control (fromspeed 1 to 15) are enabled.
・Even if [AC-02]=01, while in Multspeed-0 command,
Accel/Decel setting [AC120] [AC122] or Accel/Decel
setting [AC124] [AC126] are enabled.
・During remote control up/down [UP]/[DWN](parameters [CA-64] and [CA-66]) and PID soft start(parameter [AH-78]), those parameters can be
overwritten.

4-20Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AC-03] to [AC117][AC120] to [AC126]

Acceleration/deceleration curve selection
Code/Name

AC-03
Acceleration curve selection

AC-04
Deceleration curve selection

Range (unit)
00(Linear)01(S-curve)02(U-curve)03(Inverted-U-curve)04((Elevator)EL-S-curve)

Acceleration/deceleration time setting

Initialvalue

Code/Name

AC-06 Deceleration curve
constant setting

1, 1st-motor
2, 1st-motor

2

AC126 Deceleration time setting
2, 1st-motor

・Assign the Accel/Decel time that takes from 0Hz to reachthe maximum frequency.
・In case that the two-stage Accel/Decel function is notmeant to be used, the Acceleration time 1 [AC120] andDeceleration time 1 [AC122] are used.

of acceleration

AC-10 EL-S-curve ratio @start

30.00

AC122 Deceleration time setting

AC-08 EL-S-curve ratio @start
AC-09 EL-S-curve ratio @endof acceleration

0.00 to 3600.00 (s)1, 1st-motor

00

AC124 Acceleration time setting
1 to 10

Initialvalue

AC120 Acceleration time setting

AC-05 Acceleration curve
constant setting

Range (unit)

0 to 100 ＊25

of deceleration

AC-11 EL-S-curve ratio @end
of deceleration

Outputfrequency＊The setting range is limited so that AC-08+AC-09≦100.
For example, when AC-09=25, the setting range of AC-08 is 0
to 75.
AC-10 and AC-11 are the same as above.
・When [AC-03]/[AC-04]=00(Linear), accel/decel at regularintervals towards the target value.
・When [AC-03]/[AC-04]=01(S-curve), for a shockless operation
proceeds gradually at the beginning and at the end of theacceleration and deceleration.
・When [AC-03]/[AC-04]=02(U-curve), proceeds gradually at thestart of the acceleration and deceleration.
・When [AC-03]/[AC-04]=03(Inverted-U-curve), proceeds
gradually at the end of the acceleration and deceleration.
・For S-curve, U-curve and Inverted-U-curve, the curve degree ofacceleration and deceleration can be set with [AC-05]/[AC-06].
・When [AC-03]/[AC-04]=04 (EL-S-curve), proceeds gradually atthe beginning and the end of the acceleration anddeceleration.
・For EL-S-curve shockless operation, the beginning and the endof the acceleration and deceleration [AC-08] to [AC-11] should
be adjusted.

Time

AC115 Accel/Decel change
trigger, 1st-motor

Range (unit)
00(Switch by [AD2]terminal)
01(Switching by setting)02(Switch only whenrotation is reversed)[AC120]AC117 Decel1 to Decel2

AD2
Initialvalue
Outputfrequency

00

Accel.
time 10.00 to 590.00(Hz)[AC122]・Example of using the two-stage Accel/Decel function isfollowing.
With [AC115] = 00

AC116 Accel1 to Accel2
frequency transition point,
1st-motor

Actualdeceleration
time

Actualaccelerationtime

Two-stage Accel/Decel change
Code/Name

Set output frequency

Maximum
frequency[Hb105]or[Hd105]

Accel.
time 2

Decel.
Time 2

Decel.
time 1

0.00＊Accel/Decel time is what takes from 0Hz to reach the
maximum frequency.

frequency transition point,
1st-motor

・The accel/decel time is changed by the accel2/decel2
time, if intelligent input terminal 031[AD2] is ON or theoperate frequency is reached to [AC116]/ [AC117].
・Sets Accel/Decel time 1[AC120][AC122] and Accel/Decel
time 2 [AC124] [AC126].

4-21

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AC-30] to [AC-88][AC215] to [Ad-42]
2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

Setting for two-stage Accel/Decel time
Code/Name

AC-30 Accel. time for Multi-speed 1
AC-32 Decel. time for Multi-speed 1
AC-34 Accel. time for Multi-speed 2
AC-36 Decel. time for Multi-speed 2
AC-38 Accel. time for Multi-speed 3AC-40 Decel. time for Multi-speed 3
AC-42 Accel. time for Multi-speed 4
AC-44 Decel. time for Multi-speed 4AC-46 Accel. time for Multi-speed 5
AC-48 Decel. time for Multi-speed 5
AC-50 Accel. time for Multi-speed 6
AC-52 Decel. time for Multi-speed 6
AC-54 Accel. time for Multi-speed 7
AC-56 Decel. time for Multi-speed 7
AC-58 Accel. time for Multi-speed 8AC-60 Decel. time for Multi-speed 8
AC-62 Accel. time for Multi-speed 9AC-64 Decel. time for Multi-speed 9
AC-66 Accel. time for Multi-speed 10
AC-68 Decel. time for Multi-speed 10
AC-70 Accel. time for Multi-speed 11
AC-72 Decel. time for Multi-speed 11
AC-74 Accel. time for Multi-speed 12
AC-76 Decel. time for Multi-speed 12
AC-78 Accel. time for Multi-speed 13
AC-80 Decel. time for Multi-speed 13
AC-82 Accel. time for Multi-speed 14
AC-84 Decel. time for Multi-speed 14
AC-86 Accel. time for Multi-speed 15
AC-88 Decel. time for Multi-speed 15

Range (unit)

Code/Name

Initialvalue

Code/Name

input source selection

Ad-02 Torque reference
value setting

Same as AC117
Same as AC120
Same as AC122
Same as AC124
Same as AC126

Initialvalue

01 to 13/15 *1)

01-500.0 to 500.0(%)

0.000(According to sign)

Ad-03 Polarity selection for 01(Depending on thetorque reference

0.00 to3600.00(s)00

operation direction)

Ad-04 Switching time of
speed control to torquecontrol

0.00

0 to 1000(ms)100・Operations settings of torque control.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Torque bias setting
Code/Name

Ad-11 Torque bias
input source selection
Ad-12 Torque bias
value setting

Ad-13
Torque bias polarity

Ad-14
Enable terminal [TBS]Initialvalue

Range (unit)
01 to 13 /15 *1)00-500.0 to 500.0(%)

0.000(According to sign)
01(Depend on theoperation direction)

00

00(Disable)01(Enable)

・For setting the torque bias.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Speed limitation for torque control
Code/Name

Ad-40 Speed limit input source
selection at torque control

Speed 3 [Ab-13],
Speed 4 [Ab-14]

Ad-41 Speed limit at torquecontrol (at Forward rotation)

Speed 2 [Ab-12]

Ad-42 Speed limit at torque

Speed 1 [Ab-11]

FW

Same as AC116

Range (unit)

Ad-01 Torque referenceThis will be effective only for Accel./Decel.
time if the set frequency is the same.

Multispeed

Same as AC115

Torque control function setting

・Individual Accel/Decel times can be set for multispeedfunctions[Ab-11] to [Ab-25].

Accel/decel time

Range (unit) Initial value

AC215
Accel/Decel change trigger, 2nd-motor
AC216 Accel1 to Accel2 frequency
transition point, 2nd-motor
AC217 Decel1 to Decel2 frequency
transition point, 2nd-motor
AC220 Acceleration time 1, 2nd-motor
AC222 Deceleration time 1, 2nd-motor
AC224 Acceleration time 2, 2nd-motor
AC226 Deceleration time 2, 2nd-motor

Range (unit)

Initial value

01 to 13 *1)

07

0.00 to590.00(Hz) *2)

0.00

control (at Reverse rotation)

Accel. 1 Accel. 2 Accel. 3 Decel. 3 Accel. 4 Same Decel. 3 Accel. 4 Decel. 4
asbefore[AC-40] [AC-42] [AC-44][AC-30] [AC-34] [AC-38] [AC-40] [AC-42]

Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 2 Speed 4 Speed 3 Speed 1 Speed 4

・In middle of the torque control the speed limit can be set.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.
*1) 00(Disable)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])/07(Parameter Setting)/08(RS485)
09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)/12(Pulse train input(internal))/13(Pulse train input (option))/14(Reserved)/15(PID)*2) The actual setting range depends on the maximum frequency setting([Hb105/205] [Hd105/205]).

4-22

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AE-01] to [AE-13][AE-20] to [AE-62]

Position control
Code/Name

AE-01 Electronic gear setting
point selection

Absolute position control
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Feedback side)
01(Reference side)00

1 to 10000

1

0 to 10000(Pulse)5

Code/Name

AE-20 Position reference 0
AE-22 Position reference 1
AE-24 Position reference 2
AE-26 Position reference 3
AE-28 Position reference 4AE-30 Position reference 5
AE-32 Position reference 6
AE-34 Position reference 7
AE-36 Position reference 8
AE-38 Position reference 9AE-40 Position reference 10
AE-42 Position reference 11
AE-44 Position reference 12
AE-46 Position reference 13
AE-48 Position reference 14
AE-50 Position reference 15

AE-02
Electronic gear ratio numerator

AE-03
Electronic gear ratio denominator

AE-04
Positioning completed range setting

AE-05 Positioning completed
delay time setting

AE-06
Position feedforward gain setting

AE-07
Position loop gain setting

AE-08
Position bias setting

0.00 to 10.00(s)0.00
0 to 655.35
0.00 to 100.00

0.50-2048 to 2048(Pulse)0・Feedback signal is needed to perform the position
control.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Home search function setting
Code/Name

AE-10 Stop position selection ofhome search function

AE-11 Stop position of home
search function

AE-12 Speed reference of home
search function

AE-13
Direction of home search function

Range (unit)
00(Parameter)
01(Option 1)
02(Option 2)
03(Option 3)00

0 to 4096

0

When[AA121]≠10 or [AA121]≠03-268435455 to+268435455 (pulse)0
Parameter setting otherthan above.
-1073741823 to+1073741823 (pulse)

When[AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03

AE-52

Initialvalue

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

Position control range setting(forward)

0 to +268435455(pulse)Max
Other than above.
0 to +1073741823(pulse)
When[AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03

AE-54
Position control range setting(reverse)-268435455 to 0 (pulse)
Other than above.
-1073741823 to 0 (pulse)

AE-56

00(Limited)
01(Not limited)00

0.00 to 120.00(Hz)＊5.00

Position control mode selection

00(Forward)
01(Reverse)

00

・Sets the absolute position function.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Teach-in function

・Adjust the Home search function of the position control.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.
＊If the maximum frequency setting ([Hb105/205] [Hd105/205])is less than 120 Hz, the maximum value of [AE-12] will dependon it.

Min

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

AE-60 Teach-in function

00 to 15(X00 to X15)

X00

target selection

・Set auto-learning position for the absolute position mode.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Enable position saving when power is cut off
Code/Name

AE-61 Save current
position at power off

Range (unit)
00(Disable)01(Enable)

Initial value
00

・Saves the absolute position when the power supply is
cut-off. For more information, refer to the User’s
guide.

Pre-set position
Code/Name

AE-62
Pre-set position
data

Range (unit)

Initial value

When[AA121]≠10 or [AA121]≠03-268435455 to +268435455(pulse)
Other than above.
-1073741823 to +107374182(pulse)0・In the absolute position mode sets the pre-set position.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

4-23

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AE-64] to [AE-73][AF101] to [AF109]

Positioning function adjustment
Code/Name

AE-64
Deceleration stop distancecalculation gain

DC braking (DB) function

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

50.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00

selection, 1st-motor

00(Disable)01(Enable)
02(Frequency reference)00(DC braking)01(Speed servo-lock)02(Position servo-lock)

AF103 DC braking

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.50

0.00 to 5.00(s)0.00

0 to 100(%) *2)00.00 to 60.00(s)0.00

00(Edge)01(Level)01

0 to 100(%) ＊00.00 to 60.00(s)0.00

Code/Name

AF101 DC braking
selection, 1st-motor

AF102 Braking type

AE-65
Deceleration stop distancecalculation bias

0.00 to 655.35(%)

AE-66
Speed limit in APR control

AE-67

0.00

frequency, 1st-motor

1.00

AF104 DC braking delay

0.00 to 100.00(%)

time, 1st-motor

0.20

APR start speed

AF105 DC braking force*APR: Automatic Position Regulator
・Adjustment of control operation for positioning control.
For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

setting, 1st-motor

AF106 DC braking active
time at stop, 1st-motor

AF107 DC braking
operation method selection,
1st-motor

Homing (Return to reference position)
Code/Name

AE-70
Homing function selection

AE-71

Range (unit)
00(Low-speed)01(High-Speed 1)
02(High-Speed 2)

Direction of homing function

00(Forward)
01(Reverse)

AE-72

0.00 to 10.00(Hz)Low-speed homing speed setting

AE-73
High-speed homing speed setting

Initialvalue

AF108 DC braking force
at start, 1st-motor

AF109 DC braking active
00

time at start, 1st-motor

0.00

・DB function can be activated at start-up, at stop state or
setting frequency ([AF101]=02) are selectable.
・DC braking can be used if Intelligent input terminal
030[DB] is ON.
＊Depending on the setting of Load type selection ([Ub-03]) andinverter capacity, an internal limit is applied.

0.00 to 590.00(Hz) ＊・Sets the Zero-return function for absolute position mode.
For more information, refer to the user’s guide.
＊The actual setting range depends on the maximum frequency
setting ([Hb105/205] [Hd105/205]).

・Stop DB example (Braking force adjusted by [AF105])
Operationcommand
DC braking

Outputfrequency[AF106][AF103]・Start DB example (Braking force adjusted by [AF108])
OperationONcommand
DC braking
Outputfrequency[AH109]・Frequency reference DB example (Braking force adjusted
by [AF105])
OperationcommandFrequency
reference[AF103]ON

Outputfrequency
AF106

・When the DC braking time is set as 0.00(s), DC braking is
not operational.

4-24

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AF120] to [AF144][AF150] to [AF254]

Brake control function
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AF120 Contactor control

00(Disable)01(Enable: primary side)
02(Enable: secondary side)

00
0.20

enable, 1st-motor

AF121
Run delay time, 1st-motor

AF122 Contactor off delay

0.00 to 2.00(s)0.10time, 1st-motor

AF123 Contactor response
check time, 1st-motor

AF130 Brake control
enable, 1st-motor

0.00 to 5.00(s)00(Disable)
01(Brake control 1:
Common)02(Brake control 1:
Separate)
03(Brake control 2)

0.10

00

AF132 Brake wait time foraccel., 1st-motor (Forward)
0.00

stopping, 1st-motor (Forward)

AF134
Brake confirmation signal wait
time, 1st-motor (Forward)

AF135
Brake release frequency
setting, 1st-motor (Forward)

AF136
Brake release current setting,1st-motor (Forward)

AF137 Braking frequency,
1st-motor (Forward)

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

Inverter rated current
×(0.0 to 2.0)(A)＊

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

AF138 Brake release wait
time, 1st-motor (Reverse)

AF139 Brake wait time foraccel., 1st-motor (Reverse)
AF140 Brake wait time for0.00 to 5.00(s)0.00

stopping, 1st-motor (Reverse)

AF141
Brake confirmation signal wait
time, 1st-motor (Reverse)

AF142
Brake release frequency
setting, 1st-motor (Reverse)

AF143
Brake release current setting,1st-motor(Reverse)

AF144 Braking frequency,
1st-motor (Reverse)

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)Inverter rated current
×(0.0 to 2.0)(A)
0.00 to 590.00(Hz)＊Inverter rated current × 1.0(A)AF150 Brake open delay time, 1st-motor
AF151 Brake close delay time, 1st-motor

0.00 to2.00(s)0.20

AF152 Brake response check time, 1st-motor

0.00 to5.00(s)0.10

0.00 to10.00(s)

0.60

AF153
Servo lock/ DC injection time at start, 1st-motor

AF154
Servo lock/ DC injection time at stop, 1st-motor

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Code/Nametime, 1st-motor(Forward)

0.00 to 5.00(s)Initialvalue

・Operations settings of brake control.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

AF131 Brake release wait

AF133 Brake wait time for

Range(unit)

Code/Name

0.00

＊

0.00

AF201 DC braking selection, 2nd-motor
AF202 Braking type selection, 2nd-motor
AF203 DC braking frequency, 2nd-motor
AF204 DC braking delay time, 2nd-motor
AF205 DC braking force setting, 2nd-motor
AF206 DC braking active time at stop, 2nd-motor
AF207
DC braking operation method selection,2nd-motor
AF208 DC braking force at start, 2nd-motor
AF209 DC braking active time at start, 2nd-motor
AF220 Contactor control enable, 2nd-motor
AF221 Run delay time, 2nd-motor
AF222 Contactor off delay time, 2nd-motor
AF223 Contactor response check time, 2nd-motor
AF230 Brake control enable, 2nd-motor
AF231 Brake release wait time, 2nd-motor(Forward)
AF232
Brake wait time for accel., 2nd-motor(Forward)
AF233
Brake wait time for stopping, 2nd-motor(Forward)
AF234 Brake confirmation signal wait time, 2ndmotor(Forward)
AF235
Brake release frequency setting, 2nd-motor(Forward)
AF236 Brake release current setting, 2nd-motor(Forward)
AF237 Braking frequency, 2nd-motor (Forward)
AF238 Brake release wait time, 2nd-motor (Reverse)
AF239
Brake wait time for accel., 2nd-motor (Reverse)
AF240
Brake wait time for stopping, 2nd-motor(Reverse)
AF241 Brake confirmation signal wait time, 2nd
motor(Reverse)
AF242
Brake release frequency setting, 2nd-motor(Reverse)
AF243
Brake release current setting, 2nd-motor(Reverse)
AF244 Braking frequency, 2nd-motor (Reverse side)
AF250 Brake open delay time, 2nd-motor
AF251 Brake close delay time, 2nd-motor
AF252 Brake response check time, 2nd-motor
AF253
Servo lock/DC injection time at start,2nd-motor
AF254
Servo lock/DC injection time at stop, 2nd-motor

4-25

Range
(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as AF101
Same as AF102
Same as AF103
Same as AF104
Same as AF105
Same as AF106
Same as AF107
Same as AF108
Same as AF109
Same as AF120
Same as AF121
Same as AF122
Same as AF123
Same as AF130
Same as AF131
Same as AF132
Same as AF133
Same as AF134
Same as AF135
Same as AF136
Same as AF137
Same as AF138
Same as AF139
Same as AF140
Same as AF141
Same as AF142
Same as AF143
Same as AF144
Same as AF150
Same as AF151
Same as AF152
Same as AF153
Same as AF154

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AG101] to [AG113][AG-20] to [AG213]

Resonant frequency avoidance (Jump)

Jogging function

Range(unit)

Code/Name

AG101 Jump frequency 1, 1st-motor
AG102 Jump frequency width 1, 1st-motor
AG103 Jump frequency 2, 1st-motor
AG104 Jump frequency width 2, 1st-motor
AG105 Jump frequency 3, 1st-motor
AG106 Jump frequency width 3, 1st-motor

0.00 to590.00(Hz)Initialvalue

Code/Name

0.00

AG-20

0.50

Jogging
frequency

0.00
0.50

AG-21

0.00
0.50

・Prevents the passing of the output frequency in a resonant
point. Output frequency changes continuously.
Outputfrequency[AG105]

Jogging
stop mode
selection

0.00 to 10.00(Hz)5.00

00 (Free run at Jogging stop (Disable at run))01 (Deceleration stop at Jogging stop
(Disable at run))02 (Dynamic brake at Jogging stop
(Disable at run))
03 (Free run at Jogging stop (Enable at run))04 (Deceleration stop at Jogging stop
(Enable at run))05 (Dynamic brake at Jogging stop
(Enable at run))

01

・When Input terminal [JOG] is active (ON), if theoperation command is given the jogging frequency is
outputted.
The frequency and stop method can be set when
performing jogging motion.

[AG106][AG106][AG104][AG103]

Initialvalue

Range (unit)[AG104][AG102][AG101][AG102]Frequency
reference

JOG

FR

Motor Accel/Decel dwell (Hold)
Range(unit)

Initialvalue

Acceleration stop frequency setting, 1st-motor

0.00 to590.00(Hz)

0.00

AG111

0.0 to 60.0(s)0.0Deceleration stop frequency setting, 1st-motor

0.00 to590.00(Hz)

0.00

AG113

0.0 to 60.0(s)0.0Code/Name

AG110
Acceleration stop time setting, 1st-motor

AG112
Deceleration stop time setting, 1st-motor

RR
OutputFrequency[AG-20]

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Code/Name

・This dwell function will allow the inverter to stop theacceleration during the acceleration stop time when theacceleration stop frequency is reached, which is usefulwhen the load has a large inertia.
・If the Intelligent input terminal function 100[HLD] is in
ON state, the acceleration and deceleration will be
stopped (Hold activation).

OutputFrequency

AG201 Jump frequency 1, 2nd-motor
AG202 Jump frequency width 1, 2nd-motor
AG203 Jump frequency 2, 2nd-motor
AG204 Jump frequency width 2, 2nd-motor
AG205 Jump frequency 3, 2nd-motor
AG206 Jump frequency width 3, 2nd-motor
AG210 Acceleration stop frequency setting,2nd-motor
AG211
Acceleration stop time setting 2nd-motor
AG212 Deceleration stop frequency setting,2nd-motor
AG213
Deceleration stop time setting,, 2nd-motor[AG112][AG113][AG110][AG111]

Time

4-26

Range
(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as AG101
Same as AG102
Same as AG103
Same as AG104
Same as AG105
Same as AG106
Same as AG110
Same as AG111
Same as AG112
Same as AG113

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AH-01] to [AH-06][AH-07] to [AH-50]
Code/NamePID1 function
Code/Name

AH-01
PID1 enable

Range (unit)

AH-07

Initial value

00(Disable)01(Enable)
02(Enable (with inverted output)

PID1 set-point 1 input source selection
00

・Validates the PID1 operation.
・If [AH-01]=01 when the PID output reaches negativevalue, the PID output is limited to 0.
・If [AH-01]=02 when the PID output reaches negativevalue, the PID output lets out an inverted output.
・When the PID output is negative, the motor will rotate
in the contrary direction.
・If [PID] terminal is ON, the PID control is disabled andthe [PID] target value becomes the frequency reference.
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

AH-02 PID1 deviation inversion

00(Disable)01(Enable)

00

Reverse PID1
[AH-02]+

PID target value

00-

Feedback

PID
operation

01+

Code/Name

Range (unit)

AH-03
Unit selection for PID1

Initialvalue

Please refer <unit table> ofthe end of this chapter.

01
0-10000 to 10000

AH-05

10000

PID1 adjustment (100%)

AH-06 PID1 Adjustment(decimal point position)

0 to 4

2

・The unit and display data related to the output of the
PID control can be changed.

Multistage target 1 to 15[AH-12] to [AH-40]
PID1
target value

07
PID1 target 1[AH-10]
Analog input 1

01

Analog input 2

02[AH-07]

Analog input 3

03

01

RS485
communication

08

Option 1
Option 2
Option 3

PID1 set-point 2 input source selection

AH-44 PID1 set-point 2 setting
AH-46
PID1 set-point 3 input source selection

AH-04
PID1 adjustment (0%)

AH-10 PID1 set-point-1 setting
AH-12 PID1 multistage set-point 1
AH-14 PID1 multistage set-point 2
AH-16 PID1 multistage set-point 3
AH-18 PID1 multistage set-point 4
AH-20 PID1 multistage set-point 5
AH-22 PID1 multistage set-point 6
AH-24 PID1 multistage set-point 7
AH-26 PID1 multistage set-point 8
AH-28 PID1 multistage set-point 9
AH-30 PID1 multistage set-point 10
AH-32 PID1 multistage set-point 11
AH-34 PID1 multistage set-point 12
AH-36 PID1 multistage set-point 13
AH-38 PID1 multistage set-point 14
AH-40 PID1 multistage set-point 15
AH-42[SVC1-4]

AH-48 PID1 set-point 3 setting

10[AH-42]

11

00

07

00 to 13 *2)

07-100.00 to 100.00(%) *1)

0.00

00 to 13 *2)00-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

00 to 13 *2)00-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

Multistage value

SVC4

SVC3

SVC2

SVC1

AH-10
AH-12
AH-14
AH-16
AH-18
AH-20
AH-22
AH-24
AH-26
AH-28
AH-30
AH-32
AH-34
AH-36
AH-38
AH-40

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

OFF
ON

[AH-46]
PID1 target 2[AH-44]

Initialvalue

01(Addition)
02(Subtraction)
03(Multiplication)
AH-50
04(Division)
01
PID1 set-point calculation symbol05(Minimum
selection
deviation)
06(Maximum
deviation)*1) Display range can be set by [AH-04], [AH-05] and [AH-06].
*2) 00(Not used)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])/07(Parameter setting)/08(RS485)
09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train input (internal)/13(Pulse train input (option)
・For PID1 target value, two targets are selected, target value 1 andtarget value 2, the result of the operation carried out between these
two targets constitutes the PID1 target value.
・If Input terminal function 051[SVC1] to 054[SVC4] are used, the PID
target value can be changed for the Multistage.

[AH-50]+, -, x, ÷09Range (unit)00

PID1 target 3[AH-48] 07
00
Not used

4-27

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AH-51] to [AH-54]
Code/Name[AH-60] to [AH-70]
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AH-51 PID1 feedback 1 input
source selection
AH-52 PID1 feedback 2 input
source selection

01
00 to 06/08 to 13*1)

AH-53 PID1 feedback 3 input

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AH-60 PID1 gainchange method selection

00(Using gain-1 only)
01([PRO] terminal)

00

AH-61

0.0 to 100.0

Code/NamePID1 proportional gain 1

00

1.0

AH-62 PID1 integral
time constant 1

AH-54 PID1 feedback
calculation symbol selection

01(Addition)
02(Subtraction)
03(Multiplication)
04(Division)05(Square Root FB1)
06(Square Root FB2)
07(Square Root
FB1-FB2)
08(Average of thethree inputs)
09(Minimum of thethree inputs)10(Maximum of thethree inputs)

PID1source selection

0.0 to 3600.0(s)

AH-63
AH-64

AH-66
PID1 derivative gain 2

AH-67
PID1 gain change time

01

Analog input 2

02

Analog input 3

03

Option 1

09

Option 2

10

Option 311+, -, x, ÷
[AH-52]00

P 1 [AH-61]
P 2 [AH-64]

I 2 [AH-65]

+
I

+

+

PID operation
result

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

・If [PIDC] terminal is active (ON), the value of the integral
constant is cleared. If done while operating, theoperation can become instable/insecure.
・With [PRO] terminal, the gain can be changed. If thestate is OFF, Gain 1 is used, if the state is ON, Gain 2 isused.

[AH-53]

Pulse train input 12(internal)

100

D

D 2 [AH-66]

01

RS485
communication 08

0 to 10000(ms)Terminal [PRO]D 1 [AH-63][AH-54]0.00

PID
deviation

PID feedback[AH-51]0.00 to 100.00(s)P

I 1 [AH-62]

Analog input 1

0.0 to 3600.0(s)time constant 2・For PID1 feedback two feedbacks are selected and theresult of the operation carried out between these twoconstitutes the PID1 feedback value.

00

0.0

AH-65 PID1 integral

01

0.00

0.0 to 100.0

PID1 proportional gain 2*1)00(Not used)/01(Terminal [VRF)/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])/08(RS485)/ 09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)
11(Option-3)/12(Pulse train input (internal))
13(Pulse train input (option))

Not used

0.00 to 100.00(s)PID1 derivative gain 1

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

PID1 feed-forward input source
selection

00 to 06 ＊

00

AH-70
00

＊00(Not used)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/ 04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])

Pulse train input 13(option)[AH-70]

Not used00

Analog input 1

01

Analog input 2

02

Analog input 3

03

00
01
02
03

PID feedforward value

・To perform the PID feedforward control, an input isselected.

4-28

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AH-71] to [AH-74][AH-75] to [AH-92]
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

Code/Name

AH-71 PID1 output range
PID Output (%)

Code/Name

AH-75

PID Output variable range

PID
Targetvalue[AH-71]

Time(s)・Limits the output range of the PID. If [AH-71] = 0.00 thelimit is disabled.
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AH-72 PID1 over deviation level0.00 to 100.00(%)

3.00

00(Disable)01(Enable)

AH-76

0.00 to 100.00(%)

100.00

AH-78 Acceleration time
setting for PID soft start function

0.00 to 3600.00(s)30.00

AH-80 PID soft start time

0.00 to 600.00(s)0.00

AH-81 PID soft start error
detection enable00(Disable)01(Enable: Error)
02(Enable: Warning)

00

AH-82 PID soft start error
detection level0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

00

Output frequency[AH-76]

Abides by [AH-78] acceleration

PID deviation (%)[AH-80]

PID
operation[AH-72]0%[AH-72]

Terminal
045[OD]

Initialvalue

PID soft start function enable
PID soft start target level[AH-71]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Time

ON

PID Target value
PID feedback

ON

ON
Time(s)・When the PID deviation pass over the±[AH-72], the output
terminal function 045[OD] is activated.
Code/Name

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

Code/Name

AH-73 Turn-off level for the PID1
feedback compare signal

AH-74 Turn-on level for the PID1・For a shock less operation, base frequency×[AH-76] ismade the target value, with the [AH-80] output time.
・In the case of a soft start, the acceleration time can be
set with [AH-78].

100.00AH-85

0.00 to 100.00(%)

PID sleep trigger selection

0.00

feedback compare signal

AH-86 PID sleep start levelAH-87 PID sleep active time
AH-88 Enable set-point boost

PID feedback (%)[AH-73][AH-74]0%Time(s)Operationcommand
Outputterminal
046[FBV]

before PID sleep

ON

ON

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)01(Low output)
02([SLEP] terminal)00

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00 to 100.00(s)00(Disable)01(Enable)

AH-89 Set-point boost time
before PID sleep

0.00 to 100.00(s)AH-90 Set-point boost value
before PID sleep

0.00 to 100.00(%)

before PID sleep

AH-92 Minimum active time of・If the PID feedback cross over the [AH-73] level, theoutput terminal function 046[FBV] is deactivated (OFF).
If it crosses under the [AH-74] level, is activated (ON).

00

0.00

AH-91 Minimum RUN time

ON

0.00

0.00 to 100.00(s)PID sleep

・The PID sleep function temporally reduces the PID
output, achieving an energy saving state.
・If the set-point boost before the PID sleep is enabled itwill add the boost value[AH-90] to the current set-pointvalue during the boost time[AH-89] after the PID sleep
trigger is activated.

4-29

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AJ-01] to [AJ-12][AH-93] to [AH-96]
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

PID wake trigger selection

01(Deviation)
02(Low feedback)03([WAKE] terminal)

01

AH-94

0.00 to 100.00(%)

Code/Name

AH-93
PID wake start level

AH-95

0.00 to 100.00(s)PID wake start time

AH-96

0.00 to 100.00(%)

PID wake start deviation value・Operation example of the sleep function.

PID2 function
AJ-01
PID2 enable

0.00

00(Disable)01(Enable)
02(Enable (with inverted output))

00

Code/Name

00(Disable)01(Enable)

00[AH-87]
Feedbackvalue[AH-86]00

Reverse PID2
[AJ-02]+

PID target
value[AH-94]

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

AJ-02 PID2 deviation inversion[AH-95]

PID Target value

Output frequency

Initialvalue

・Validates the PID2 operation.
・If [AJ-01]=01 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output is limited to 0.
・If [AJ-01]=02 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output lets out an inverted output.
・By activating the [PID2] terminal, the PID2 output
becomes 0.

Example 1) [AH-85]=01(Low output)[AH-93]=01(Error)
Feedback value

Range (unit)

Code/Name

-

01

PID
operation+

・PID2 deviation can be reversed.
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Please refer <unit table>of the end of thischapter.

01

Code/Name

Example 2)[AH-85]=01(Low output)[AH-93]=02(Low feedback)

AJ-03
PID2 unit selection

Feedback value[AH-95]

AJ-04
PID2 scale adjustment (0%)

PID Target value[AH-94]

AJ-05

10000

PID2 scale adjustment (100%)

AJ-06 PID2 scale adjustment
Output frequency

0-10000 to 10000(decimal point position)[AH-87]0 to 4

2

・The unit and display data related to the output of the
PID control can be changed.

[AH-86]

Code/Name

Example 3) [AH-85]=02([SLEP] terminal)[AH-93]=03([WAKE] terminal)

AJ-07 PID2 set-point input
source selection

AJ-10 PID2 set-point setting

Feedback value

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00 to 13, 15 *1)

07-100.00 to 100.00(%)
*2)

0.00

・When PID2 target value input is selected, if the selected
is the parameter setting, [AJ-10] gets enabled.

PID Target value*2) Adjustable with [AJ-04] [AJ-05] [AJ-06]
Output frequency[AH-87][AH-95]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AJ-12 PID2 feedback input

00 to 06/08 to 13 *1)

02source selection
Terminal [SLEP]
Terminal [WAKE]

・Selects the PID2 feedback reference.
ONON*1) 00(Not used)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])/07(Parameter setting)/08(RS485)
09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train input (internal)/13(Pulse train input (option)
15(PID1 output)

4-30

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AJ-13] to [AJ-19][AJ-21] to [AJ-32]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

AJ-13 PID2 proportional gain
AJ-14 PID2 integral time constantAJ-15 PID2 derivative gain

PID3 function

Initialvalue
1.0

0.0 to 3600.0(s)0.0 to 100.0(s)AJ-21
PID3 enable

0.0

・Sets the PID2 gain.
・If [PIDC] terminal is active (ON), the value of theintegral constant is purged. If done while operating, theoperation can become instable/insecure.
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

AJ-16 PID2 output range

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

PID output (%)

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)/01(Enable)
02(Enable (with inverted output))

00

Code/Name

0.0 to 100.0

・Validates the PID3 operation.
・If [AJ-21]=01 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output is limited to 0.
・If [AJ-21]=02 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output lets out an inverted output.
・By activating the [PID3] terminal, the PID3 output
becomes 0.

PID output range
Code/Name

PID
Targetvalue

AJ-22PID3 deviation inversion[AJ-16][AJ-16・Limits the output range of the PID. If [AJ-16] =0.00 thelimit is disabled.
Code/Name

AJ-17
PID2 over deviation level

Range (unit)

Initial value

0.00 to 100.00(%)

3.00

Feedback
value

+

AJ-23
PID3 unit selection
PID3 scale adjustment (0%)

AJ-25

Initialvalue

Please refer <unit table>of the end of thischapter.

01

Time(s)

Code/Name

AJ-26 PID3 scale adjustment(decimal point position)

AJ-18 Turn-off level for the PID2

Code/Name

100.000.00 to 100.00(%)

AJ-19 Turn-on level for the PID2

0.00

feedback compare signal
PID feedback (%)

0 to 4[AJ-19]Time(s)ON

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AJ-27 PID3 set-point input
source selection

00 to 13 *1)

07

AJ-30 PID3 set-point setting-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AJ-32 PID3 feedback input
source selection

00 to 06/08 to 13 *1)

01・Selects the PID3 feedback reference.
ON

2・When PID3 target value input is selected, if the selected
is the parameter setting, [AJ-30] gets enabled.

[AJ-18]0%

10000

・You can switch the display data and the display unit
involved in the output of the PID control by thecalculation.

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

feedback compare signal

0-10000 to 10000

PID3 scale adjustment (100%)

ON・When the PID deviation pass over ±[AJ-17], the output
terminal function 047[OD2] is activated.

048[FBV2]

Range (unit)

AJ-24[AJ-17]

ON

PID
operation

・PID3 deviation can be reversed.

[AJ-17]

Operationcommand01

Code/Name

0%

00

00

PID deviation (%)

Outputterminal
047[OD2]00(Disable)01(Enable)
Reverse PID3
[AJ-22]+

PID target
value

Time(s)

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

ON・When the PID feedback cross over the [AJ-18] level, theoutput terminal function 048[FBV2] is deactivated(OFF). If it crosses under the [AJ-19] level, is activated(ON).

*1) 00(Not used)/01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])
03(Terminal [VF2])/04(Terminal [Ai4])/05(Terminal [Ai5])
06(Terminal [Ai6])/07(Parameter setting)/08(RS485)
09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train input (internal)/13(Pulse train input (option)

4-31

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AJ-33] to [AJ-39][AJ-41] to [AJ-52]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

AJ-33 PID3 proportional gain
AJ-34 PID3 integral time constantAJ-35 PID3 derivative gain

PID3 function

Initialvalue
1.0

0.0 to 3600.0(s)0.00 to 100.00(s)AJ-41
PID4 enable

0.00

・Sets the PID3 gain.
・If [PIDC] terminal is active (ON), the value of theintegral constant is purged. If done while operating, theoperation can become instable/insecure.
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

AJ-36 PID3 output variable

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

PID output (%)

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)/01(Enable)
02(Enable (with inverted output)

00

Code/Name

0.0 to 100.0

・Validates the PID4 operation.
・If [AJ-41]=01 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output is limited to 0.
・If [AJ-41]=02 when the PID output reaches a negativevalue, the PID output lets out an inverted output.
・By activating the [PID4] terminal, the PID4 output
becomes 0.

PID output range
Code/Name

PID
Targetvalue

AJ-42 PID4 deviation inversion[AJ-36][AJ-36・Limits the output range of the PID. If [AJ-36] =0.00 thelimit is disabled.
Code/Name

AJ-37
PID3 over deviation level

Range (unit)

Initial value

0.00 to 100.00(%)

3.00

Feedback
value

+

AJ-43
PID4 unit selection

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Please refer <unit table>of the end of thischapter.

01

AJ-44

[AJ-37]

PID4 scale adjustment (0%)

AJ-45
ON

Time(s)AJ-46 PID4 scale adjustment(decimal point position)

・When the PID deviation pass over ±[AJ-37], the output
terminal function 089[OD3] is activated.

AJ-39 Turn-on level for the PID3

10000
0 to 4100.00Code/Name

0.00 to 100.00(%)
0.00

feedback compare signal
PID feedback (%)[AJ-38][AJ-39]0%

2

・You can switch the display data and the display unit
involved in the output of the PID control by thecalculation.

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

AJ-38 Turn-off level for the PID3
feedback compare signal

0-10000 to 10000

PID4 scale adjustment (100%)ON

Code/Name

PID
operation

・PID4 deviation can be reversed.

[AJ-37]

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AJ-47 PID4 set-point input
source selection

00 to 13 ＊07

AJ-50 PID4 set-point setting-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

・When PID4 target value input is selected, if the selected
is the parameter setting, [AJ-50] gets enabled.

Time(s)ON

Operationcommand048[FBV3]01

Code/Name

0%

00

00

PID deviation (%)

Outputterminal
047[OD3]00(Disable)01(Enable)
Reverse PID4
[AJ-42]+

PID target
value

Time(s)

Initialvalue

Range (unit)ONON・When the PID feedback cross over the [AJ-18] level, theoutput terminal function 090[FBV3] is deactivated(OFF). If it crosses under the [AJ-39] level, is activated(ON).

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

AJ-52 PID4 feedback input
source selection

00 to 06/08 to 13 ＊01

・Selects the PID4 feedback reference.
＊00(Not used)/01(Terminal[VRF])/02(Terminal[IRF])/03(Terminal[VF2])
04(Terminal[Ai4])/05(Terminal[Ai5])/06(Terminal[Ai6])/07(Parametersetting)/08(RS485)/09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train input (internal)/13(Pulse train input (option)

4-32

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[AJ-53] to [AJ-59][bA101] to [bA116]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

AJ-53 PID4 proportional gain
AJ-54 PID4 integral time constantAJ-55 PID4 derivative gain

■Parameter mode (B code：Fine Tuning Function)

Initialvalue

0.0 to 100.0

Frequency limit

1.0

0.0 to 3600.0(s)0.00 to 100.00(s)Code/Name

0.00

・Sets the PID4 gain.
・If [PIDC] terminal is active (ON), the value of theintegral constant is purged. If done while operating, theoperation can become instable/insecure.
Code/Name

AJ-56 PID4 output range

Range (unit)

Initial value

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

PID output (%)

bA101 Upper
frequency limit selection,
1st-motor

PID output range

PID
Targetvalue

frequency limit, 1st-motor

bA103 Lower

Time(s)PID4 over deviation level

3.00

PID deviation (%)

bA110[AJ-37]0%Torque limit selection,
1st-motor[AJ-37]

Outputterminal
091[OD4]

ON

ON
Time(s)bA111 Torque limiting
parameters mode
selection, 1st-motor

・When the PID deviation pass over ±[AJ-57], the output
terminal function 091[OD4] is activated.
Range (unit)

Code/Name

AJ-58 Turn-off level for the PID4
feedback compare signal

bA113 Torque limit 2

100.00(Reverse regenerative),
1st-motor

bA114 Torque limit 300(Disable)
01(Terminal[VRF])
02(Terminal[IRF])
03(Terminal[VF2])
04(Terminal[Ai4])05(Terminal[Ai5])
06(Terminal[Ai6])
07(Parameter Setting)08(RS485)
09(Option1)
10(Option2)
11(Option3)0700(4 quadrants)
01([TRQ] terminal)00

0.0 to 500.0(%)

200.0(%)

bA115 Torque limit 40%(Forward regenerative),
1st-motor

bA116 Torque limit
LADSTOP selection,
1st-motor

Time(s)00(Disable)01(Enable)

00

・In the case of vector control (With encoder, Sensor less,
0Hz range sensor less) the torque limit function canlimit the motor output torque.

ON

ON

Initialvalue(Reverse drive), 1st-motor

0.00[AJ-59]092[FBV4]

Range (unit)(Forward drive), 1st-motor

Initialvalue[AJ-58]Operationcommand

0.00

bA112 Torque limit 1

0.00 to 100.00(%)

AJ-59 Turn-on level for the PID4
feedback compare signal
PID feedback (%)

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)Torque limit

Initial value

0.00 to 100.00(%)

00

・Sets upper and lower limits of the frequency command.

Code/Name

AJ-57

00(Disable)
01(Terminal[VRF])
02(Terminal[IRF])
03(Terminal[VF2])
04(Terminal[Ai4])05(Terminal[Ai5])
06(Terminal[Ai6])
07(Parameter Setting)08(RS485)
09(Option-1)
10(Option-2)
11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train
input(internal))
13(Pulse train
input(option))frequency limit , 1st-motor

・Limits the output range of the PID. If [AJ-56] =0.00 thelimit is disabled.
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

bA102 Upper[AJ-36][AJ-36

Code/Name

Range (unit)

ON・When the PID feedback cross over the [AJ-58] level, theoutput terminal function 092[FBV4] is activated (ON). If
it crosses under the [AJ-59] level, is deactivated (OFF).

4-33

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bA120] to [bA128][bA-30] to [bA145]

Overcurrent suppression function setting

Code/Name

00(Disable)01(Enable)00

bA-30 Instantaneous power

Inverter ND rated
current×(0.0 to 2.5)(A)＊

Code/NamebA120 Overcurrent
suppression enable, 1st-motor

bA121 Overcurrent
suppression level, 1st-motor

Deceleration / stop at power loss (Non-stop)

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

Range (unit)

Initial value

00(Disable)01(Deceleration-stop)
02 (Voltage controlled
decel-stop(without
recovery))03 (Voltage controlled
decel-stop (withrecovery)

00(200V class)
0.0 to 410.0(Vdc)(400V class)
0.0 to 820.0(Vdc)(200V class)
0.0 to 410.0(Vdc)(400V class)
0.0 to 820.0(Vdc)(200V class)
220.0(400V class)440.0(200V class)
360.0(400V class)
720.0

bA-34 Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
deceleration time

0.01 to 3600.00(s)1.00

bA-36 Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, startfrequency decrement

0.00 to 10.00(Hz))

0.00

bA-37 Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, DC
bus voltage control P gain

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

failure non-stop function, mode
selection＊Inverter ND rated current×2.0

・Overcurrent can be suppressed, but in that case there isa possibility the motor become in a step-out state.
Disable it in cases such as cranes.

Stall prevention function settings
Code/NamebA122
Stall prevention 1 selection,
1st-motor

bA123
Stall prevention 1 level,
1st-motor

bA124 Stall prevention 1
operation time, 1st-motor

bA126
Stall prevention 2 selection,
1st-motor

bA127
Stall prevention 2 level,
1st-motor

bA128 Stall prevention 2
operation time, 1st-motor

Initialvalue

Range (unit)
00(Disable)01(Enable during accel.
and constant speed)02(Constant speed only)
03(Enable during accel.
and constant speed(accel. during
regeneration))01

Inverter rated current
×(0.2 to 2.5)(A)＊0.10 to 3600.00(s)1.00

00(Disable)01(Enable during accel.
and constant speed)02(Constant speed only)
03(Enable during accel.
and constant speed(accel. during
regeneration))01

Inverter rated current
×(0.2 to 2.5)(A)＊0.10 to 3600.00(s)1.00

bA-31 Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, start
voltage levelbA-32 Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
target voltage levelbA-38 Instantaneous power
0.00 to 150.00(s)1.00
failure non-stop function, DC
bus voltage control I gain
・If the DC voltage of the main circuit is lower than the level of [bA-31],
the inverter decelerates to create a regenerative state.
・When [bA-30]=01, if the DC voltage drops under [bA-31], the current
output frequency will be decreased by the amount set in the [bA-36]
and then the inverter will decelerate according to the deceleration
time [bA-34]. Once the DC voltage exceeds the [bA-32], thedeceleration is temporally stopped.
・When [bA-30]=02/03, if the DC voltage drops below DC target levelsetting [bA-32], in order to maintain the DC voltage at [bA-32] target
level, the output frequency is decelerated by the PI control to theregenerative state.
Overvoltage suppression - deceleration
Code/Name＊Inverter rated current × 1.7(A)・When the current is increased, the stall preventionfunction reduces the current automatically by lowering
the frequency.

suppression enablesetting, 1st-motor

bA141 Overvoltage

Stall prevention level[bA123]/ [bA127]

suppression active
level, 1st-motor

bA142 Overvoltage

Output current

Maximum frequency[Hb105][Hd105]Inverter output
frequency

bA140 Overvoltage

Deceleration according to
the deceleration time atstall prevention
Reference
frequency

suppression active time,
1st-motor

bA144 Constant DC
bus voltage control P
gain, 1st-motor

bA145 Constant DC
bus voltage control I
gain, 1st-motor[bA124]/ [bA128]

・Using [OLR] function state, the stall prevention 1 (OFF)and stall prevention 2 (ON) can be used.

Range (unit)

Initial value

00(Disable)01(Constant DC bus voltage
control(deceleration stop))
02(Enable acceleration)
03(Enable acceleration (atconstant speed anddeceleration))

00(200V class)330.0 to 400.0(Vdc)(400V class)660.0 to 800.0(Vdc)(200V class)
380(400V class)760

0.00 to 3600.00(s)1.00

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

0.00 to 150.00(s)1.00

・When [bA140]=01, the deceleration time is increased until
stop so the DC voltage do not cross over the [bA141] level.
・When [bA140]=02/03, accelerates temporally so the DC
voltage do not cross over [bA141] level.

4-34

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bA146] to [bA149][bA-60] to [bA-63][bA-70] to [bA-71][bA201] to [bA249]
Cooling-fan operation

Overvoltage suppression - Over-excitation
Code/NamebA146
Over-excitation
function selection,
1st-motor

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

bA-70 Cooling fan
control method
selection

00(Always ON)
01(While inverter operates)
02(Depends on temperature)

Initialvalue

00

0.00 to 1.00(s)0.30

・The Inverter cooling fan can be stopped.
・If you change the cooling-fan, assigning [bA-71]=01 you
will be able to clear the accumulated operation time.

100

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Range
InitialCode/Name(unit)
valuebA-71 Clear
accumulated cooling
fan run time monitorbA148
Over-excitation
function voltage gain,
1st-motor

50 to 400(%)

bA149(200V Class)330.0 to 400.0(Vdc)(400V Class)660.0 to 800.0(Vdc)

Over-excitation
suppression levelsetting, 1st-motor

Range (unit)

00(Disable)01(Always enable)02(At deceleration only)
03(Operation at setting level)04(Operation at setting levelat deceleration only)bA147
Over-excitation
function output filter
time constant,
1st-motor

Code/Name(200V Class)
360(400V Class)
720

・This function disables the AVR function output voltage,works while in over-excitation.
・When [AA121]=00 to 02, 04 to 06, (V/f) is enabled.
・When [bA146]=03/04, it will be operative if DC voltage
exceeds [bA-149] level.

Dynamic braking (DBTR) function
Code/NamebA-60
Dynamic brake use ratiobA-61
Dynamic brake activation
selectionbA-62
Dynamic brake activation levelbA-63
Dynamic brake resistor value

Range (unit)

Initial value

0.0 to 10.0(%) *1)

10.000(Disable)01(Only while running)
02(Enable during stop)

00(200V class)330.0 to 400.0(V)(400V class)660.0 to 800.0(V)(200V class)
360.0(400V class)
720.0

Minimum
Inverter minimum
resistor value to 600(Ω) resistance*1) The actual dynamic brake use ratio is[bA-60]×[bA-63] / (Inverter minimum resistor).
・This function operates the braking resistor of the built-in
braking circuits models. To use the DBTR, setting[bA-60] and [bA-61] is required.
・Refer to the specification table of Chapter 7 for theminimum resistance value that can be connected.

4-35

00

00(Disable)/01(Clear)bA201 Upper frequency limit selection, 2nd-motor Same as bA101
bA202 Upper Frequency limit, 2nd-motor
Same as bA102
bA203 Lower Frequency limit , 2nd-motor
Same as bA103
bA210 Torque limit selection, 2nd-motor
Same as bA110
bA211 Torque limiting parameters mode
Same as bA111
selection, 2nd-motor
bA212 Torque limit 1 (Forward drive), 2nd-motor Same as bA112
bA213
Same as bA113
Torque limit 2 (Reverse regenerative), 2nd-motor
bA214 Torque limit 3 (Reverse drive), 2nd-motor Same as bA114
bA215
Same as bA115
Torque limit 4 (Forward regenerative), 2nd-motor
bA216 Torque limit LADSTOP selection, 2nd-motor Same as bA116
bA220
Same as bA120
Overcurrent suppression enable, 2nd-motor
bA221 Overcurrent suppression level, 2nd-motor Same as bA121
bA222
Same as bA122
Stall prevention 1 selection, 2nd-motor
bA223
Same as bA123
Stall prevention 1 level, 2nd-motor
bA224
Same as bA124
Stall prevention 1 operation time, 2nd-motor
bA226
Same as bA126
Stall prevention 2 selection, 2nd-motor
bA227 Stall prevention 2 level, 2nd-motor
Same as bA127
bA228
Same as bA128
Stall prevention 2 operation time, 2nd-motor
bA240
Same as bA140
Overvoltage suppression enable, 2nd-motor
bA241
Same as bA141
Overvoltage suppression active level, 2nd-motor
bA242
Same as bA142
Overvoltage suppression active time, 2nd-motor
bA244
Same as bA144
Constant DC bus voltage control P gain, 2nd-motor
bA245
Same as bA145
Constant DC bus voltage control I gain, 2nd-motor
bA246
Same as bA146
Over-excitation function selection, 2nd_motor
bA247 Over-excitation function output filter time
Same as bA147
constant, 2nd-motor
bA248 Over-excitation function voltage gain,
Same as bA148
2nd-motor
bA249 Over-excitation function level setting,Same as bA149
2nd-motor

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bb101] to [bb-23][bb-24] to [bb-42]

Carrier frequency

Code/Name

Code/Name

Range (unit)

bb101 Carrier frequency
setting, 1st-motor

0.5 to 16.0(kHz)([Ub-03]=02(ND))
0.5 to 12.0(kHz)([Ub-03]=01(LD))
0.5 to 10.0(kHz)([Ub-03]=02(VLD))

bb102 Sprinkle carrier
pattern selection, 1st-motor
bb103 Automatic carrier
reduction selection,
1st-motor

00(Disable)01(Enable: Patern-1)
02(Enable: Patern-2)
03(Enable: Patern-3)

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

bb-24 Restart mode selection after
instantaneous power failure/
under-voltage error

bb-25 Instantaneous power failure
allowed time

2.000(Disable)01(Enable: Current)02(Enable: Temperature)

bb-27 Enable instantaneous power
failure/ under-voltage trip while in stop
status00(Disable)01(Enable)02(Disable at
Stop/Decel. stop)00

bb-28 Restart mode selection after

*1)

01

0.3 to 100.0(s)

0.3

*1)

01

overcurrent error

bb-30 Restart mode selection afteran overvoltage error

bb-31 Retry wait time after an

0.3 to 100.0(s)0.3
overvoltage error*1) 00(Restart at 0Hz)/01(Restart with matching frequency)/02(Restartwith active frequency matching)/03(Detect speed)/04(Decelerate andstop with matching frequency and then trip)

Reset operation after error event
Range (unit)

bb-10 Automatic error

00(Disable)01(If RUN command is OFF)02(After set time)

reset selection

bb-11 Alarm signal
selection at automatic
error resetbb-12 Automatic error
reset wait timebb-13 Automatic error
reset number

・Regarding the restart, after the waiting time iscompleted the selected restart method is carried out.

Initialvalue

Restart mode after MBS/RST
Code/Name

2

0 to 10(count)3

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

00(Restart at 0Hz)01(Restart with
Restart mode after MBS releasematching frequency)
00
02(Restart with active
bb-41
frequency matching)
Restart mode after RST release03(Detect speed) *2)*2) Feedback input to input terminals A and B or feedback input to
option cassette HF-FB is necessary.

00

bb-40

00(Enable)01(Disable)
0 to 600(s)0.3 to 25.0(s)instantaneous power failure/
under-voltage error

bb-29 Retry wait time after an

Code/Name

01

0.3 to 100.0(s)an overcurrent error

・To decrease noise, [bb101] should be set small. To lower
motor sound loudness, [bb101] has to be set bigger.
・By setting the duty specification selection [Ub-03], the carrier
frequency is internally limited.
・For the sake of the inverter protection, the Automatic carrier
reduction [bb103] decreases the carrier in certain cases.

*1)

1.0

bb-26 Retry wait time after

00

Initialvalue

・Adjustment of the automatic reset that follows an error
event. In the case that RUN command was on
execution, after resetting, the motor re-operates
according to the setting of [bb-41].

・When using Intelligent input terminals [MBS] and [RST], restartmode can be selected.
・For [bb-40], select the operation after [MBS] input or after
free-run-stop of stop command.
・For [bb-41], select the operation after reset a trip by power
shutdown or after release reset for a trip.

Retry/trip setting in error event

Minimum level of frequency matching

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

bb-20 Number of retries after
instantaneous power failure

bb-21 Number of retries after under

0 to 16/255

voltage0bb-22 Number of retries after
overcurrent

bb-23 Number of retries after over

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

bb-42 Frequency matching
minimum restart frequency

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

・The matching frequency function adopts the motor
frequency for a shock less start-up.
・If at the restart the frequency is under the [bb-42]
frequency, a 0Hz restart will be used instead.

0 to 5

Primary
cut off

voltage
Inverter
output・Set the number of times to retry after each error.
・If 0 is set, as soon as an error occurs, it will trip.
・To retry, set to a value other than 0.

Motor speed
Lower limit[bb-42]Free-run (MBS)Retry wait time
Restart with matchingfrequency

4-36

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bb-43] to [bb-62][bb-65] to [bb260]

Frequency pull-in restart
Code/Namebb-43
Level of frequency pull-in
restartPhase loss detection

Range (unit)

Initial value

Inverter rated current
×(0.2 to 2.5)(A)Inverterratedcurrent×1.0

Code/Namedetection enablebb-66 Output phase loss

bb-44 ConstantInitial value

00(Disable)01(Enable)00

1 to 100(%)

10detection enable(frequency) of frequency
pull-in restart

bb-45

0.10 to 30.00(s)bb-67 Output phase loss
detection sensitivity

0.50・Detects the disconnection of the supply RST input line andUVW output line.

Constant (voltage) of
frequency pull-in restartbb-46 Overcurrent

Inverter rated current
×(0.0 to 2.5)(A)suppression level offrequency pull-in restartbb-47
Start frequency selectionof frequency pull-in restartbb-50
Frequency matching filter
gain

Thermistor error detection

Inverter
rated current
× 1.0(A)

00(Output frequency
at shut down)01(Maximum
frequency)
02(Setting frequency)

00

0 to 1000(%)

50

Primary
cut off

0 to 10000(Ω)

3000

Cb-40 Thermistor type selection

00(Disable)01(PTC)/02(NTC)00

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

bb-80 Over-speed detection levelbb-81 Over-speed detection time

0.0 to 150.0(%)

135.0

0.0 to 5.0(s)0.5

・In vector control, when speed surpass “maximum speed”×[bb80] for more than the [bb-81] time, it will result in an error.

Abnormal deviation in speed control
Code/Name

Frequency selected in [bb-47]
Free-run

Lower limit
setting[bb-59]bb-70 Thermistor error level

Over-speed control

Deceleration according to[bb-44]

Motor speed

Initialvalue

・In [TH] terminal must be attached the kind of thermistor
specified in [Cb-40].
・If [Cb-40]=01 or 02, error level must be set in [bb-70].

Restartcurrent level[bb-43]

Outputcurrent
Inverter output
frequency

Range (unit)

Code/Name

・The restart interval changes with the current set by[bb-46].
・Pull in at the frequency set in [bb-47] and start up.

Range (unit)

Initial value

bb-82 Speed deviation error
mode selection

00(Warning)
01(Error)00

bb-83 Speed deviation error

0.0 to 100.0(%)

15.0

0.0 to 5.0(s)0.5

detection level[bb-29]Retry wait time

Code/Namebb160 Overcurrent
detection level, 1st-motor

bb-84 Speed deviation error

Start with matching frequency

Overcurrent level
Range (unit)

Initial value

detection time

・In vector control, when the speed deviation surpass“maximum speed”×[bb-83] for more than the [bb-84] time, itwill result in an error.

Abnormal deviation in position control

Depend on the inverter model

・The motor protection level for overcurrent can be set.
・In the case of a permanent magnet motor is set lower
than the motor demagnetizing level.

Overvoltage warning
Code/Namebb-61 Power supply
overvoltage selection

bb-62 Power supply
overvoltage level setting

Range (unit)

bb-64 Detect ground fault

Range (unit)

Initial value

bb-85 Position deviation error
mode selection

00(Warning)
01(Error)00

bb-86 Position deviation error

0 to 65535(×100pulse)

4096

00(Warning)
01(Error)

0.0 to 5.0(s)0.5(200V Class)300.0 to 410.0(V)(400V Class)
600.0 to 820.0(V)bb-87 Position deviation error
detection time

Initial value
00(200V Class)390.0(400V Class)780.0

・During position control, if the position deviation exceeds the[bb-86] for more than the [bb-87] time, it will result in anerror.
2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Code/Name
Range (unit)
Initial value
bb201 Carrier frequency setting,2nd-motor
bb202 Sprinkle carrier patternselection, 2nd-motor
bb203 Automatic carrier
reduction selection, 2nd-motor
bb260 Overcurrent detectionlevel, 2nd-motor

Selection of Ground fault detection
Code/Name

Code/Namedetection level

・When the input suffers an overvoltage and if the DC
voltage is higher than the value in [bb-62], a warning isissued in accordance with [bb-61].

selection

Range (unit)

bb-65 Input phase loss

Range (unit)
00(Disable)01(Enable)

Initial value
01・Ground fault detection enable/disable is selectable.

4-37

Same as bb101
Same as bb102
Same as bb103
Same as bb160

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bC110] to [bC125][bC210] to [bC225](Example) When [bC111]=01, Inverter rated current:64A，[bC110]=64(A),Base frequency[Hb103]=60Hz, Output frequency=2.5Hz

Electronic thermal protection
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial valuebC110 Electronic thermal

Inverter rated
current ×(0.0 to 3.0)(A)
00(Reduced torque(VT))
01(Constant torque(CT))
02(Free setting)Inverter
rated current
×1.0(A)level setting, 1st-motor

bC111
Electronic thermal
characteristic selection,
1st-motor

bC112
Electronic thermal decreasefunction enable, 1st-motor

bC113 Electronic thermal
decreasing time, 1st-motor
bC-14

0 2.5 500(Disable)01(Enable)

01

1 to 1000(s)

600

0.00
to bC122(Hz)0.00

Inverter rated
current ×(0.0 to 3.0)(A)

0.0(A)

Free electronic thermalfrequency-2, 1st-motor

bC120 to bC124(Hz)

0.00

bC123

Inverter rated
current ×
×(0.0 to 3.0)(A)

0.0(A)

Free electronic thermalfrequency-3, 1st-motor

bC122 to 590.00(Hz)

0.00

bC125

Inverter rated
current ×(0.0 to 3.0)(A)Free electronic thermalfrequency-1, 1st-motor

bC121
Free electronic thermal
current-1, 1st-motor

bC122

Free electronic thermal
current-2, 1st-motor

bC124

Free electronic thermal
current-3, 1st-motor

60

Trip time(s)Inverter output
frequency (Hz)

60
3.0

01

bC120

X0.9
X0.8

00

00(Disable)01(Enable)

Store electronic thermal
counter at power-off

Reduction
scale
X1.0

0

62.8 86.4 115.2(98.1%) (135%) (180%)

Motor current (A)(Ratio to the inverter
rated current)

・In case of output frequency = 2.5Hz, the reduction scale isx0.9, then, the inverter will trip when the output current of
135%(=150%×0.9) flows continuously within 60s according to
the curve.
(Example) When [bC111] = 02, and Output frequency [bC122]
Current
output (A)[bC125][bC123][bC125]0 [bC120][bC124][bC122]
Trip time (s)Maximum frequency (Hz)[Hb105][Hd105]

0.0(A)

・With [bC112], it is possible to subtract the thermal
integral value of the motor.

60
3.0

Output current (A)0(x) (y)(z)(x)：[bC123]×109% (y)：[bC123]×150%(z)：[bC123]×200%(Example) When [bC111]=00, Inverter rated current:64A, [bC110]=64(A),Base frequency [Hb104]=60Hz, Output frequency=20Hz
Reduction
scale
X1.0

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Code/Name

X0.8
X0.6
0
0

5
6

16
20

50
60

Inverter output
frequency (Hz)Trip time (s)Base frequency

60
3.0
0

Motor current (A)(Ratio to the inverter
55.8 76.8 102.4
rated current)(87.2%)(120%) (160%)

・In case of output frequency = 16Hz (base=50Hz) or 20Hz (base= 60hz), the reduction scale is ×0.8, then the inverter will trip
when the output current of 120%(150%×0.8) flows
continuously within 60s according to the curve.

bC210
Electronic thermal level setting, 2nd-motor
bC211 Electronic thermal characteristic
selection, 2nd-motor
bC212 Electronic thermal decrease function
selection, 2nd-motor
bC213
Electronic thermal decreasing time, 2nd-motor
bC220
Free electronic thermal frequency-1, 2nd-motor
bC221
Free electronic thermal current-1, 2nd-motor
bC222
Free electronic thermal frequency-2, 2nd-motor
bC223
Free electronic thermal current-2, 2nd-motor
bC224
Free electronic thermal frequency-3, 2nd-motor
bC225
Free electronic thermal current-3, 2nd-motor

4-38

Range
(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as bC110
Same as bC111
Same as bC112
Same as bC113
Same as bC120
Same as bC121
Same as bC122
Same as bC123
Same as bC124
Same as bC125

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[bd-01] to [bd-04]
Safety terminal
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

display selection

00(Warning(display))
01(Warning(without display))02(Trip)

00

bd-02

0.00 to 60.00(s)1.00

Code/Name

bd-01 STO input

STO input change time

bd-03
Display selection during
STO input change time

bd-04
Action selection after
STO input change time

00(Warning(display))
01(Warning(without display))00(Maintain current status)
01(Disable)
02(Trip)

00＊For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

4-39

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CA-01] to [CA-31][CA-41] to [CA-55]■Parameter mode (C code：I/O terminals, RS485)

Output terminal chatter prevention

Input terminal settings
Code/Name

Range (unit)

CA-01 Input terminal [FR] function
CA-02 Input terminal [RR] function
CA-03 Input terminal [DFL] function
CA-04 Input terminal [DFM] function
CA-05 Input terminal [AUT] function
CA-06 Input terminal [MBS] function
CA-07 Input terminal [JOG] function
CA-08 Input terminal [ES] function
CA-09 Input terminal [RST] function
CA-10 Input terminal [DFH] function
CA-11 Input terminal [DHH] function

Reference<Inputterminalfunction list>

Initial
value
001
002
003
004

103 [PLA]
Pulse train
input DFH isrestricted to[CA-10],104 [PLB]
Pulse train
input DHH isrestricted to[CA-11],

015
032
029
033
028
005
006

・The functions for the input terminals are assigned in[CA-01] to [CA-09],[CA-10],[CA-11].

Range (unit)2

Code/Name

Multistage input determination time

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0 to 2000(ms)0・Sets the dead time for multistage speed and position
terminals change.

Input terminal [RR] active state

CA-23
Input terminal [DFL] active state

CA-24
Input terminal [DFM] active state

CA-25

CA-27

0 to
400(ms)

CA-55

CA-22

Input terminal [MBS] active state

CA-41 Input terminal [FR] response time
CA-42 Input terminal [RR] response time
CA-43 Input terminal [DFL] response time
CA-44 Input terminal [DFM] response time
CA-45 Input terminal [AUT] response time
CA-46 Input terminal [MBS] response time
CA-47 Input terminal [JOG] response time
CA-48 Input terminal [ES] response time
CA-49 Input terminal [RST] response time
CA-50 Input terminal [DFH] response time
CA-51 Input terminal [DHH] response time

Initialvalue

Input terminal [FR] active state

CA-26

Initialvalue

Time allowed in simultaneous terminal change

CA-21

Input terminal [AUT] active state

Range(unit)

・Sets the time to wait after the input change has ended,
and for the input to become stable and responsive.

Input terminal NO/NC settings
Code/Name

Code/Name

00(Normally
Open: NO)
01(Normally
Closed: NC)

00

Input terminal [JOG] active state

CA-28
Input terminal [ES] active state

CA-29
Input terminal [RST] active state

CA-30
Input terminal [DFH] active state

CA-31
Input terminal [DHH] active state

・NO/NC for the Intelligent input terminals FR to
RST,DFH,DHH are assigned in [CA-21] to [CA-29],[CA-30],[CA-31].
・However, in the case of [RST] assignment the NO/NC
will not apply, only NO will apply.

4-40

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Input terminal function list]
Function
code

Symbol000

No

Not use001

FR

Forward rotation

002

RR

003

DFL

004

DFM

005

DFH

006

DHH

007
008
009
010
011
012
013

SF1
SF2
SF3
SF4
SF5
SF6
SF7

Reverse rotation
Multi-speed
selection 1
Multi-speed
selection 2
Multi-speed
selection 3
Multi-speed
selection 4
Multi-speed Bit-1

014

ADD

015

AUT

016

STA

017

STP

018

F/R

019

AHD

020

UP

021

DWN

022

UDC

023

F-OP

024

SET

028

RST

029

JOG

030

DB

031

AD2

032

MBS

033

ES

034

USP

035

CS

036

SFT

037

BOK

Function
nameMulti-speed Bit-2
Multi-speed Bit-3

Description

Function
Symbolcode

038

Activating (ON) only one of themwill grant forward or reverse
rotation command. ⇒ [AA111]

Changing the states of theseterminals, allow to set different
motor speeds and change amongthem.
⇒[Ab110] to [Ab-25],[Ab210]

OLR

Function nameStall
prevention

Switches between stall
prevention 1(OFF) and 2(ON).

selection
Clear
accumulated
input powermonitorClear
accumulated
output powermonitor⇒[bA122] to [bA128]

039

KHC

040

OKHC

041

PID

Disable PID1

042

PIDC

PID1 integration
reset

043

PID2

Disable PID2

044

PIDC2

PID2 integration
reset

045

PID3

Disable PID3

046

PIDC3

PID3 integration
reset

047

PID4

Disable PID4

048

PIDC4

051

SVC1

052

SVC2

053

SVC3

054

SVC4

055

PRO

PID gain change

056

PIO1

PID output
switching 1

057

PIO2

PID output
switching 2

058

SLEP

059

WAKE

060

TL

061

TRQ1

062

TRQ2

Multi-speed Bit-4
Multi-speed Bit-5
Multi-speed Bit-6
Multi-speed Bit-7
When is turned ON, adds the
Trigger for
specified frequency value.
frequency addition⇒[AA106]/[AA206]
Main
speed(OFF)/Sub-speed
Command(ON), to change between themchangeuse ⇒[AA105]/[AA205]
If [STA] is ON, start the motor. If
3-wire start[STP] is ON stop the motor.
Forward operation direction if
3-wire stop
[F/R] is (OFF), reverse operation
direction if is (ON).
3-wire⇒[AA111]
forward/reverse
When the Analog inputs Ai1, 2, 3
are in use, if AHD terminal is in
Analog command
ON state, holds the Analog
holding
terminal value.
⇒[AA101]
Remote control
If the frequency can be set ([AHD]
speed-up function
ON included), [UP] ON
Remote control
accelerates, and [DWN] ON
speed-DOWN
decelerates.
function[UDC] returns to the saved value.
Remote control⇒[CA-60] to [CA-66]
data clearing
If ON, switch set parameters.
Force operation⇒[CA-70],[CA-71]
Change between 1st-motor (OFF)
2nd-motor control and 2nd-motor (ON).
⇒By parameter
Reset
Reset trip⇒[bb-41], [CA-72]
Activates Jogging operation.
Jogging⇒[AG-20],[AG-21]
EnablestheDCbraking
External dynamic
brake
operation⇒[AF101] to [AF109]
2-stepIf ON, changes the Accel/Decel
acceleration/decel
time. ⇒[AC115]
erationIf ON allows the motor to freeFree run stoprun. ⇒[AA115],[bb-40]
If ON error E012 occurs.
External fault⇒Trip E012
ON if at the start-up, the RUN
command was issued right at the
Unattended start
start up, E013 error.
protection⇒Tripping E013
When changing to theCommercial
commercial power supply, if it issupply change
ON, will cut the output.
If ON, disables parameter
Soft-Lockchanges. ⇒[UA-16]
Brake
Here is inputted the brake
confirmation
confirmation signal for the brakesignalcontrol.

Description

PID4 integration
reset
Multi set-point
selection 1
Multi set-point
selection 2
Multi set-point
selection 3
Multi set-point
selection 4

SLEEP
condition
activation
WAKE
condition
activation
Torque limit
enable ＊Torque limit
selection bit 1＊
Torque limit
selection bit 2＊

If ON, clears the Accumulated input
power monitor. ⇒[UA-14]

If ON, clears the Accumulated
output power monitor. ⇒[UA-12]
If ON, disables PID1 and changes
the PID target value for thefrequency reference. ⇒[AH-01]
If ON, clears the integral value ofthe control. ⇒[AH-62],[AH-65]
If ON, disables PID2 and changes
the PID target value for thefrequency reference. ⇒[AJ-01]
If ON, clears the integral value ofthe control. ⇒[AJ-14]
If ON, disables PID3 and changes
the PID target value for thefrequency reference. ⇒[AJ-21]
If ON, clears the integral value ofthe control. ⇒[AJ-34]
If ON, disables PID4 and changes
the PID target value for thefrequency reference. ⇒[AJ-41]
If ON, clears the integral value ofthe control. ⇒[AJ-54]

The target value can be selected bychanging the pattern of ON/OFF
states.
⇒[AH-06]

Switches between Gain 1(OFF) andGain 2(ON).
Switches PID Output 1 to 4 by
(PIO1:PIO2).
PID1 Enable(OFF:OFF)
PID2 Enable(OFF:ON)
PID3 Enable(ON:OFF)
PID4 Enable(ON:ON)

In case it is used in Sleep
terminal functions, when ON,
it activates. ⇒[AH-85]
In case it is used in Waketerminal functions, when ON,
it activates. ⇒[AH-93]
If ON, enables torque limit.

The target value can beselected by changing thepattern of ON/OFF states.

＊These functions are disabled when the Control mode selection(AA121/AA221) setting is 00 to 06 (V/f control mode).

4-41

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Input terminal function list]
Function
Symbolcode

Function name

Description

Function
Symbolcode

For drooping control, switches

063

064

PPI

CAS

P/PI control mode
between PI control (OFF) and P
selection
Control gainchangecontrol (ON).
Changes between the PI gain 1(OFF) and 2(ON) of the speed
control system.
If ON, executes the Servo-Lockoperation.
If ON, performs a forcible
operation, will accelerate therise of the torque.

Function
namePulse
counterclearing

097

PCC

098

ECOM

099

-

100

HLD

101

REN

RUN enable

102

DISP

Display lock
Pulse count A

Starting up of
EzCOM
Acceleration
Deceleration
disableDescription
Clear the count for the pulse
counter function.
Start for EzCOM
Reserved
If ON, temporally stagnates
Accel/Decel.

065

SON

Servo-on

066

FOC

Forcing

067

ATR

068

TBS

069

ORT

Home searchfunction

If ON, when in position control
mode, stops by home search.

103
104

PLA
PLB

071

LAC

Acceleration
Deceleration
cancellation

If ON, forces Accel/Decel time
to 0.00s.

105

EMF

072

PCLR

Clears the position deviation ofClearance of
position deviation position control mode.

107

COK

Contactor
check signal

Regarding the braking control,
check signal for the contactor.

108

DTR

STAT

Data trace
start

If ON, starts data trace function.

073

109

PLZ

Pulse train
input ZZ phase pulse input of theexternal encoder. It is invalid
when using HF-FB.

110

TCH

Teach-insignalIf ON, starts function.

Permission of
torque control
Torque bias
enableIf ON, enables the torque limit.
If ON, enables the torque bias.

Pulse train
positioncommand input
enablePosition bias
(ADD)
Position bias
(SUB)
Multistage
position settings
selection 1
Multistage
position settings
selection 2
Multistage
position settings
selection 3
Multistage
position settings
selection 4
Limit signal ofhoming function
Start signal ofhoming function

In the pulse train position
control, if is ON, the input isenabled.

Limits forward motion by
forward limit torque.
Limits reverse motion by
reverse limit torque.
Switches position control (OFF)and speed control (ON).
If ON, sets the actual position
as the origin point.

074

PUP

075

PDN

076

CP1

077

CP2

078

CP3

079

CP4

080

ORL

081

ORG

082

FOT

Forward overtravel083

ROT

Reverse overtravel084

SPD

Speed / Position
switching

085

PSET

Position data
presetting

086
～
096

-

-

If in position control mode,
Adds if [PUP] is ON.
Subtracts if [PDN] is ON.

The position reference can beselected by changing thepattern of ON/OFF states.

Used by the Zero-Return
position operations of theposition control.

Reserved

4-42

Pulse count B
Emergency-f
orce drive
activation

If ON, operation is enable.
If it is not assigned, it disables
operation.
If made ON, the keypad screen islock. The RUN/STOP/RESET keys
depend on [AA-13][AA111]
For pulse train input use.
For pulse train input use.
Forces the set operation in
emergency state.

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CA-60] to [CA-84][CA-90] to [CA-99][UP] / [DWN] operations

Pulse train input terminal
Initialvalue

Range (unit)

UP/DWN overwrite target selection

00(Speed reference)
01(PID1 Set point)

CA-60
CA-61 UP/DWN data save enable
CA-62 UP/DWN UDC selection

CA-90

00(No save)01(Save)00(0Hz)01(Save data)00

0.00 to 3600.00(s)30.00

CA-64 Acceleration time setting
for UP/DWN function

CA-66 Deceleration time setting
for UP/DWN function
・[CA-60] sets as operation target the frequency reference or the PID
target value for 020[UP]/021[DWN].
・[CA-61] sets if the modified values of [UP] / [DWN] should be saved or
not in the storage memory.
・[CA-62] selects the frequency in which will change the frequency
reference for when [UDC] terminal is ON.
・If [UP]/[DWN] is turn ON, in the case the frequency reference ischanged you can set the acceleration and deceleration time[CA-64][CA-66].

CA-70 Speed command

Initial value

01 to 16 *1)

selection when [F-OP] is active

CA-71 RUN command source

00 to 06 *2)

selection when [F-OP] is active

CA-91
Pulse train input
mode selection

Pulse train
frequency scale

Pulse train frequency

Range (unit)

Pulse train input,
target function
selection

CA-92[F-OP] Speed/Operation change
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)
01(Reference)02(Speed feedback)03(Pulse count)00

00(90 degrees shift pulse
train)
01(Forward/Reverse pulse
train and direction
signal)02(Forward pulse train
and reverse pulse train)00

0.05 to 32.00(kHz)25.00

0.01 to 2.00(s)0.10-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0

Code/Name

Pulse train input

Code/Name

01

CA-93
Pulse train
frequency filter time
constant

CA-94
Pulse train
frequency bias value

CA-95 Pulse train
upper frequency
detection level
CA-96 Pulse train

00

・If Intelligent input terminal 023[F-OP] is ON the change iscarried out.
*1) 01(Terminal [VRF])/02(Terminal [IRF])/03(Terminal [VF2])
04(Terminal[Ai4])/05(Terminal[Ai5])/06(Terminal[Ai1])/07(Parameter
Setting)/08(RS485)/09(Option-1)/10(Option-2)/11(Option-3)
12(Pulse train input (internal))/13(Pulse train input (option))14(Program function)/15(PID calc.)/16(MOP VR)*2) 00([FR]/ [RR] terminal)/01(3-wire)/02(Keypad’s RUN key)/03(RS485)
04(Option-1)/05(Option-2)/06(Option-3)

100.0
0.0 to 100.0(%)

・If [CA-90] is 0, count input edges of terminal
DFH(addition) and terminal DHH (subtraction).
・If [CA-90] is 01 to 03, DFH and DHH are 2-phase pulse
train input and follow the [CA-91] setting.

Pulse train counter
Code/Name

Reset terminal [RS]
Code/Name

CA-72
Reset mode
selection

Range (unit)
00(Always enabled (Trip release at turn-ON))
01(Always enabled (Trip release at turn-OFF))
02(Only enable in trip status (Trip release atturn-ON))/
03(Only enable in trip status (Trip release atturn-OFF))

Initialvalue

CA-97 Pulse counter compare match
output ON value
CA-98 Pulse counter compare match
CA-99 Pulse counter maximum value

Encoder constant setting

CA-82 Encoder phase sequence
selection

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Internal counterMax. count value[CA-99]OFF level [CA-98]

32 to 65535(pulse)

1024

ON level [CA-97]

00(A Phase lead)
01(B Phase lead)00

CA-83 Motor gear ratio numerator
1 to 10000
CA-84

0 to 65535

Initial
value

0

65535

・Set 091[PCMP] to output the compare results of thepulse train counters of functions 103[PLA]/104[PLB].
・Turning 097[PCC] terminal in ON state resets the counter.

Main encoder input
CA-81

Range
(unit)

output OFF value
00・Normally, Output is shut off when reset terminal is ON.
It is also possible to enable only trip reset.

Code/Name

0.0lower frequency
detection level

0[PLA] input[PCC] input

1[PCMP] output

Motor gear ratio denominator・Sets the main encoder input and the motor gear ratio
involved in the encoder feedback.

4-43

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Cb-01] to [Cb-35][CA-40][Cb-41][Cb-51] to [Cb-57][CC-01] to [CC-07]

Analog input acquisition
Code/Name

Cb-01[VRF] terminal[VRF] Filter time constant

Cb-03 [VRF] Start value
Cb-04 [VRF] End value
Cb-05 [VRF] Start rate
Cb-06 [VRF] End rate
Cb-07

[IRF] terminal

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00(%)

500
0.00

Thermistor type selection

100.00Cb-41

0.0 to 1000.0[Cb-05] to 100.0(%)

100.0[VRF] Start value selection

00(Start value)01(0%)01

Cb-11

1 to 500(ms)500

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

20.0

[Cb-15] to 100.0(%)

100.0[IRF] Start value selection

00(Start value)01(0%)01

Cb-21

1 to 500(ms)500

00(Single)
01(Added to VRF/IRF:
Forward and Reverse)02(Added to VRF/IRF:
Forward only)

00

Cb-22
Terminal [VF2] selection

Cb-23 [VF2] Start value
Cb-24 [VF2] End value
Cb-25 [VF2] Start rate
Cb-26 [VF2] End rate

Cb-40
Thermistor gain adjustment

Initial value
00

100.0

・Set [CA-40] according to the connected thermistor in TH
input terminal.
・When [CA-40]=01 or 02, with [bb-70] the error level isset. Refer to [bb-70].
・[Cb-41] thermistor gain adjustment, when theadjustment value is raised the resistance value islowered.

100.000.0 to [Cb-16](%)[VF2] Filter time constantRange (unit)
00(Disable)01(PTC)
02(NTC)

0.0

Cb-13 [IRF] Start value
Cb-14 [IRF] End value
Cb-15 [IRF] Start rate
Cb-16 [IRF] End rate
Cb-17

Thermistor error detection
Code/Name

1 to 500(ms)0.0 to [Cb-06](%)[IRF] Filter time constant[VF2] terminal

Range (unit)

Code/Name

Cb-51 to 57

Range (unit)
Reserved

Initial value-

Output terminal settings
Code/Name

Range (unit)

CC-01

002

Output terminal [UPF] function

CC-02-100.00 to
100.00(%)-100.0 to [Cb-26]-100.0CC-04[Cb-25] to 100.0

100.0Output terminal [X2] function

100.00001

Output terminal [DRV] function-100.00

Initial
value

CC-03

003

Output terminal [X1] function
ReferenceIntelligent output
terminal function list

007

・Regarding the adjustment method of the Analog input,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.

CC-05
Output terminal [RL] function

000
(no)

Analog input fine tuning

CC-07

017

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Cb-30 [VRF] Voltage/Current
bias Adjustment-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

Cb-31 [VRF] Voltage/Current
gain adjustment

0.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00

Cb-32 [IRF] Voltage/Current
bias adjustment-100.00 to100.00 (%)

0.00

Cb-33 [IRF] Voltage/Current
gain adjustment

0.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00

Cb-34 [VF2] Voltage bias
adjustment-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

Cb-35 [VF2] Voltage gain
adjustment

0.00 to 200.00 (%)

100.00

Output terminal [X3] function

CC-06
Output terminal [FL] function

035

・The functions for the output terminals UPF to X3,RL,FL
are assigned in [CC-01] to [CC-05],[CC-06],[CC-07].

・Regarding the adjustment method of the Analog input,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.
・The thermistor adjustment, when recognizes anincrease in the adjustment value, reduces the resistor
value.

4-44

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Intelligent output terminal function list][CC-11] to [CC-33]

Function
Symbolcode

Output terminal NO/NC settings

Function
name

000
001

No
DRV

002

UPF1

003

UPF2

Set frequency
overreached

004

UPF3

Set frequency
reached005

UPF4

Set speed
overreached 2

006

UPF5

Set speed reached

007
008
009

IRDY
FRR
RRR

010

FREF

011

REF

012

SETM

016
017
018

OPO
AL
MJA

Inverter ready
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Speed reference= Keypad isselected
Run command =Keypad is selected
2nd control isselected
Option output
Alarm
Major failure

019

OTQ

Over-torque *

CC-21

020

IP

Output terminal [UPF] off-delay time

021
022

UV
TRQ

023

IPS

024

RNT

025

ONT

026

THM

027

THC

029

WAC

030

WAF

031

FS

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

CC-11 Output terminal [UPF] activestate

CC-12 Output terminal [DRV] activestate

CC-13 Output terminal [X1] activestate

CC-14 Output terminal [X2] activestate

CC-15 Output terminal [X3] active

00(Normally
open: NO)
01(Normallyclosed: NC)

00

state

CC-16 Output terminal [RL] activestate

CC-17 Output terminal [FL] active
state・The NO/NC settings for the Intelligent output terminals
UPF to X3,RL,FL are assigned in [CC-11] to [CC-15],[CC-16], [CC-17].

Output terminal response
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial
value

CC-20
Output terminal [UPF] on-delay time

CC-22
Output terminal [DRV] on-delay time

CC-23
Output terminal [DRV] off-delay time

CC-24
Output terminal [X1] on-delay time

CC-25
Output terminal [X1] off-delay time

CC-26
Output terminal [X2] on-delay timeCC-27

0.00 to 100.00(s)0.00

Output terminal [X2] off-delay time

CC-28
Output terminal [X3] on-delay time

CC-29
Output terminal [X3] off-delay time

CC-30
Output terminal [RL] on-delay time

CC-31
Output terminal [RL] off-delay time

CC-32
Output terminal [FL] on-delay time

CC-33
Output terminal [FL] off-delay time・Sets the delay time since the output terminal changes,
until it actually become responsive.

Not useRunning
Constant-speed
reachedInstantaneous
power failure
Under-voltage
Torque limited
IP-Nonstop
function is active
Accumulated
operation timeoverAccumulated
power-on timeoverElectronic thermal
alarm signal(MTR)
Electronic thermal
alarm signal(CTL)
Capacitor life
warning
Cooling-fan speed
drop
Starting contact
signalHeat sink overheat
warning
Low-current
indication signal
Low-current
indication signal 2
Overload noticeadvance signal (1)Overload noticeadvance signal (2)Brake release

Description
While output is active
When constant speed reached,
ON. [CE-10][CE-11]
Turns ON when the specified
arrival frequency is reached or
exceeded. [CE-10][CE-11]
Turns ON only when thespecified arrival frequency has
been reached. [CE-12][CE-13]
Turns ON when the specified
arrival frequency is reached or
exceeded. [CE-12][CE-13]
Turns ON only when thespecified arrival frequency has
been reached. [CE-12][CE-13]
ON when inverter is ready
ON while in forward drive
ON while in reverse drive
ON if the frequency reference isfrom keypad
ON if the motion operation isfrom operation keypad
ON if 2nd-motor selected
Controlled by the Option
ON when trip happens
ON if major failure trips
ON if torque is exceeded.
[CE120] to [CE123]
ON if control power drops
ON if main voltage drops
ON if torque limit operates
ON if set in power loss
ON if set time [CE-36] isexceeded
ON if set time [CE-36] isexceeded
ON if motor thermal integral
value exceeds set value [CE-30]
ON if inverter thermal integral
value exceeds set value [CE-31]
ON by life warning
ON by life warning
ON while in operation

ON when the heatsink isoverheated.
ON if output current is less that033
LOC
the specified value [CE102]
ON if output current is less that034
LOC2
the specified value [CE103]
ON if output current exceeds
035
OL
specified value [CE106]
ON if output current exceeds
036
OL2
specified value [CE107]
037
BRK
ON when brake releases
ON if abnormality in sequence038
BER
Brake error
happens.
039
CON
Contactor control
ON if contactor releases*This function disabled when the control mode selection (AA121/AA221)
setting is 00 to 06 (V/f control mode).
032

4-45

OHF

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Output terminal function list]
Function
Symbolcode

Function name

ZS

Zero speed
detection

041

DSE

Speed
deviation over

042

PDD

Position
deviation over

043

POK

044

PCMP

045

OD

046

FBV

040

047

OD2

048

FBV2

049

NDc

050

VRFDc

051

IRFDc

052

VF2Dc

053

Ai4Dc

054

Ai5Dc

055

Ai6Dc

056

WCVRF

057

WCIRF

058

WCVF2

059

WCAi4

060

WCAi5

061

WCAi6

062

LOG1

063

LOG2

064

LOG3

065

LOG4

066

LOG5

067

LOG6

068

LOG7

Positioning
completed
Pulse countcompare match
outputDeviation overfor PID control
PID1 feedback
comparison
OD: Deviation
over for PID2
control
PID2 feedback
comparison
Communication
line
disconnection
Analog [VRF]
disconnection
detection
Analog [IRF]
disconnection
detection
Analog [VF2]disconnection
detection
Analog [Ai4]disconnection
detection
Analog [Ai5]disconnection
detection
Analog [Ai6]disconnection
detection
Window
comparator
VRF
Window
comparator IRF
Window
comparator
VF2
Window
comparator Ai4
Window
comparator Ai5
Window
comparator Ai6
Logical operation
result 1
Logical operation
result 2
Logical operation
result 3
Logical operation
result 4
Logical operation
result 5
Logical operation
result 6
Logical operation
result 7

Description

Function
Symbolcode

Function name

Description

ON if output frequency is lessthan set value [CE-33]
ON if speed deviation exceeds
the set value.[bb-82] [bb-83][bb-84]
ON if position deviation
exceeds the set value.[bb-85][bb-86] [bb-87]

069
～
075

-

076

EMFC

Emergency force
drive indicator

ON while in force
operation

077

EMBP

Bypass modeindicator

ON while in bypass
operation

ON if positioning is completed

078

WFT

ON when set value and pulse
train comparator matches.
[CA-97] to [CA-99]
ON if PID control deviation
exceeds the set value [AH-72]
ON if PID feedback is within
range. [AH-73] [AH-74]

079

TRA

Trace function
waiting for trigger
Trace function data
logging

080

LBK

081

OVS

ON if PID control deviation
exceeds the set value

084
085
086

AC0
AC1
AC2

Overvoltage power
SupplyAlarm code bit-0
Alarm code bit-1
Alarm code bit-2

ON if PID feedback is within
range. [AJ-18] [AJ-19]

087

AC3

Alarm code bit-3

089

OD3

090

FBV3

091

OD4

092

FBV4

093

SSE

ON while in waiting
statusON while in data
sampling
ON while in low battery
or when no containbattery on keypad
ON when become
overvoltage in stop status
ON if detects Alarm
information is delivered
as bit.
Use the user’s guide formore information.
ON when PID deviation
exceeds the value [AJ-37]
ON when PID feedback is
between [AJ-38]/[AJ-39]
ON when PID deviation
exceeds the value [AJ-57]
ON when PID feedback is
between [AJ-58]/[AJ-59]
ON when PID soft start
became in warning status

ON if communication is lostwith operation keypad
ON if Analog input 1 is less than
the set value [CE-50] [CE-51]
ON if Analog input 2 is less than
the set value [CE-52] [CE-53]
ON if Analog input 3 is less than
the set value [CE-54] [CE-55]
ON if Analog input 4 is less than
the set value [oE-44] [oE-45]
ON if Analog input 5 is less than
the set value [oE-46] [oE-47]
ON if Analog input 6 is less than
the set value [oE-48] [oE-49]
ON if Analog input 1 is within
range. [CE-40] to [CE-42]
ON if Analog input 2 is within
range. [CE-43] to [CE-45]
ON if Analog input 3 is within
range. [CE-46] to [CE-48]
ON if Analog input 4 is within
range. [oE-35] to [oE-37]
ON if Analog input 5 is within
range. [oE-38] to [oE-40]
ON if Analog input 6 is within
range. [oE-41] to [oE-43]

Determined by the calculation
results of two output
terminals

4-46

Reserved

Low-battery of
keypadDeviation over for
PID3 control
PID3 feedback
comparison
Deviation over for
PID4 control
PID4 feedback
comparison
PID soft start error-

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CC-40] to [CC-60][Cd-01] to [Cd-35]

Logic output terminals settings
Code/Name

CC-40
LOG1 operand-1 selection

CC-41
LOG1 operand-2 selection

CC-42 LOG1 logicalcalculation selection

CC-43
LOG2 operand-1 selection

CC-44
LOG2 operand-2 selection

CC-45 LOG2 logicalcalculation selection

CC-46
LOG3 operand-1 selection

CC-47
LOG3 operand-2 selection

CC-48 LOG3 logical
Logical output signal

calculation selection

CC-49
LOG4 operand-1 selection

CC-50
LOG4 operand-2 selection

CC-51 LOG4 logicalcalculation selection

CC-52
LOG5 operand-1 selection

CC-53
LOG5 operand-2 selection

CC-54 LOG5 logicalcalculation selection

CC-55
LOG6 operand-1 selection

CC-56
LOG6 operand-2 selection

CC-57 LOG6 logicalcalculation selection

CC-58
LOG7 operand-1 selection

CC-59
LOG7 operand-2 selection

CC-60 LOG7 logicalcalculation selection

Range (unit)

Analog output terminal adjustment
Initialvalue

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference

Cd-01 [FRQ] Output wave
form selection

00(PWM)
01(Frequency)00

Cd-02 [FRQ] Output basefrequency (at frequency output)

0 to 3600(Hz)2880

00(AND)/01(OR)
02(XOR)

selection
Set monitor code

dA-0
1

Cd-10 Analog monitor
adjustment mode enable00(Disable)01(Enable)00

Cd-11 [FRQ] Output filter
time constant

1 to 500(ms)10000(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0

Cd-03 [FRQ] Output monitor
Cd-04 [AMV] Output monitor<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference

selection

Cd-05 [AMI] Output monitor
selection

00(AND)/01(OR)
02(XOR)<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference

Cd-12 [FRQ] Data typeselection

Cd-13 [FRQ] Bias adjustment
Cd-14 [FRQ] Gain adjustment
Cd-15 Adjustment mode00(AND)/01(OR)
02(XOR)<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference[FRQ] output levelCd-21 [AMV] Output filter
time constantCd-22 [AMV] Data type00

selection

Cd-23 [AMV] Bias adjustment
Cd-24 [AMV] Gain adjustment
Cd-25 Adjustment mode00(AND)/01(OR)
02(XOR)<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference[AMV] output levelCd-31 [AMI] Output filter
time constant
Cd-32 [AMI] Data type se

00(AND)/01(OR)
02(XOR)<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference
00(AND)/01(OR)/
02(XOR)

lectionCd-33 [AMI] Bias adjustment
Cd-34 [AMI] Gain adjustment
Cd-35 Adjustment mode
[AMI] output level-1000.0 to 1000.0(%)-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0

1 to 500(ms)10000(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0-1000.0 to 1000.0(%)-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0

1 to 500(ms)10000(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00-100.0 to 100.0(%)

20.0-1000.0 to 1000.0(%)

80.0-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0・Regarding the adjustment method of the Analog output,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.

<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference<Intelligent output
terminal function list>
reference
00(AND)/01(OR)/
02(XOR)

・The logical operation function is used to output the
combinational result of two selected output terminals.

4-47

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CE101] to [CE107][CE-10] to [CE-31]

Low-current detection signal

Frequency arrival signal

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

CE101 Low current
signal output mode
selection, 1st motor00(During Accel/Decel andconstant speed)01(During constant speed only)01

setting during deceleration

CE103
Low current detectionlevel 2, 1st motor

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

setting during acceleration

CE-11 Arrival frequency 1 value
Inverterratedcurrent
×1.00(A)Inverter rated current
×(0.00 to 2.00)(A)

Initialvalue

CE-10 Arrival frequency 1 value

CE102
Low current detectionlevel 1, 1st motor

Range (unit)

Code/Name

CE-12 Arrival frequency 2 value
setting during acceleration

CE-13 Arrival frequency 2 value
setting during deceleration

・Sets the operation of the frequency arrival signal.

・In the case of low current, outputs a signal.
Output current(A)(Example) In FA2/FA4 case:[CE-10]/[CE-12]

Low-current
indication signal
detection level[CE102]/[CE103]

Outputfrequency[CE-11]/[CE-13]
foff

fon

fon：Maximum frequency 1%
foff：Maximum frequency 2%[LOC]/[LOC2]
indication signal

ON

FA2/FA4ON(Example) In FA3/FA5 case:
Output frequency

Overload detection signal
Code/Name

CE105
Overload signal output
mode selection, 1st
motor

CE106 Overload
warning level 1, 1stmotor
CE107 Overload
warning level 2, 1st
motor

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(During Accel/Deceland constant speed)01(During constant speed only)00[CE-10]/[CE-12]

fon
foff

[CE-11]/[CE-13]
foff

fon

fon：Maximum frequency 1%
foff：Maximum frequency 2%

FA3/FA5
Inverter rated current
×(0.00 to 2.00)(A)

Inverterratedcurrent
×1.00(A)Over-torque signal
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0.0 to 500.0(%)

100.0

Code/Name

・In the case of overload, outputs a signal.

CE120 Over-torque level(Forward drive), 1st motor

Overload warninglevel [CE106]/ [CE107]

CE121 Over-torque level(Reverse regenerative), 1st motor
CE122 Over-torque level(Reverse drive), 1st motor

Output current

CE123 Over-torque level(Forward regenerative), 1st motor
OL/OL2 output

・Sets the level to output the 019[OTQ] signal, when using
vector control and the torque goes over the limit.

Electronic thermal warning
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00(%)

85.00

CE-30 Electronic thermal
warning level (Motor)

CE-31 Electronic thermal
warning level (Inverter)

・Sets the level to output the motor electronic thermal
warning 026[THM].
・Sets the level to output the inverter electronic thermal
warning 027[THC].

4-48

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CE-33] to [CE-55][CE201] to [CE223]
If [CE-51] [CE-53] [CE-55] = 02

0Hz speed detection signal
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

CE-33 Zero speed detection level0.00 to 100.00(Hz)0.50

VRF/IRF/VF2 Input
Max (100%)
Hysteresis width[CE-42]/[CE-45]/[CE-48]

・Sets the level in which the Inverter outputs the 0Hz detection
signal 040[ZS]

Analog adopted value

Cooling fan overheat warning signal
Code/Name

CE-34 Cooling fan overheat
warning level

Range (unit)

Initial value

0 to 200(°C)

120

Min
(VRF/IRF: 0%)(VF2:-100%)

Signals for RUN/ON beyond time
Code/Name

CE-36 Accum. RUN time (RNT)
Accum. Power-ON(ONT) time setting

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0 to 100000(hour)0Window comparator

CE-40 [VRF] upper limit
CE-41 [VRF] lower limit
CE-42 [VRF] hysteresis width
CE-43 [IRF] upper limit
CE-44 [IRF] lower limit
CE-45 [IRF] hysteresis width
CE-46 [VF2] upper limit
CE-47 [VF2] lower limit
CE-48 [VF2] hysteresis width
CE-50 [VRF] Operation set

Disconnection/Compare detectionlevel at disconnection orcompare event

CE-51 [VRF] Operation set
level implement timing

CE-52 [IRF] Operation set
level at disconnection orcompare event

CE-53 [IRF] Operation set
level implement timing

CE-54 [VF2] Operation set
level at disconnection orcompare event

CE-55 [VF2] Operation set
level implement timing

0 to 100(%)
0 to 10(%)
0 to 100(%)
0 to 10(%)-100 to 100(%)

Minimum-limit level ofwindow comparator
CE-41/CF-44/CF-47

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
InitialCode/Name
Range (unit)
value

Window comparator(detection of terminal disconnection)
Range (unit)

Analog input value[VRFDc]/ [IRFDc][VF2Dc]・Sets the level in which the inverter outputs the RUN exceeded
time 024[RNT] and the Power-on exceeded time 025[ONT].

Code/Name

Analog operation levelat disconnection
CE-50/CE-52/CE-54[WCVRF]/ [WCIRF][WCVF2]

・Sets the level in which outputs the Heat sink overheat warning
032[OHF].

Maximum-limit levelof window comparator
CE-40/CE-43/CE-46

Initial
value
100
0
0
100
0
0
100

CE201 Low current signal output mode
selection, 2nd-motor
CE202 Low current detection level 1,
2nd-motor
CE203 Low current detection level 2,
2nd-motor
CE205 Overcurrent signal output mode
selection, 2nd-motor
CE206 Overcurrent detection level 1,
2nd-motor
CE207 Overcurrent detection level 2,
2nd-motor
CE220 Over-torque level (Forward
drive), 2nd-motor
CE221 Over-torque level (Reverse
regenerative), 2nd-motor
CE222 Over-torque level (Reverse
drive), 2nd-motor
CE223 Over-torque level (Forward
regenerative), 2nd motor

Same as CE101
Same as CE102
Same as CE103
Same as CE105
Same as CE106
Same as CE107
Same as CE120
Same as CE121
Same as CE122
Same as CE123-100

0 to 10(%)

00 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable)(at WC*active)
02(Enable)(at WC*de-active)00

0 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable)(at WC*active)
02(Enable)(at WC*de-active)

00-100 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable)(at WC*active)
02(Enable)(at WC*de-active)

00

・Outputs a signal whenever the Analog input value is within or out of range.
・As for disconnection detection, if is within or out of range, the operation frequency is limited the setting value.

4-49

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[CF-01] to [CF-11][CF-20] to [CF-50]

Modbus communication
Code/Name

EzCOM peer to peer communication
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

03(2400bps)
04(4800bps)
05(9600bps)
06(19.2kbps)
07(38.4kbps)
08(57.6kbps)
09(76.8kbps)
10(115.2kbps)

04

1 to 247

1

parity selection

00(Absent)
01(Even parity)
02(Odd parity)00

CF-04 RS485 communication

01(1bit)/02(2bit)

01

CF-01
RS485 communication baud rate
selection

CF-02 RS485 communication
node address

CF-03 RS485 communication
stop bit selection

CF-05 RS485 communication
error selection

CF-06
RS485 communication timeout
setting

CF-07 RS485 communication
wait time setting

CF-08 RS485 communication
mode selection

CF-11 Resister data
A,V

⇔ ％ Transfer function

00(Error)01(Error output
after Deceleration
stop)
02(Ignore)
03(Free run stop)
04(Deceleration
stop)

02

0.00 to 100.00(s)0.00

0 to 1000(ms)201(Modbus-RTU)
00(A , V)

01(％)

01
00

Code/Name

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

CF-20 EzCOM start node No.
CF-21 EzCOM end node No.

1 to 81

CF-22 EzCOM start method selection

00(Terminal[ECOM])
01(Always)

00

1 to 55

1 to 247

1

CF-23 EzCOM data size
CF-24 EzCOM destination address 1
CF-25 EzCOM destination register 1
CF-26 EzCOM source register 1
CF-27 EzCOM destination address 2
CF-28 EzCOM destination register 2
CF-29 EzCOM source register 2
CF-30 EzCOM destination address 3
CF-31 EzCOM destination register 3
CF-32 EzCOM source register 3
CF-33 EzCOM destination address 4
CF-34 EzCOM destination register 4
CF-35 EzCOM source register 4
CF-36 EzCOM destination address 5
CF-37 EzCOM destination register 5
CF-38 EzCOM source register 50000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 24720000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 247

30000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 247

40000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 24750000 to FFFF

0000

・Set for the use of EzCOM function.
・For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

USB node code

・Sets the Modbus communication function for its use.
・When using communication function between inverter
EzCOM, set a value except 01 for [CF-08].

Code/Name

CF-50 USB communication
node address

Range (unit)
1 to 247

Initialvalue
1・Sets the USB code in the case of multiple inverter
connections with ProDriveNext(PC software), as is also
required in the ProDriveNext side.

4-50

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[HA-01] to [HA115][HA120] to [HA134]■Parameter mode (H code：Motor Control)

Control response gain

Auto-tuning

Code/Name

Code/Name

HA-01
Auto-tuning selection

HA-02 Auto-tuning RUN
command source selection
HA-03
Online auto-tuning selection

Range (unit)
00(Disable)
01(No-rotation)
02(Rotation)
03(IVMS)00(Keypad “RUN” key)
01(Setting by[AA111]/[AA211])

Initialvalue

Range (unit)
00([CAS] terminal)

HA120 ASR gain switching mode 01(Parameter00

setting)

HA121 ASR gain switching time
setting, 1st-motor

0 to 10000(ms)100

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)0.00

0.0 to 1000.0(%)

100.0intermediate speed 1, 1st-motor

HA123 ASR gain mapping
intermediate speed 2, 1st-motor

HA124 ASR gain mapping・After setting the motor basic parameters, by theauto-tuning operation the constant of the motor will beable to acquired.
・For no-rotation auto-tuning, the following variables are
acquired, IM:[Hb110] to [Hb114], SM(PMM):[Hd110] to[Hd114].
・For rotation auto-tuning, the following variables are
acquired, IM:[Hb110] to [Hb118]. Keep the operation
conditions, as the motor can rotate.
・Auto-tuning start is done by the RUN-key ([HA-02] Initialvalue)

maximum speed, 1st-motor

HA125 ASR gain mapping P-gain
1, 1st-motor

HA126 ASR gain mapping I-gain
1, 1st-motor

HA127 ASR gain mapping
P control P-gain 1, 1st-motor

HA128 ASR gain mapping P-gain
2, 1st-motor

HA129 ASR gain mapping I-gain
2, 1st-motor

Motor stabilization (Hunting)
HA110
Stabilization constant, 1st-motor

00

selection, 1st-motor

HA122 ASR gain mapping

00(Disable)01(Enable)

Code/Name

Initialvalue

HA130 ASR gain mapping

Range (unit)

Initial value

0 to 1000(%)

100

P control P-gain 2, 1st-motor

HA131 ASR gain mapping P-gain
3, 1st-motor

HA132 ASR gain mapping I-gain

・If hunting occurs while a pump or a fan is being operated,
lower the stabilization constant for adjustment.
・In the case the load is relatively light and hunting
occurs, then increase the stabilization constant.

3, 1st-motor

HA133 ASR gain mapping P-gain
4, 1st-motor

HA134 ASR gain mapping I-gain
Code/Name

Range (unit)

HA112
Stability ramp function end ratio,
1st- motor

HA113

4, 1st-motor

Initial value
30*ASR: Automatic Speed Regulator
・Current response of the motor control can be changed.
・In case of [CAS] terminal switching,

10[HA120]=00

0 to 100(%)

Stability ramp function startratio, 1st- motor[HA125][HA126][HA127]

・These adjust the stabilization constant output frequency
characteristic curve.

[HA128][HA129][HA130]Control mode response adjustment
Code/Name

HA115
Speed response, 1st-motor

Range (unit)

Initial value

0 to 1000(%)

32

・The speed response in the operation control of theinverter will be adjusted.
⇒[AA121] control mode

[HA121] set timeON

Terminal [CAS]・In case of Control Gain Mapping, [HA120]=01
Gain 1Gain 2Gain 3Gain 40Hz

4-51Intermediate
frequency 1[HA122]

Intermediate Maximum Highest
frequency 2 frequency frequency[HA123][HA124][Hb105]

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[HA210] to [HA234][Hb102] to [Hb108]

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

HA210
Stabilization constant, 2nd-motor

HA212
Stability ramp function end ratio, 2nd-motor

HA213
Stability ramp function start ratio, 2nd-motor

HA215
Speed response, 2nd-motor

HA220
ASR gain switching mode selection, 2nd-motor

HA221
ASR gain switching time setting, 2nd-motor

HA222
ASR gain mapping intermediate speed 1,
2nd-motor

HA223
ASR gain mapping intermediate speed 2,
2nd-motor

HA224
ASR gain mapping maximum speed, 2nd-motor

HA225
ASR gain mapping P-gain 1, 2nd-motor

HA226
ASR gain mapping I-gain 1, 2nd-motor

HA227
ASR gain mapping P control P-gain 1, 2nd-motor

HA228
ASR gain mapping P-gain 2, 2nd-motor

HA229
ASR gain mapping I-gain 2, 2nd-motor

HA230
ASR gain mapping P control P-gain 2, 2nd-motor

HA231
ASR gain mapping P-gain 3, 2nd-motor

HA232 ASR gain mapping I-gain 3, 2nd-motor
HA233
ASR gain mapping P-gain 4, 2nd-motor

HA234
ASR gain mapping I-gain 4, 2nd-motor

Range(unit)

Basic parameters for Induction motor

Initialvalue

Code/Name

Hb101

Same as HA110

Motor setting, 1st-motor
Same as HA112

Range (unit)

Initial value

00：IE1 motor
01：AF motor
02：d2G4 motor
03：IE3 motor

03
Motor
capacity
setting

Hb102 Async. Motor

0.01 tocapacity setting, 1st-motor 75.00 (kW)Same as HA113

Induction motor (IM)

Code/Name

Same as HA115
Same as HA120
Same as HA121

Same as HA122

Hb103 Async. Motor
number of poles setting,1st-motor

Hb104 Async. Motorbase frequency setting,1st-motor

Hb105 Async. Motormaximum frequency
setting, 1st-motor

Hb106 Async. Motor
rated voltage, 1st-motor

Same as HA123

Hb108 Async. Motor

Same as HA124

rated current, 1st-motor
Same as HA125
Same as HA126
Same as HA127

2 to 48 (Pole)

10.00 to[Hb105] (Hz)60.00
[Hb104] to590.00 (Hz)

1 to 1000 (V)(200V Class)200(400V Class)400

0.01 to10000.00 (A)Motorcapacity
setting・If the motor capacity [Hb102] and number of poles[Hb103] are changed, the motor characteristics are set
according to the internal table values.
・The output is decided by setting the frequency andvoltage. Below there is an example of V / f control.

Same as HA128

Outputvoltage

Same as HA129

Motor rated
voltage(Ex.)200V

Same as HA130
Same as HA131

Base frequency(Eg.)60Hz

Same as HA132
Same as HA133

4

Commandfrequency (Hz)Maximum
frequency

・By setting the motor rated current, a reference current
for the motor protection is set.

Same as HA134※Initial value depends on the inverter.
Motor typical data

Code

Capacity
Number of poles[Hb102][Hb103][Hb104][Hb105][Hb106][Hb108]Frequency
Voltage
Current

4-52

Range of values (Unit)
0.01 to 75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (poles)
10.00 to 590.00 (Hz)
1 to 1000 (V)0.01 to 10000.00 (A)Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Hb110] to [Hb131][Hb140] to [Hb146]

Induction motor constants
Code/Name

Manual torque boost adjustment

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Code/Name

Induction Motor (IM)

Hb110 Async. Motor
constant R1, 1st-motor

Hb112 Async. Motor

Hb140 Manual torque

0.000001 to 1000.000000(Ω)

boost operation mode
selection, 1st-motor

constant R2, 1st-motor

Hb114 Async. Motor
constant L, 1st-motor

Hb116 Async. Motor
constant Io, 1st-motor

Hb118 Async. Motor
constant J, 1st-motor

0.000001 to 1000.000000
(mH)

Motor
capacity
setting

Hb141 Manual torqueboost value, 1st-motor

0.01 to 10000.00 (A)Hb142 Manual torqueboost peak speed, 1st-motor

0.00001 to 10000.00000(kgm2)

・If the motor capacity[Hb102] and number of poles [Hb103] arechanged, the motor characteristics are set according to theinternal table values.
・For no-rotation auto-tuning, the following variables are
acquired:[Hb110] to [Hb114].
・For rotation auto-tuning, the following variables are
acquired:[Hb110] to [Hb118]
・It is possible to input the data obtained from the motor
manufacturer. However, it must also include the data of thewiring and the like.

Hb130 Minimum frequency
adjustment, 1st-motor

Hb131 Reduced voltage start time
setting, 1st-motor

0.0 to 20.0(%)

1.0

0.0 to 50.0(%)

0.8

・Example [Hb140]=02
Output voltage (%)

100[Hb141]

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0.10 to 10.00(Hz)0.50

0 to 2000(ms)36Base frequency (100%)

Output[Hb142]

Base frequency (100%)

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Hb145 Eco drive enable, 1st-motor

00(Disable)01(Enable)00

Hb146 Eco drive response

0 to 10050

Code/Name

adjustment, 1st-motor

・In V/f control, if the energy saving operations is enabled,
enters an energy saving control.

Minimum frequency[Hb130]
Outputfrequency

10ms･･･

Forward frequency

Eco Drive function

FR

Reduced voltage
00
start [Hb131]

01

Reverse・If the torque at the time of start-up is not enough, you canchange the settings to raise the lowest frequency.
・if the trip occurs when raised the minimum frequency, set a
longer "reduced voltage start time setting".

Outputvoltage00(Disabled)01(Always enable)
02(Enable at Forward
rotation)03(Enable at Reverse
rotation)・The manual torque operation mode selection will allow
to restrict the boost to forward only or reverse only
operation.

Minimum frequency setting
Code/Name

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

60ms

4-53

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Hb150] to [Hb171][Hb180] to [Hb280]

Free V/f setting

Output adjustment gain
Range (unit)

Free-V/f frequency 1 setting, 1st-motor

0.00 to[Hb152](Hz)

0.00

Hb151

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f frequency 2 setting, 1st-motor[Hb150] to[Hb154](Hz)

0.00

Hb153

0.0 to 1000.0(V)

0.0

Hb150
Free-V/f voltage 1 setting, 1st-motor

Hb152
Free-V/f voltage 2 setting, 1st-motor

Hb154
Free-V/f frequency 3 setting, 1st-motor[Hb152] to[Hb156](Hz)

0.00

Hb155

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f frequency 4 setting, 1st-motor[Hb154] to[Hb158](Hz)

0.00

Hb157

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f voltage 3 setting, 1st-motor

Hb156
Free-V/f voltage 4 setting, 1st-motor

Hb158
Free-V/f frequency 5 setting, 1st-motor[Hb156] to[Hb160](Hz)

0.00

Hb159

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f frequency 6 setting, 1st-motor[Hb158] to[Hb162](Hz)

0.00

Hb161

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f frequency 7 setting, 1st-motor[Hb160] to[Hb104](Hz)

0.00

Hb163

0.0 to 1000.0(V)0.0

Free-V/f voltage 5 setting, 1st-motor

Hb160
Free-V/f voltage 6 setting, 1st-motor

Hb162
Free-V/f voltage 7 setting, 1st-motor

V1
V2,V3
Outputfrequency (Hz)
f5

f6

f7

Base
Maximum
frequency frequency

V/f feedback control adjustment
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

Hb170 Slip compensation P-gain
at V/f with encoder, 1st-motor

Hb171 Slip compensation I-gain

100

100

Hb230 Minimum frequency adjustment, 2nd-motor
Hb231 Reduced voltage start time setting,2nd-motor
Hb240 Manual torque boost operation mode
selection, 2nd-motor
Hb241 Manual torque boost value, 2nd-motor
Hb242 Manual torque boost Peak speed,
2nd-motor
Hb245 Eco drive enable, 2nd-motor
Hb246 Eco drive response adjustment, 2nd-motor
Hb250 Free-V/f frequency 1 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb251 Free-V/f voltage 1 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb252 Free-V/f frequency 2 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb253 Free-V/f voltage 2 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb254 Free-V/f frequency 3 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb255 Free-V/f voltage 3 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb256 Free-V/f frequency 4 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb257 Free-V/f voltage 4 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb258 Free-V/f frequency 5 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb259 Free-V/f voltage 5 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb260 Free-V/f frequency 6 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb261 Free-V/f voltage 6 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb262 Free-V/f frequency 7 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb263 Free-V/f voltage 7 setting, 2nd-motor
Hb270 Slip compensation P-gain at V/f withencoder, 2nd-motor
Hb271 Slip compensation I-gain at V/f withencoder, 2nd-motor
Hb280 Output voltage gain, 2nd-motor

0 to 1000(%)

at V/f with encoder, 1st-motor

Hb201 Motor setting, 2nd-motor
Hb202 Async. Motor capacity setting,2nd-motor
Hb203 Async. Motor number of poles setting,2nd-motor
Hb204 Async. Motor base frequency setting,2nd-motor
Hb205 Async. Motor maximum frequency
setting, 2nd-motor
Hb206 Async. Motor rated voltage, 2nd-motor
Hb208 Async. Motor rated current, 2nd-motor
Hb210 Async. Motor constant R1, 2nd-motor
Hb212 Async. Motor constant R2, 2nd-motor
Hb214 Async. Motor constant L, 2nd-motor
Hb216 Async. Motor constant Io, 2nd-motor
Hb218 Async. Motor constant J, 2nd-motor

Code/Name

V4

f4

0 to 255(%)

Range(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as Hb101
Same as Hb102
Same as Hb103
Same as Hb104
Same as Hb105
Same as Hb106
Same as Hb108
Same as Hb110
Same as Hb112
Same as Hb114
Same as Hb116
Same as Hb118

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

V5

f3

Hb180 Output voltage gain, 1st-motor

Code/Name

V6

f2

Initialvalue

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

Output voltage (V)Voltage
rated value
V7

f1

Range (unit)

・When the motor is hunting, there is a possibility that the
motor stabilizes by adjustment of the output voltage
gain.

・Frequency 1(f1) to frequency (f7) and the corresponding
voltage 1(V1) to voltage 7(V7) are set below the basefrequency and rated voltage. In the case of ahigh-frequency motor, set the base/highest frequency
the first.

0

Code/Name

Induction Motor (IM)

Code/Name

Initialvalue

100

・When [AA121] is set as feedback control, slip
compensation is possible.

4-54

Range
(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as Hb130
Same as Hb131
Same as Hb140
Same as Hb141
Same as Hb142
Same as Hb145
Same as Hb146
Same as Hb150
Same as Hb151
Same as Hb152
Same as Hb153
Same as Hb154
Same as Hb155
Same as Hb156
Same as Hb157
Same as Hb158
Same as Hb159
Same as Hb160
Same as Hb161
Same as Hb162
Same as Hb163
Same as Hb170
Same as Hb171
Same as Hb180

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[HC101] to [HC115][HC120] to [HC121]

Automatic torque boost adjustment
Code/Name

Motor control adjustment gain

Range (unit)

Code/Name

Initial
value

HC120

HC101 Automatic torque boost voltage
compensation gain, 1st-motor

Torque current reference filter
time constant, 1st-motor
0 to 255(%)

HC102 Automatic torque boost slip

100

HC121
Speed feedforward compensation
gain, 1st-motor

compensation gain, 1st-motor

・If is chosen the automatic torque boost control function
in [AA121], adjustments can be made.
For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

Sensor less vector control start
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

HC110 Zero speed range limit, 1st-motor
HC111 Boost value at start, 1st-motor

0 to 100(%)

100(IM-SLV,IM-CLV)

HC112 Boost value at start, 1st-motor

50

Range (unit)

Direction reversal protection,
1st-motor

00(Disable)01(Enable)

Range (unit)00

0 to 1000(%)

100

0 to 133(%)

115

Forcing level, 1st-motor

HC141
Modulation threshold 1, 1st-motor

・[HC137] adjust the stabilization constant output
frequency characteristics curve.
・[HC140] adjust the output current when the forcing
function is active.
・[HC141] [HC142] adjust the upper limit of the output
voltage.
2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

Selection for the torquetransformation, 1st-motor

00(Torque)01(Current)

Code/Name

compensation gain, 2nd-motor

Initial value

HC202 Automatic torque boost slip
compensation gain, 2nd-motor

00

HC210 Zero speed range limit, 2nd-motor
HC211 Boost value at start, 2nd-motor(IM-SLV,IM-CLV)

HC212 Boost value at start, 2nd-motor(IM-0Hz-SLV)
HC213 Secondary resistor (R2)

Selection for the torque transformation
HC115

Initial value

HC140

HC201 Automatic torque boost voltage

00(Disable)01(Enable)

Range (unit)

Range (unit)

80.0・This function is to prevent the change of direction of theoutput in a low frequency range for vector control suchas (SLV/0Hz SLV/CLV).

Code/Name0

Flux setting level, 1st-motor

Reverse run protection function
HC114

0 to 1000(%)

Modulation threshold 2, 1st-motor

Initial value

・When the vector control (with encoder/ sensor
less/0Hz) is being used and the temperature of the
motor can be sensed, the inverter is capable of reducing
the speed variations due to temperature changes.
・If use this function, use a thermistor PB-41E from
Shibaura Electronics(Ltd.) with [Cb-40]=02(NTC).

Code/Name

2

0.0 to100.0(%)

HC142

Secondary resistor compensation function
correction, 1st-motor

0 to 100(ms)・[HC120] can put into effect a filter for torque commandof sensor less vector control, 0Hz sensor less vector
control and vector control with encoder.
・[HC121] adjust the compensation of the feedforward
for torque command of sensor less vector control, 0Hz
sensor less vector control and vector control withencoder.

HC137

0 to 50(%)

・When [AA121] is sensor less vector control or 0Hz-range
sensor less vector control, start boost is possible.

HC113 Secondary resistance (R2)

Initial value

Code/Name0(IM-0Hz-SLV）

Code/Name

Range (unit)

compensation enable 2nd-motor

Initial value

HC214 Direction reversal protection,
2nd-motor

01

HC215 Torque current reference filter time
constant 2nd-motor

HC220 Torque current reference filter time
constant 2nd-motor

HC221 Speed feedforward compensation
gain, 2nd-motor

HC237 Flux setting level, 2nd-motor
HC240 Forcing level, 2nd-motor
HC241 Modulation threshold 1, 2nd-motor
HC242 Modulation threshold 2, 2nd-motor
4-55

Range
(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as HC101
Same as HC102
Same as HC110
Same as HC111
Same as HC112
Same as HC113
Same as HC114
Same as HC115
Same as HC120
Same as HC121
Same as HC137
Same as HC140
Same as HC141
Same as HC142

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Hd102] to [Hd118][Hd130] to [Hd137][Hd-41] to [Hd-58](SM/PMM) basic parameters
Permanent Magnet Sync. Motor(SM/PMM)

Code/Name

Minimum frequency settings

Range (unit)

Hd102

Initial value

Code/Name

Hd130 Minimum frequency

0.01 to 75.00 (kW)Sync. Motor capacity
setting, 1st-motor

adjustment for Sync.M, 1st-motor

Factory setting

Hd103

Hd131 No-Load current for Sync.M,

2 to 48(Pole)

Sync. Motor number ofpoles setting, 1st-motor

Hd104

1st-motor

Hd106(200V Class)200(400V Class)400

1 to 1000(V)Sync. Motor rated
voltage, 1st-motor

Hd108

0.01 to 10000.00(A)

Sync. Motor rated
current, 1st-motor

0 to 100(%)

10

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Hd132 Starting method for00(Synchronous)
01(Initial motor position
estimate (IMPE))

00

Sync.M, 1st-motor

Hd133 IMPE 0V wait number
Factory settingfor Sync.M, 1st-motor

Hd134 IMPE detect wait
number for Sync.M, 1st-motor

Code/Name

Hd110
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor(SM/PMM)

8

Magnetic pole position estimation SM(PMM)[Hd104] to 590.00(Hz)

Sync. Maximum
frequency setting,1st-motor

Sync. Motor constantR, 1st-motor

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Sync. Motor constantLd, 1st-motor

Hd114

Hd136 IMPE voltage gain forSync.M, 1st-motor
Hd137 IMPE Mg-poleposition offset, 1st-motor

Sync. Motor constantLq, 1st-motor

Hd116
Sync. Motor constantKe, 1st-motor

Hd118
Sync. Motor constantJ, 1st-motor

Code

Capacity
Number of poles[Hd102][Hd103][Hd104][Hd105][Hd106][Hd108]0 to 200(%)

100

0 to 359(°)

0・For SM/PMM, if initial position estimate is enabled by[Hd132],drive after magnetic pole position estimation.
・Offset [Hd137] is added at the first start when doing reverse
motion.

Factory
setting

IVMS setting (Reserved)

0.1 to 100000.0(mVs/rad)Code/

Hd-41 IVMS carrier frequency
Hd-42 Filter gain of IVMS current

0.00001 to 10000.00000(kgm2)

Range of values (unit)
0.01 to 75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (Poles)

0 to 1000

100

Hd-43 Open-phase voltage
detection gain

00(Gain 0)/01(Gain 1)
02(Gain 2)/03(Gain 3)00

Hd-44 Open-phase switching
threshold compensation

00(Disable)01(Enable)01

Hd-45 SM(PMM)-IVMS speed
control P gain

0 to 1000100

Hd-46 SM(PMM)-IVMS speed
control I gain

0 to 10000100

Hd-47 SM(PMM)-IVMS wait time
for open-phase switching,

0 to 1000

1500(Disable)01(Enable)01

Hd-49 SM(PMM)-IVMS open-phasevoltage detection timing adjustment,

0 to 1000

10

Hd-50 SM(PMM)-IVMS minimum
pulse width adjustment,

0 to 1000

100

0 to 255(%)

100

0 to 50(%)

5on the rotation-direction
determination

1 to 1000 (V)0.01 to 10000.00 (A)＊Initial value depends on the inverter.
・If motor capacity [Hd102], number of poles [Hd103] arechanged, the motor characteristics are set according to
the internal table values.
・The values of [Hd110] to [Hd114] can be acquired by norotation auto-tuning.

InitialValue
2.0

Hd-48 SM(PMM)-IVMS restriction

10.00 to 590.00 (Hz)Range(unit)
0.5 to 16.0(kHz)detection

・The motor capacity and the number of poles will be set
by internal table.
・For SM/PMM, frequency, voltage, and the motor
characteristics are necessary.
・If the maximum current is decided, sets with a margin theovercurrent detection level [bb160].
Motor typical data

30

for Sync.M, 1st-motor

0.000001 to
1000.000000 (Ω)

0.000001 to
1000.000000 (mH)

10
0 to 255

Hd135 IMPE detect number

Hd112

Voltage
Current

0 to 50(%)

60.00

Hd105

Frequency

Initialvalue

・By base frequency[Hd104]×[Hd130], change from Sync drive tosensorless control drive.
・By [Hd131], the sensorless vector control no-load current is
set.

10.00 to [Hd105](Hz)

Sync. Base frequency
setting, 1st-motor

Range (unit)

Hd-51 IVMS threshold current limit
Hd-52 IVMS threshold gain
Hd-58 IVMS carrier-frequency
switching start/finish point ＊＊Depends on the base frequency
・Above parameters are for adjustment in SM(PMM) drivingwith IVMS.

4-56

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Hd202] to [Hd237][oA-10] to [oA-33][ob-01] to [ob-04]

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.

■Parameter mode (O code：Option Card)

Hd202
Sync. Motor capacity setting, 2nd-motor
Hd203
Sync. Motor number of poles setting,2nd-motor
Hd204
Sync. Base frequency setting, 2nd-motor
Hd205
Sync. Maximum frequency setting,2nd-motor
Hd206
Sync. Motor rated voltage, 2nd-motor
Hd208
Sync. Motor rated current, 2nd-motor
Hd210
Sync. Motor constant R, 2nd-motor
Hd212
Sync. Motor constant Ld, 2nd-motor
Hd214
Sync. Motor constant Lq, 2nd-motor
Hd216
Sync. Motor constant Ke, 2nd-motor
Hd218
Sync. Motor constant J, 2nd-motor

Range(unit)

Initialvalue

Same as Hd102
Same as Hd103

・”o” parameters are displayed by the [UA-11] = 01. Thisconfiguration is not necessary except when option is used.
・The implementation of the following parameters might differ
depending on the type of option being used. For more
information, refer to the option User’s guide and the
HF-430NEO User’s guide.

Optional board error operation

Same as Hd104

Code/Name

Same as Hd105
Same as Hd106
Same as Hd108

Slot 1

Perm. Magnet Sync. Motor (SM/PMM)

Code/Name

Same as Hd110
Same as Hd112
Same as Hd114

oA-10 Operation
selection at an option error(SLOT-1)00(Error)01((Ignore error(keep running))00

oA-11 Communication
Watch Dog Timer (SLOT-1)

0.00 to 100.00(s)1.00

00(Error)01(Trip after Decelerationstop)/02(Ignore)
03(Free run stop)
04(Deceleration stop)

0100(Disable)01(Enable)00

oA-12 Action selection
at a communication error(SLOT-1)

oA-13
RUN command selection at
start up (SLOT-1)

Same as Hd118

oA-20 Operation
selection at an option error(SLOT-2)00(Error)01((Ignore error(keep running))00

oA-21 Communication
Watch Dog Timer (SLOT-2)

0.00 to 100.00(s)1.00

00(Error)01(Trip after Decelerationstop)/02(Ignore)
03(Free run stop)
04(Deceleration stop)

0100(Disable)01(Enable)0000(Error)01((Ignore error(keep running))00

0.00 to 100.00(s)1.00

00(Error)01(Trip after Decelerationstop)/02(Ignore)
03(Free run stop)
04(Deceleration stop)

0100(Disable)01(Enable)

00

Initialvalue

Slot 2

Range(unit)

Same as Hd130

oA-22 Action selection
at a communication error(SLOT-2)

Same as Hd131

oA-23

Same as Hd132

RUN command selection at
start up (SLOT-2)

Same as Hd133

oA-30

Same as Hd134

Operation selection at an
option error (SLOT-3)

Same as Hd135

oA-31 Communication
Watch Dog Timer (SLOT-3)

Slot 3

Hd230
Minimum frequency adjustment for Sync.M,
2nd-motor
Hd231
No-Load current for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd232
Starting method for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd233
IMPE 0V wait number for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd234
IMPE detect wait number for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd235
IMPE detect number for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd236
IMPE voltage gain for Sync.M, 2nd-motor
Hd237
IMPE Mg-pole position offset, 2nd-motor

Initialvalue

Same as Hd116

2nd motor When Intelligent Input terminal 024[SET] is enabled.
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Same as Hd136
Same as Hd137

oA-32Action selection
at a communication error(SLOT-3)oA-33
RUN command selection at
start up (SLOT-3)

HF-FB Optional board encoder input setting
Code/Name

ob-01
Encoder constant setting

ob-02
Encoder phase sequence selection

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

32 to 65535(Pulse)1024

00(A Phase lead)
01(B Phase lead)0

1 to 10000

1

ob-03
Motor gear ratio numerator

ob-04
Motor gear ratio denominator・Sets the encoder to be input into the optional board, and sets
the motor gear ratio involved in the feedback of the encoder.

4-57

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[ob-10] to [ob-16][oC-01] to [oC-28][oE-01] to [oE-33]

HF-FB Pulse train input terminal setting

ob-11
Pulse train input
mode selection(option)ob-12 Pulse train
frequency scale(option)

Pulse train frequency(option)ob-13 Pulse train
frequency filter time
constant (option)

ob-14 Pulse train
frequency bias value(option)00(Frequency reference)
01(Pulse train positionreference)00

00(90°-phase-shift)01(Forward/ Reverse pulse
train and direction signal)02(Forward pulse train andReverse pulse train)00

0.05 to 200.00(kHz)25.00

0.01 to 2.00(s)-100.0 to 100.0(%)

oE-01[Ai4] Filter time constant[Ai4] terminal

input, target function
selection (option)

Code/Name

0.0

ob-15 Pulse train
upper frequency
detectionlevel( option)

ob-16 Pulse train

100.0
0.0 to 100.0(%)

lower frequency
detection level(option)

0.0

・Set when using the option feedback.
・For more detail refer to optional board instruction.

Code/NameoC-01 to oC-28 Reserved

Range(unit)

Initial
value

-

-

oE-03 [Ai4] Start value
oE-04 [Ai4] End value
oE-05 [Ai4] Start rate
oE-06 [Ai4] End rate
oE-07

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

1 to 500(ms)0.00 to 100.00(%)

16
0.00
100.000.0 to [oE-06] (%)

0.0[oE-05] to 100.0(%)

100.0[Ai4] Start point selection

00(Start value[oE-03])01(0%)01

oE-11

1 to 500(ms)16[Ai5] Filter time constant

0.10[Ai5] terminal

ob-10 Pulse train

Range (unit)[Ai6] terminal

Pulse train input(option)Code/Name

P1-AG Optional analog input setting
Initialvalue

oE-13 [Ai5] Start value
oE-14 [Ai5] End value
oE-15 [Ai5] Start rate
oE-16 [Ai5] End rate
oE-17

0.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00
100.000.0 to [oE-16] (%)

0.0[oE-15] to 100.0(%)

100.0[Ai5] Start point selection

00(Start value[oE-13])01(0%)01

oE-21

1 to 500(ms)16[Ai6] Filter time constantoE-23 [Ai6] Start value
oE-24 [Ai6] End value
oE-25 [Ai6] Start rate
oE-26 [Ai6] End rate

-100.00 to 100.00(%)-100.00
100.00-100.0 to [oE-26] (%)-100.0[oE-25] to 100.0(%)

100.0・Regarding the adjustment method of the analog input,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.

P1-AG Optional analog input adjustment.

Code/NameoE-28[Ai4] Voltage/Current bias
adjustment

oE-29[Ai4] Voltage/Current gain
adjustment

oE-30[Ai5] Voltage/Current bias
adjustment

oE-31[Ai5] Voltage/Current gain
adjustment

oE-32[Ai6] Voltage bias adjustment

oE-33[Ai6] Voltage gain adjustment

Range (unit)

Initialvalue-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

0.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

0.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00-100.00 to 100.00(%)

0.00

0.00 to 200.00(%)

100.00・Regarding the adjustment method of the analog input,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.

4-58

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[oE-35] to [oE-49][oE-50] to [oE-70]

P1-AG Window comparators output condition
Code/Name

Range (unit)oE-35[Ai4] Window
limit

Window Comparator[Ai4] Window comparator
hysteresis widthoE-39[Ai5] Window comparator
hysteresis width

0 to 10(%)

oE-42[Ai6] Window comparator
hysteresis widthoE-44

Disconnection/Compare event[Ai4] Temporal operation level set
at disconnection or compare event

oE-45[Ai4] Temporal operation level
implementation timingoE-46[Ai5] Temporal operation level set
at disconnection or compare event

oE-47[Ai5] Temporal operation level
implementation timingoE-48[Ai6] Temporal operation level set
at disconnection or compare event

oE-49[Ai6] Temporal operation level
implementation timing

oE-56

0

100
0 to 100(%)
0

0 to 10(%)

dA-01
100

oE-57 [Ao3] Data type selection

00(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00

oE-58 [Ao3] Bias adjustment-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0

oE-59 [Ao3] Gain adjustment-1000.0 to 1000.0
(%)

100.0

oE-60 Adjustment mode [Ao3]output level-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0

1 to 500(ms)100oE-62 [Ao4] Data type selection

00(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00

oE-63 [Ao4] Bias adjustment-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0

oE-64 [Ao4] Gain adjustment-1000.0 to 1000.0
(%)

100.0

oE-65 Adjustment mode [Ao4]output level-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0

1 to 500(ms)100oE-67 [Ao5] Data type selection

00(Absolute value)01(Signed value)00

oE-68 [Ao5] Bias adjustment-100.0 to 100.0(%)

0.0

oE-69 [Ao5] Gain adjustment-1000.0 to 1000.0
(%)

100.0

oE-70 Adjustment mode [Ao5]output level-100.0 to 100.0(%)

100.0

oE-61

0

100
-100 to 100(%)-100

0 to 10(%)

oE-66

0

[Ao5] Output filter time constant
0 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable: At WC*
is active)
02(Enable: At WC*
is not active)00

0 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable: At WC*
is active)
02(Enable: At WC*
is not active)

00-100 to 100(%)

000(Disable)01(Enable: At WC*
is active)
02(Enable: At WC*
is not active)

00

dA-01

1 to 500(ms)[Ao4] Output filter time constant[Ai6] Window comparator lower
limit

oE-43

Set monitor codeoE-52
[Ao3] Output filter time constantoE-41[Ai6] Window comparator upper
limit[Ao4] Output monitor selection[Ao5] Output monitor selection[Ai5] Window comparator lower
limit

oE-40

oE-51

Initial
value
dA-01

[Ao3] Output monitor selection

0

oE-38
[Ai5] Window comparator upper
limit

Range (unit)oE-50

0 to 100(%)[Ai4] Window comparator lower
limit

oE-37

Code/Name

100

comparator upper

oE-36

P1-AG Optional analog output adjustment

Initialvalue

・Regarding the adjustment mode of the analog output,
please refer to the chapter 3 example of I/O terminals
adjustment.

・Outputs a signal whenever the analog input value is
within or out of range.
・As for disconnection detection, if is within or out ofrange, the operation frequency is limited the setting
value.

4-59

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[oH-01] to [oH-34][oJ-01] to [oJ-40]

P1-EN Optional Ethernet setting
oH-01

Range (unit)
00(Group 1)
01(Group 2)00

00

Communication speed (port-2)00(Auto-negotiation)
01(100M:full duplex)02(100M:half duplex)03(10M:full duplex)
04(10M:half duplex)

oH-04

1 to 65535(×10ms)

3000

502, 1024 to 65535

502

IP-address selection

oH-02
Communication speed (port-1)

oH-03
Ethernet communication timeout

Group A option I/F flexible command
Code/NameGroup A option I/F flexible command registers

Code/Name

Optional Interface
Initial
value

oH-05
Modbus TCP Port No.(IPv4)

oH-06
Modbus TCP Port No.(IPv6)

・For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

P1-PB Optional PROFIBUS setting
Code/Name

oH-20
PROFIBUS Node address

oH-24
PROFIBUS Telegram group selection

Range (unit)

Initial value

0 to 125000(Gr.A)
01(Gr.B)
02(Gr.C)

00

・Refer to option User's Guide for more details.

P1-PN Optional PROFINET setting
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initial value

PROFINET Telegram group selection

00(Gr.A)
01(Gr.B)
02(Gr.C)

00

oH-34

oJ-01 Writing register 1, Gr.A
oJ-02 Writing register 2, Gr.A
oJ-03 Writing register 3, Gr.A
oJ-04 Writing register 4, Gr.A
oJ-05 Writing register 5, Gr.A
oJ-06 Writing register 6, Gr.A
oJ-07 Writing register 7, Gr.A
oJ-08 Writing register 8, Gr.A
oJ-09 Writing register 9, Gr.A
oJ-10 Writing register 10, Gr.A
oJ-11 Reading register 1 Gr.A
oJ-12 Reading register 2 Gr.A
oJ-13 Reading register 3 Gr.A
oJ-14 Reading register 4 Gr.A
oJ-15 Reading register 5 Gr.A
oJ-16 Reading register 6 Gr.A
oJ-17 Reading register 7 Gr.A
oJ-18 Reading register 8 Gr.A
oJ-19 Reading register 9 Gr.A
oJ-20 Reading register 10 Gr.A

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0000 to FFFF

0000

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

0000 to FFFF

0000

Group B option I/F flexible command・Refer to option User's Guide for more details.

Group B option I/F flexible command registers

Code/Name

4-60

oJ-21 Writing register 1, Gr.B
oJ-22 Writing register 2, Gr.B
oJ-23 Writing register 3, Gr.B
oJ-24 Writing register 4, Gr.B
oJ-25 Writing register 5, Gr.B
oJ-26 Writing register 6, Gr.B
oJ-27 Writing register 7, Gr.B
oJ-28 Writing register 8, Gr.B
oJ-29 Writing register 9, Gr.B
oJ-30 Writing register 10, Gr.B
oJ-31 Reading register 1 Gr.B
oJ-32 Reading register 2 Gr.B
oJ-33 Reading register 3 Gr.B
oJ-34 Reading register 4 Gr.B
oJ-35 Reading register 5 Gr.B
oJ-36 Reading register 6 Gr.B
oJ-37 Reading register 7 Gr.B
oJ-38 Reading register 8 Gr.B
oJ-39 Reading register 9 Gr.B
oJ-40 Reading register 10 Gr.B

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[oJ-41] to [oJ-60][oL-01] to [oL-36]

Group C option I/F flexible command
Initialvalue

Code/NameGroup 1 IPv4

oJ-41 Writing register 1, Gr.C
oJ-42 Writing register 2, Gr.C
oJ-43 Writing register 3, Gr.C
oJ-44 Writing register 4, Gr.C
oJ-45 Writing register 5, Gr.C
oJ-46 Writing register 6, Gr.C
oJ-47 Writing register 7, Gr.C
oJ-48 Writing register 8, Gr.C
oJ-49 Writing register 9, Gr.C
oJ-50 Writing register 10, Gr.C
oJ-51 Reading register 1 Gr.C
oJ-52 Reading register 2 Gr.C
oJ-53 Reading register 3 Gr.C
oJ-54 Reading register 4 Gr.C
oJ-55 Reading register 5 Gr.C
oJ-56 Reading register 6 Gr.C
oJ-57 Reading register 7 Gr.C
oJ-58 Reading register 8 Gr.C
oJ-59 Reading register 9 Gr.C
oJ-60 Reading register 10 Gr.C

Range (unit)

0000 to FFFF

0000

Group 1 IPv6

Group C option I/F flexible command registers

Code/Name

・For more information, refer to the user’s guide of thecorresponding option.

oL-01 IPv4 IP address (1) Gr.1
oL-02 IPv4 IP address (2) Gr.1
oL-03 IPv4 IP address (3) Gr.1
oL-04 IPv4 IP address (4) Gr.1
oL-05 IPv4 subnet mask (1) Gr.1
oL-06 IPv4 subnet mask (2) Gr.1
oL-07 IPv4 subnet mask (3) Gr.1
oL-08 IPv4 subnet mask (4) Gr.1
oL-09 IPv4 default gateway (1) Gr.1
oL-10 IPv4 default gateway (2) Gr.1
oL-11 IPv4 default gateway (3) Gr.1
oL-12 IPv4 default gateway (4) Gr.1
oL-20 IPv6 IP address (1) Gr.1
oL-21 IPv6 IP address (2) Gr.1
oL-22 IPv6 IP address (3) Gr.1
oL-23 IPv6 IP address (4) Gr.1
oL-24 IPv6 IP address (5) Gr.1
oL-25 IPv6 IP address (6) Gr.1
oL-26 IPv6 IP address (7) Gr.1
oL-27 IPv6 IP address (8) Gr.1
oL-28 IPv6 Prefix of subnet, Gr.1
oL-29 IPv6 default gateway (1) Gr.1
oL-30 IPv6 default gateway (2) Gr.1
oL-31 IPv6 default gateway (3) Gr.1
oL-32 IPv6 default gateway (4) Gr.1
oL-33 IPv6 default gateway (5) Gr.1
oL-34 IPv6 default gateway (6) Gr.1
oL-35 IPv6 default gateway (7) Gr.1
oL-36 IPv6 default gateway (8) Gr.1

Range
(unit)

Initial
value
192
168
0
2
255

0 to 255

255
255
0
192
168
0
1

0000 to
FFFF

0000

0 to 127640000 to
FFFF

0000

・For more information, refer to the user’s guide of thecorresponding option.

4-61

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[oL-40] to [oL-76]

Group 2 IPv6

Group 2 IPv4

Code/NameoL-40 IPv4 IP-address (1) Gr.2
oL-41 IPv4 IP-address (2) Gr.2
oL-42 IPv4 IP-address (3) Gr.2
oL-43 IPv4 IP-address (4) Gr.2
oL-44 IPv4 subnet mask (1) Gr.2
oL-45 IPv4 subnet mask (2) Gr.2
oL-46 IPv4 subnet mask (3) Gr.2
oL-47 IPv4 subnet mask (4) Gr.2
oL-48 IPv4 default gateway (1) Gr.2
oL-49 IPv4 default gateway (2) Gr.2
oL-50 IPv4 default gateway (3) Gr.2
oL-51 IPv4 default gateway (4) Gr.2
oL-60 IPv6 IP address (1) Gr.2
oL-61 IPv6 IP address (2) Gr.2
oL-62 IPv6 IP address (3) Gr.2
oL-63 IPv6 IP address (4) Gr.2
oL-64 IPv6 IP address (5) Gr.2
oL-65 IPv6 IP address (6) Gr.2
oL-66 IPv6 IP address (7) Gr.2
oL-67 IPv6 IP address (8) Gr.2
oL-68 IPv6 Prefix of subnet, Gr.2
oL-69 IPv6 default gateway (1) Gr.2
oL-70 IPv6 default gateway (2) Gr.2
oL-71 IPv6 default gateway (3) Gr.2
oL-72 IPv6 default gateway (4) Gr.2
oL-73 IPv6 default gateway (5) Gr.2
oL-74 IPv6 default gateway (6) Gr.2
oL-75 IPv6 default gateway (7) Gr.2
oL-76 IPv6 default gateway (8) Gr.2

Range (unit)

Initial
value
192
168
0
2
255

0 to 255

255
255
0
192
168
0
1

0000 to FFFF

0000

0 to 127640000 to FFFF

0000

・For more information, refer to the user’s guide of thecorresponding option.

4-62

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[PA-01] to [PA-05][PA-20] to [PA-31]■Parameter mode (P code：Special Function)

Simulation mode settings

Em-force mode settings
Code/Name

Em-force mode

PA-01
Enable Emergency-force
drive mode

PA-02
Emergency-force drive
frequency reference

PA-03
Emergency-force drive
direction command

Bypassd

PA-04
Commercial power supply
bypass function selection

PA-05
Bypass function delay time

Code/Name
Range (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)01(Enable)00

0.00 to 590.00(Hz)＊0.00

00(Forward)
01(Reverse)00

00(Disable)01(Enable)

00

0.0 to 1000.0(s)5.0＊The actual setting range depends on the maximum frequency
setting ([Hb105/205] [Hd105/205])

・Settings for EM-force mode in case of abnormality.
For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

PA-20 Simulation
mode enable00(Disable)01(Enable)

00

PA-21 Error code
selection for alarm test

0 to 255

0PA-22 Simulation
mode: Optional output
selection for the output
current monitor

00(Disable)
01(Parameter[PA-23])
02(Setting by terminal [VRF])
03(Setting by terminal [IRF])
04(Setting by terminal [VF2])
05(Setting by terminal [Ai4])
06(Setting by terminal [Ai5])07(Setting by terminal [Ai6])

01

PA-23 Optional
output value setting forthe output current
monitor

0.0 to Rated current
× 3.0(A)

0.0

PA-24 Simulation
mode: Optional output
selection for the DC bus
voltage monitor

00(Disable)
01(Parameter[PA-25])
02(Setting by terminal [VRF])
03(Setting by terminal [IRF])
04(Setting by terminal [VF2])
05(Setting by terminal [Ai4])
06(Setting by terminal [Ai5])07(Setting by terminal [Ai6])

01

PA-25 Optional
output value setting forthe DC bus voltage
monitor

200V Class : 0.0 to 450.0(Vdc)
400V Class : 0.0 to 900.0(Vdc)

200V:
270.0
400V:
540.0

PA-26 Simulation
mode: Optional output
selection for the output
voltage monitor

00(Disable)
01(Parameter[PA-27])
02(Setting by terminal [VRF])
03(Setting by terminal [IRF])
04(Setting by terminal [VF2])
05(Setting by terminal [Ai4])
06(Setting by terminal [Ai5])07(Setting by terminal [Ai6])

01

PA-27 Optional
output value setting forthe output voltage
monitor

200V Class : 0.0 to 300.0(V)400V Class : 0.0 to 600.0(V)0.0

PA-28 Simulation
mode: Optional output
selection for the output
torque monitor

00(Disable)
01(Parameter[PA-29])
02(Setting by terminal [VRF])
03(Setting by terminal [IRF])
04(Setting by terminal [VF2])
05(Setting by terminal [Ai4])
06(Setting by terminal [Ai5])07(Setting by terminal [Ai6])

01

PA-29 Optional
output value setting forthe output torquemonitor-500.0 to 500.0(%)

0.0PA-30 Simulation
mode: Optionalfrequency matching startenable setting

00(Disable)
01(Parameter[PA-31])
02(Setting by terminal [VRF])
03(Setting by terminal [IRF])
04(Setting by terminal [VF2])
05(Setting by terminal [Ai4])
06(Setting by terminal [Ai5])07(Setting by terminal [Ai6])01

0.0 to 590.0(Hz)0.0

PA-31 Optionalfrequency matching startsetting value

・Settings for the simulation mode functions.
For more information, refer to the user’s guide.

4-63

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[UA-01] to [UA-19][UA-20] to [UA-62]■Parameter mode (U code：Set-up, PDN)

Password setting

Keypad communication lost operation

Code/Name

UA-01 Password for display
UA-02 Password for soft lockRange (unit)

Initial value

0000 to FFFF

0000

UA-20 Action
selection at keypad
disconnection

・When using the password, display and parametersettings are locked.
・The inverter will be locked by password when setting
any value other than 0000. The password can becancelled by entering the set password. Please note
that, the restrictions will not be cancelled if you forgetthe password.
Range (unit)

UA-10 Display
restriction selection

00(Full display)01(Function-specific display)
02(User setting)03(Data comparison display)04(Monitor only)

parameter display
selection

UA-22 Option

Initial value

00

00

UA-13 Display gain for theaccumulated input power monitor

1 to 1000

1

UA-14 Accumulated output
power monitor clear

00(Disable)01(Clear)00

UA-15 Display gain for theaccumulated output power monitor

1 to 1000

1

Software lock operation settings

UA-17 Soft-Locktarget selection

Initialvalue

Range (unit)
00([SFT] terminal)01(Always enable)00

00(All data)01(All, except speed related values )・Sets the software lock operation.

Keypad copy function restriction
Code/Name

UA-18
Data R/W selection

Range (unit)

Initial value00(Enable R/W by operator)
01(Disable R/W by operator)

00

・Restricts the copy function(Read/Write).

Keypad low battery warning
Code/Name

UA-19 Low battery
warning enable

Range (unit)
00(Disable)
01(Warning)/02(Error)00(Hidden)01(Display)00

User-parameter setting function

・If [KHC] terminal is ON, the accumulated input power
can be clear.
・If [OKHC] terminal is ON, the accumulated output power
can be clear.

Soft-Lock selection

Initialvalue

・If options and 2nd-motor related parameters are notrequired to be displayed, it is recommended to hidethem. For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

Initial value

00(Disable)01(Clear)

UA-16

Range (unit)

parameter display
selection

UA-12 Accumulated input powermonitor clear

Code/Name

02

UA-21 2nd-motor

Accumulated power display adjustment/clear
Range (unit)

00(Error)01(Error after deceleration stop)02(Ignore)/03(Free run stop)
04(Deceleration stop)

Code/Name

・Limit the displayed contents of the keypad.
・For more information, refer to the User’s guide.
Code/Name

Initialvalue

Keypad display mode

Display mode of keypad
Code/Name

Range (unit)

Code/Name

Initial value
00

・Sets the behaviour when the battery in the keypad is
low.

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

UA-30 User-parameter auto setting
function enable
UA-31 User-parameter 1 selection
UA-32 User-parameter 2 selection
UA-33 User-parameter 3 selection
UA-34 User-parameter 4 selection
UA-35 User-parameter 5 selection
UA-36 User-parameter 6 selection
UA-37 User-parameter 7 selection
UA-38 User-parameter 8 selection
UA-39 User-parameter 9 selection
UA-40 User-parameter 10 selection
UA-41 User-parameter 11 selection
UA-42 User-parameter 12 selection
UA-43 User-parameter 13 selection
UA-44 User-parameter 14 selection
UA-45 User-parameter 15 selection
UA-46 User-parameter 16 selection
UA-47 User-parameter 17 selection
UA-48 User-parameter 18 selection
UA-49 User-parameter 19 selection
UA-50 User-parameter 20 selection
UA-51 User-parameter 21 selection
UA-52 User-parameter 22 selection
UA-53 User-parameter 23 selection
UA-54 User-parameter 24 selection
UA-55 User-parameter 25 selection
UA-56 User-parameter 26 selection
UA-57 User-parameter 27 selection
UA-58 User-parameter 28 selection
UA-59 User-parameter 29 selection
UA-60 User-parameter 30 selection
UA-61 User-parameter 31 selection
UA-62 User-parameter 32 selection

00(Disable)01(Enable)

00no(parameter)no・Sets the data displayed when [UA-10]=02.

4-64

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[UA-90] to [UA-94][Ub-01] to [Ub-05] [UC-01][Ud-01] to [Ud-37]
Trace function
Code/Name

Code/Name

UA-90 to 94

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

Ud-01 Trace function enable-

Reserved

Ud-02 Trace startRange (unit)

Initialvalue

00(Disable)01(Enable)00(Stop)01(Start)00

0 to 81

Ud-03
Number of trace data setting

Initialize
Code/Name

Ub-01
Initialize mode selection

Ub-02
Initialize data selection

Ub-03
Load type selection

Ub-05
Enable initialization

Ud-04

Initialvalue

Range (unit)

Number of trace signals setting

Ud-10 Trace data 0 selection
Ud-11 Trace data 1 selection
Ud-12 Trace data 2 selection
Ud-13 Trace data 3 selection
Ud-14 Trace data 4 selection
Ud-15 Trace data 5 selection
Ud-16 Trace data 6 selection
Ud-17 Trace data 7 selection
Ud-20 Trace signal 000(Disable)
01(Error history clear)
02(Data initialize)
03(Error history clear & Data
initialize)
04(Reserved)05(All data except terminal
configuration)
06(All data except communication
configuration)07(All data except terminal &communication configuration)
08(Reserved)00

00(Mode 0)00

input/output selection

00(Very Low Duty)
01(Low Duty)
02(Normal Duty)

02

Ud-21 Trace signal 0 input
terminal selection

00(Disable)01(Execute initialization)00

Ud-22 Trace signal 0 output
terminal selection

Ud-23 Trace signal 1(Do not change)(00)

Same as [CA-01]
001
Same as [CC-01]

Same as [CA-01]

Ud-26 Trace signal 2

UC-01 (-)

00

Ud-24 Trace signal 1 input

Factory settings
Initial value

00(Input:[Ud-21])
01(Output:[Ud-22])00(Input:[Ud-24])
01(Output:[Ud-25])

terminal selection

Range (unit)

dA-01

input/output selection

・How to initialize; at first select the initial mode at[Ub-01], next, when [Ub-05] is set to1, initialize process
is start.
・Once setting the load type selection [Ub-03],will change
instantaneously the inverter load rating.
Code/Name

All the parameters ofthe monitor modeterminal selection

Ud-25 Trace signal 1 output

001
Same as [CC-01]

input/output selection

00(Input:[Ud-27])
01(Output:[Ud-28])

Ud-27 Trace signal 2 input

Same as [CA-01]

terminal selection

Ud-28 Trace signal 2 output
terminal selection

Ud-29 Trace signal 300100(Input:[Ud-30])
01(Output:[Ud-31])

Ud-30 Trace signal 3 input

Same as [CA-01]

Ud-31 Trace signal 3 output
terminal selection

Ud-32 Trace signal 400100(Input:[Ud-33])
01(Output:[Ud-34])

Ud-33 Trace signal 4 input

Same as [CA-01]

Ud-34 Trace signal 4 output
terminal selection

Ud-35 Trace signal 500100(Input:[Ud-36])
01(Output:[Ud-37])

Ud-36 Trace signal 5 input

Same as [CA-01]

Ud-37 Trace signal 5 output
terminal selection

4-65

00

Same as [CC-01]

input/output selection
terminal selection

00

Same as [CC-01]

input/output selection
terminal selection

00

Same as [CC-01]

input/output selection
terminal selection

00

00

001
Same as [CC-01]

Parameter setting

Chapter 4[Ud-38] to [Ud-60][Unit table]

Code/Name

Range (unit)

Initialvalue

Ud-38 Trace signal 600 (Input: [Ud-39])
01 (Output: [Ud-40])00

input/output selection

Ud-39 Trace signal 6 input
terminal selection
Ud-40 Trace signal 6 output
terminal selection

Similar to [CA-01]
001
Similar to [CC-01]

Ud-41 Trace signal 7
input/output selection

00 (Input: [Ud-42])
01 (Output: [Ud-43])

Ud-42 Trace signal 7 input
terminal selection

Similar to [CA-01]

Ud-43 Trace signal 7 output
terminal selection

00

001
Similar to [CC-01]

Ud-50

＊

00

00(Action at rising above
the trigger level)01(Action at falling below
the trigger level)00

Ud-52 Trigger 1 level setting
at trace data trigger

0 to 100(%)

0

Ud-53 Trigger 1 activation
selection at trace signal trigger

00(Action by signal on)
01(Action by signal off)

00

＊

00

00(Action at rising above
the trigger level)01(Action at falling below
the trigger level)00

Ud-56 Trigger 2 level setting
at trace data trigger

0 to 100(%)

0

Ud-57 Trigger 2 activation
selection at trace signal trigger

00(Action by signal on)
01(Action by signal off)00

00(At trace trigger 1
activation)01(At trace trigger 2
activation)
02(Trigger-1 OR trigger-2
activation)
03(Trigger-1
AND
trigger-2 activation)00

0 to 100(%)

001(0.2ms)
02(0.5ms)
03(1ms)04(2ms)05(5ms)06(10ms)
07(50ms)
08(100ms)
09(500ms)
10(1000ms)

03

Trace trigger 1 selection

Ud-51 Trigger 1 activation
selection at trace data trigger

Ud-54
Trace trigger 2 selection

Ud-55 Trigger 2 activation
selection at trace data trigger

Ud-58
Trigger condition selection

Ud-59
Trigger point setting

Ud-60
Sampling time setting＊ 00(Trip)/01(Data 0)/02(Data 1)/03(Data 2)/04(Data 3)05(Data 4)/06(Data 5)/07(Data 6)/08(Data 7)09(Signal 0)/10(Signal 1)/11(Signal 2)/12(Signal 3)13(Signal 4)/14(Signal 5)/15(Signal 6)/16(Signal 7)

・Trace function settings.
For more information, refer to the User’s guide.

4-66

Number

Unit

Number

Unit

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Non
%
A
Hz
V
kW
W
hr
S
kHz
ohm
mA
ms
P
kgm2
pls
mH
Vdc
°C
kWh
mF
mVs/rad
Nm
min-1
m/s
m/min
m/h
ft/s
ft/min
ft/h
m

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

cm
°F
l/s
l/min
l/h
m3/s
m3/minm3/h
kg/s
kg/min
kg/h
t/min
t/h
gal/s
gal/min
gal/h
ft3/s
ft3/min
ft3/hlb/s
lb/min
lb/h
mbar
bar
Pa
kPa
PSI
mm

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Error events
Next are the descriptions of the basic errors that may occur. For more information, refer to the user’s guide.
■Trip event screen

Occurring trip
Motor overload error

The error code (E005 as example) is
explained further ahead.
With the ▼ key, you can scroll thescreen.
For more information, refer to theuser’s guide.

E005 19/12/24
Output frequency
Output current
DC voltage
Status 1

Statuses at which the trip event may
have happened.

TRIP
Error name
Error code
Stores the inverter
status of trip timing

Back

M1

NRDY

oFR

H07

22:10
: 50Hz: 49.71A: 274.1Vdc
: Run
----

46.49 Hz

Trip information details screen

State 1: Operation
State 2: Accel/Decel
State 3: Control
State 4: Limited
State 5: Special■Error events
Code

E001

Details
・By the load and the operating
conditions, overcurrent has
occurred.

E005
E039

・By the load and the operating
conditions, current has
increased.

E006

・Braking resistor use is limited.

E007・Internal voltage has increased
・Insufficient capacity of theinverter.

Corrective actions

Related parameter・If the acceleration is fast, increase the acceleration time.

[AC120]・Use the overcurrent suppression function.

[bA120]・Use the overload restriction function.

[bA122]・Use the overcurrent retry function.

[bb-22]・In order to stabilize the control, Try auto-tuning.

[HA-01]

・If the acceleration is fast, increase the acceleration time.

[AC120]・Use the overload restriction function.

[bA122]

・If the motor sound is abnormal, in order to stabilize thecontrol, adjust the constant by trying auto-tuning.
・If the deceleration is fast, increase the deceleration time.

[AC122]・Reselection of the braking resistor is necessary.

[bA-60]・If the deceleration is fast, increase the deceleration time.
・Use the overvoltage suppression functions.
・Use the overvoltage retry function.

・Main CPU abnormality

E009

・Main circuit supply has drop.

[AC122][bA140] [bA146][bb-23]・Use the regenerative braking option.
・Carry out counter measures for the inverter noise.

E008
E011

[HA-01]

・If it occurs consecutively, there is a possibility of inverter
failure.

-・To disable the under-voltage error, change setting.

[bb-27]・Use the under-voltage retry function.

[bb-21]・Carry out counter measures for the inverter noise.
E010

・Current detector abnormality

E012

・[ES] input terminal is ON.

E013

・While the [USP] terminal was
ON and the operation commandis input state, the main power
supply was turned ON.

・If it occurs consecutively, there is a possibility of inverter
failure, and parts replacement might be required.
・Check the signal status of the input terminal
・Check if there are no operations by communication.
・Make sure that an operation command is not introduced at
the time of turning ON the inverter.

5-1[dA-51][dA-51]

Chapter 5
Code
E014
E015

E016

Troubleshooting
Details・Ground fault is detected at main
power supply turned ON.
・The main power supply voltage
has been continuously above thelimit.
・The control circuit power source
was off due to instantaneous
power failure.

E019

・Abnormality in temperaturedetector circuit.

E020

・Because of cooling-fan life span,internal temperature has raised.

Corrective actions
・Check for ground fault of the motor, wiring, etc.

[dA-40]・If avoiding this trip is required, use the power loss retryfunction.

[bb-20]・Carry out counter measures for the inverter noise.
・If it occurs consecutively, there is a possibility of inverter
failure.
・Changing the cooling-fan is necessary.
・Lower the carrier frequency.
・Lower the carrier frequency.

[bb101]・Internal temperature has
increased.

E024

・Disconnection of the wiring inthe supply side has occurred.

・Check the fastening of the input wiring with screws.
・Check that the 3 phases are correctly inserted.

・Sudden increase of current

・Verify if a ground fault or a cable disconnection/rupture
has occurred at the output wiring.(possible short circuit)・Check that the motor is not locked.

・Disconnection of the wiring in
the motor side has occurred.

・Check the output wiring disconnection, motor insulation
failure, …etc.
・Check that the 3 phases are correctly connected.

・Abnormal motor temperature
E035
・Thermistor abnormality

E036

・Brake abnormality

E038

・Increase of current during slow
speed operation

E040

・Keypad disconnection error

E041

・RS485 communication error

E042
E043
〜
E045
E050
〜
E059
E060
〜
E089
E090
〜
E093

・RTC error-[bb101]
-

E021

E034

-

・Review the power circumstances, such as the power
supply capacity.

・Requires a review of the installation circumstances.

E030

Related parameter-・Improve the motor cooling circumstances.
・Use the overload restriction function.
・Check if the thermistor is damaged.

[bA122]-・Check the thermistor settings.

[Cb-40]・Check if the brake is damaged and if the wiring for the[BOK] signal is disconnected.
・Check the brake waiting time.
・If torque is needed during slow speed, a review of theinverter capacity is necessary.
・Check for the disconnection of the keypad from theinverter.
・Noise counter-measures are necessary
・Noise counter-measures are necessary
・Check the communication setting[dA-51][AF134] [AF141][UA-20][CF-01]

・Battery replacement for the panel is necessary

・Reserved-

・There is an error in the option.

・For more information, please refer to each option inuser’s guide.

・There is an error in the STO path.

・For more information, please refer to the P1 functionalsafety guide.

＊For others errors not shown above, refer to the user’s guide.
■Warning events＊Regarding the warnings, please refer to the user’s guide. Fixing the parameter details shown in the panel screen may
cancel the warning.

5-2

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting

5.2 Confirming the status■Frequently asked questions – FAQ (simplified edition)(A) Main operation status
Display
RUN,FR
RUN,RR
RUN,0Hz
TRIP
WARN

STOP
(red)

STOP
(white)Details of display

Description
While in forward operation
While in reverse operation
While output operation is 0Hz.
Even for DB, FOC and SON functions.
Displays the trip status.
When a conflict in the setting happens.
This sign is indicated when run- command is given to
the forced to stop due to the other functions.
・In an operation that is not controlled from thepanel, but is stopped with the panel.
・In a non-stop operation.
・An operation is stopped with a terminal function.
While stopped, in absence of RUN command or if
frequency reference is 0Hz.

(A)

(B)

<a> <b><h> <g><c> <d><f> <e>

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

・If STOP(in red),⇒ Displayed in (F): if the reference frequency it is 0.00Hz, make sure that the frequency reference has been inputted.
⇒ For example; if it is being driven by the [FR] terminal, and then stopped with the stop key, inverter will not start again
the operation unless the [FR] terminal turns off and on again (re-arm).
⇒ When [RST, [MBS] or STO terminals are in ON state it won’t operate.

(B) Warning status
No.

Display

1

LIM

2

ALT

3

RETRY

4

NRDY

5
6
7
8

FAN
C
F/C
(None)

Description
While:
・Overload restriction
・Overcurrent suppression
・Overvoltage suppression
・Jump frequency limited
・minimum frequency limited
・Upper or lower frequency limited
・Torque limiting
Details can be confirmed in [dC-37].
If displays the following functions:・Overload warning
・Inverter thermal warning・Motor heat warning・Motor thermal warning
Details can be confirmed in [dC-38].
While waiting for retry or restart functions.
Details can be confirmed in [dC-39].
While inverter is in a state unfit to operate, even if a RUN command is issued.
・Main power under voltage
・Operating only with 24V supply
・Resetting・[REN] terminal is enabled and OFF.
Details can be confirmed in [dC-40].
Cooling-fan life warning is issued.
Capacitor life warning is issued.
When both Capacitor and Cooling-fan life warnings are issued.
Different statuses from those shown above.

・LIM and ALT are indicated when current and internal voltage has risen. Review things such as the load if this error
happens too often.
・Above icons are indicated when cooling-fan and smoothing capacitor lifespan has reached to the end.

5-3

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting(E) Panel’s RUN key function
No.
1
2
3
4
5

Display
oFR
oRR
>FR
>RR
(None)

Description
Forward operation from panel’s RUN key.
Reverse operation from panel’s RUN key.
Forced forward operation.
Forced reverse operation.
Different operation (other than RUN).

・Displayed if the panel RUN key is activated.
・Review AA111 if is not displayed and want to use the panel for RUN operation.

<a> Power supply status
Number1
2
3

Display(None)CTRL
24V

Description
Main and control power is supplied.
Control supply is connected.
Only P+/P- 24V supply is connected.

・Displays the status of the supply.
If CTRL or 24V is displayed means that is in a state where there is not a main power source plugged and cannot
operate. Check the supply.

<b> SET function status
Number
1
2

Display
M1
M2

Description
When [SET] terminal is not assigned or is assigned but in OFF state (1st-motor is enabled).
[SET] terminal is assigned and in ON state (2nd-motor is enabled).

・When the [SET] terminal is not being used, M1 is displayed. If the centre character of the parameter is “-”([AC-01]) or“1”([AA111]) it becomes enabled, if it is “2” (such as [AA211]), it will be ignored.

<c> Parameter display
Number1
2
3
45

Display(None)
UTL
USR
CMP
MON

Description
Display all modes
Individual function display mode
User’s settings display mode
Data comparator display mode
Only monitor display mode・Is displayed if it operating under a display limiting function. Change the setting of [UA-10] in the case that theparameters are not being displayed.

<d> Monitor screen number
・Each screen displayed has a number. When contacting to us, make reference to the screens with its number.

(e) Functional safety・If there is a display, will be shut off. For functional safety display, refers to safety instruction.

<f> Control mode
Number1
2
3

Display(None)TRQ
POS

Description
Speed control mode.
Torque control mode.
Position control mode.

・Displays the operation control mode.

<g> Reserved<h> Special functions
・In the case it is displayed, means that the inverter entered in a special state. For more information, refer to the user’s
guide.

5-4

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting

5.3 Possible errors and solutions
If the corrective action does not solve the problem, refer to the user's guide where there are more detailed descriptions.
Event ▶

Screen is not
displayed evenwhen POWER Led
is illuminated.

After issuing a
RUN command,the motor does
not start.

Estimated cause ▶

Corrective action

・Keypad in idle mode・Press a key of the Keypad and the screen will be displayed.

・Keypad has been detached.

・Recover and reinsert the keypad.

・Trip has occurred.

・If an error causes a trip, the cause of the trip will have tobe removed before resetting.

・A warning came up.

・In a warning event is necessary to resolve any data
inconsistency.

・Command function not
introduced

・Check that the RUN command [AA111] and the reference(terminal, keypad, etc.) are correct.

・Speed source not introduced.

・Check that the main speed source [AA101] and thereference (terminal, panel, etc.) are correct.

・Activate a stop function.

・Check if functional safety terminals and [RST]/[MBS]terminals are not enabled through the terminal status[dA-51].

・Motor is restricted/locked.

・Check if there is a braking operation or something inhibiting
the motor (Like something clogged).

・Wiring is disconnected.

・Check that there are not disconnected cables in the output
to the motor and in the internal side.

Cannot change
settings.

・Inverter is in running.

・There are parameters that cannot be modified whilerunning, please refer to the parameter list.

Motor rotates inreverse.

・Wrong wiring order of the
motor phases

・Rotation is reversed by replacing two phases of the motor.

Motor/machinerysound is loud.

・Carrier frequency setting islow.

・Set higher carrier frequency [bb101], however, that may
increase the generated noise or leakage current, so output
current derating is required for some models.

5-5Chapter 5

Event ▶

Troubleshooting
Estimated cause ▶

Corrective action
・If output current is high, the overload restriction function

・Overload restriction function isin operation.

[bA122] lowers the frequency. To increase the acceleration
time [AC120], it is necessary to suppress the current
increase.

・Frequency is being limited.

・The upper limit [bA102] setting may be low, and it should
be increased. The frequency limiting does not make use of
the maximum frequency, but the upper limit function.

・Frequency command value islow.

・Increase the frequency command or cancel any other highpriority frequency command such as jogging or
multi-speed.

・Acceleration time is long.

・Acceleration time [AC120] setting is long, so will accelerate
really slowly. Shorten gradually the acceleration time.

・Several parameters are notadequately set.

・Check for the motor basic parameters.

・Big variation in the load

・Review the power capacity of both the inverter and motor.

・Supply voltage fluctuates.

・To keep to a minimum the supply fluctuations, by using an
optional AC reactor, DC choke or and input filter,
improvement is possible.

・V/f control is selected.

・Can switch in [AA121] to torque boost, sensor less vector
control, … etc.

・It is being used for lift down
application.

・If the torque in the regenerative operation is not enough,Use a braking resistor or regenerative braking unit.

・Very heavy load

・Review the capacity of both the inverter and motor.

In operation thecircuit breaker gets
activated.

・Large leakage current

・Lower the carrier frequency [bb101].
・Increase the sensitivity current of the earth leakage
breaker or replace it with a high sensitivity current.

Noise interfereswith the TVs andradios nearby the
inverter.

・Irradiated noise from theinverter・If possible, separate the wiring from the TV and radio.
・Put a zero-phase reactor either in the main supply input orin the output of the inverter.

Motor speed does
not increase.

Output frequency
is unstable.

Low torque or
Torque stall

5-6

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance
Read this before performing any inspection or maintenance!
There is risk of electric shock!
・Before an inspection the supply power must to be cut off, and then wait at least 10 minutes(*1) or 15 minutes(*2)
before proceeding.
(Make sure that the charge lamp in the inverter is off. Furthermore, measure the voltage between the P and N
terminals and make sure that the voltage is less than 45V)
*1) For models HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022 and HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-022*2) For models HF4322-030 to HF4322-055 and HF4324-030 to HF4324-055

6.1 Inspection and maintenance notes
6.1.1 Daily inspection
Check and confirm for the following abnormalities while the inverter is operating:No.
Details
✓
1
2
3
4
5
6

Motor operates as per settings
No abnormalities in the environment
Cooling-system running normally
Abnormal vibration or noise
Discolouration and superheating
Unusual odour

□
□
□
□
□
□

While operating, check the inverter input voltage using a multi-meter or a similar tool to confirm:
No.
Details✓12

Voltage supply fluctuation
Line-to-line voltage balance□□

6.1.2 Regarding the functional safety
The contents related to the functional safety are listed in the attachment [Functional safety guide].
・Other than the designated person, do not perform any maintenance, inspection or component replacement.
(Before starting to operate, remove any wristwatch or metal accessories, and use always isolated tools.)

6.1.3 Cleaning
Keep the inverter in a clean condition.
No.
1
2
3

Details

When cleaning the inverter, use a soft cloth soaked in neutral detergent to gently wipe up the dirtiedparts.
Do not use solvents like acetone, benzene, toluene or alcohol to clean the inverter, as it can melt its
surface or peel off the coating.
For the display of the panel do not use detergent or alcohol to clean it.

✓
□
□
□

6.1.4 Periodic inspection
Check the parts that are only accessible while the inverter is stopped.
The periodic inspection is a vital point that has to be carried out, for any periodic inspection.
No.
Details12
3
45Check for abnormalities in cooling system.
・Heat sink cleaning, etc.
Check the fastening and tighten.
・By the effects of oscillations, thermal expansion, etc., the screws and bolts may become loose, proceed
to tighten after confirming.
Check that there is no damage or corrosion to the conductors and insulators.
Measurement of the dielectric breakdown voltage of insulators
Check and replacement of cooling-fan, smoothing capacitator and relay in main circuit.

6-1

✓
□
□
□
□
□

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

6.2 Daily and periodic inspections
Inspected
part

Inspection
entry

Details of inspection

Inspection cycle
Every
Daily 12
year years

Inspection method

Criterion

Tester device

Ambient temperature, level ofhumidity are withing the range.
No frozen part. No condensation.
Without abnormalities

Thermometer
Hygrometer
Data logger-

Surrounding Check the ambient temperature, level
environment of humidity, dust, … etc.

○

Refer to the installation guide.

General Whole inverter Check abnormal vibrations or noises.

○

Power supply Check that the main circuit voltage isvoltagenormal.

○Check visually and auditorily.
Measure the line-to-line voltage
Within the AC voltageof the inverter main circuit
permissible variation.
terminals R,S and T.
Remove the inverter main
circuit terminals input/output
wiring and the control terminal
board, and remove the jumper
for the internal filter, after that, Resistance no less than 5MΩ
shortcircuit the terminals
R,S,T,U,V,W,P,P1,N,PR,r1,t1,
and measure between thisshortcircuit and the ground.
Confirm tighten of fasteners.

(1)Check the resistance between themain circuit and the ground terminals.

○(2)Check looseness in fastened parts.
(3)Check for overheating traces.
Conductor and (1)Check for straining in conductors.
cables(2)Check for cable coating damage.
Terminal block Check for any damage.

○
○
○
○
○

General check

Main
circuitInverter andconverter
circuits(Including
resistors)

Smoothingcapacitor

Relay

Controlandprotection
circuits

CoolingsystemOperation
check

Cooling-fan○(2)Check that the relief valve does not
swells or protudes.

○

Heat sink
Display

Meter

Check visually.

That there are no abnormalities
Estimated number life span
before exchanging component:
10 years.
*1) *3) *4)

Capacitance
meter

○
○

Check auditorily.
Check visually.

That there are no abnormalities.

○

Measure the voltage between
the U,V,W terminals of theinverter main circuit.

Phase-to-phase voltage balance
200V class: within 4V
400V class: within 8V

Check for obstructions/clogging.
(1) Check if the charge lamp LED and the
Keypad’s LEDs and LCD light up.

Simulate a shortcircuit or openof the inverter output
protection circuit.
Turn by hand while electricity is
not being supplied.

○
○
○

○

Check that Indicated values are normal.

○(1)Check abnormal vibrations or noises.

○(2)Check that there is no odour.

○

Motor
Insulation
resistance

Follow the

Check the resistance between the main
installed motor
circuit and the ground terminals.

instructions

Digitalmultimeter
Voltmeter
Ammeter-Check visually.
Check visually.

Confirm they light up.

-

With cleaning rag

Voltmeter
Regulation and control value are
Ammetersatisfactory.
Etc.

Check the meter readings on
the panel.

GeneralAn error must be detectedaccording to the sequence.

-

Smooth operation without
abnomalities.
Replace every: 10 years.
*2) *3) *5)
That there are not obstructions.

Check visually.

○(2)Display cleaning

Display

Analogmultimeter○(2)Check for loose joints.

-

Refer the “6.5 Method ofchecking the inverter/converter
circuits”. The inverter, capacitor
and thyristor lifespan before
replacing the componentes is of
106 start/stop cycles. *3)○(1)Check for capacitor fluid leakage.

Without abnormalities

DC 500V class
Ohmmeter(megger®)

Remove the inverter main
circuit terminal wiring, andmeasure the following:- Resistance between terminals
RST and PN.
- Resistance between terminals
UVW and PN

Check the resistance between all theterminals.

(1)No chatter sound while operating.
(2)Check contacts for damage.
(1) While performing a unit operation of
the inverter, check the balance of theoutput voltage among the individual
phases.
(2)Carry out a sequential protection test,
and check the protective and display
circuits for any abnormality.
(1) Check for abnormal vibrations or
noises.

Check visually.

Digitalmultimeter

Check visually,auditorily, and bytouch.
Without abnorma-lities
Check for abnormal
superheating, damages an soon.
Detach the U,V,W terminals
from the inverter main circuit,and shortcircuit the motor
No less than 5MΩ
wiring, mesure with the
Megger® between the motor
wiring and ground terminal.

-

DC 500V class
Ohmmeter(megger®)*1) The life span of the smoothing capacitor is influenced by the ambient temperature. Refer to [Smoothing capacitor life span curve] for replacing
measures.
*2) The life span of the cooling-fan is influenced by the ambient temperature, the dirt and the change in its environmental conditions. Check thesecircumstances on the usual inspection.
*3) The estimated time before replacement (Number of years/cycle) and the [Smoothing capacitor life span curve] are based on the design lifespan, notguaranteed.
*4) In the case that the capacitors are replaced after that the storage period of 3 years has expired, before the first use please refer to the aging process
under the following conditions:・First, apply for 1 hour the 80% of the capacitor rated voltage at ambient temperature
・Then, raise the voltage to 90%, and keep it for 1 more hour.
・Finally, apply for 5 hours the rated voltage at ambient temperature*5) In the case that the cooling-fan if affected by dust, obstructing it; remove the dust, after that may take 5 to 10 seconds to start again.

6-2

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

6.3 Insulation resistance test
・When testing an external circuit with a megger, disconnect all the external circuit cables from the inverter to prevent itfrom being exposed to the test voltage.
・In the control circuit carry out a conduction test, use a multi-meter (with high resistance range), do not use a megger®
or buzzer /continuity tester.
・The insulation resistance test of the inverter itself is carried out only at the main circuit, do not perform an insulation
resistance test in the control circuit.
・It is recommended the use of a DC500V megger® for the insulation resistance test.
・Before the main circuit test with a megger, remove the jumper for switching the inverter's internal filter function, andthen connect terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, P, P1, N, PR, r1, and t1 by wires as shown in the figure below. Subsequently,
carry out the test.
・After the test using the megger, remove the wires from terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, P, P1, N, PR, r1, and t1, and connect
the jumper for switching the inverter's internal filter function at the original position.
・Furthermore, depending on the model, the PR terminal may not be present.
Please confirm in “Chapter 7 Specifications”.

R
Power
Supply

P1

N

PR

r1

Motor
U
V

S
T

Do not connect
into power supplyP

Groundterminal

Groundterminal

M

W
Do not connect the motor

t1
DC500V Megger®

Make sure to disable the EMC filter or remove the filter jumper before testing.

6.4 Dielectric withstand test
Do not carry out a withstand voltage test for the inverter.
The test may damage its internal parts, deteriorating the inverter.

6-3

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

6.5 Checking method for Inverter/Converter
・Using the multi-meter, you can check if the inverter or converter unit are defective or non-defective.
(Preparation)① Remove the supply (R,S,T) and motor wiring (U,V,W), and also the regenerative braking resistor(P,PR).
② Prepare the multi-meter. (Application measurement range is 1Ω)(Checking method)
・Measure and check the current conduction at each of the inverter main circuit terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, PR, P, N, bychanging the polarity of the multi-meter alternately.
*1) Before checking the circuits, measure the voltage across terminals P and N with the multi-meter in DC voltage range
mode to confirm that the smoothing capacitor has been fully discharged.
*2) When not conducting, it shows an infinite value. Due to the influence of the smoothing capacitor, it may show
momentarily any other value other than infinite. When the measured terminal is conductive, the tester reading isseveral ohms to several tens of ohms. The measurements with different multi-meters may not match exactly, but aslong the values are close between them, it is acceptable.
*3) The chopper braking circuit is built-in in the models below:
HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-022
HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-037

Converter circuit

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
TR1

Inverter circuit

TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5

BRD part

TR6

TR7

Multi-meter polarity
Measured result(Red)(Black)R
P1
No conduction
P1
R
Conduction
S
P1
No conduction
P1
S
Conduction
T
P1
No conduction
P1
T
Conduction
R
N
Conduction
NR
No conduction
S
N
ConductionN
S
No conduction
T
N
ConductionN
T
No conduction
U
P
No conduction
P
U
Conduction
VP
No conduction
P
V
Conduction
W
P
No conduction
P
W
Conduction
U
N
Conduction
NU
No conduction
V
N
Conduction
N
V
No conduction
W
N
Conduction
N
W
No conduction
PR
P
No conductionP
PR
Conduction
PR
N
No conductionN
PR
No conduction

Model
200V class : HF4322-5A5 to HF4322-011 (5.5〜11kW)
400V class : HF4324-5A5 to HF4324-011 (5.5〜11kW)

Model
200V class : HF4322-015 to HF4322-055 (15〜55kW)
400V class : HF4324-015 to HF4324-055 (15〜55kW)

6-4

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

6.6 Smoothing capacitor life span curve
・80% of the ND rated current value for continuous drive.
Ambient temperature (°C)

For continuous supplying
power of 24h a day

50
40
30
20
10
0

Capacitor life span (years)

-10
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*1) The ambient temperature is considered to be measured around 5 cm of the bottom centre of the inverter(Atmosphere temperature). If the inverter is in an enclosure, it will be the temperature inside the case.
*2) The smoothing capacitor has a limited life because of the chemical reactions occurring inside the capacitor while
operating. The capacitor should be replaced after 10 years of use, as a reference standard (10 years is not theguaranteed lifespan, but rather, the design lifespan). Note that the smoothing capacitor lifespan will be shortened if
the inverter is used at a high ambient temperature or with a heavy load that requires a current beyond the rated
current.

6.7 Lifespan alarm output
・By the self-diagnostic, it is possible to output an alarm in regards of the inverter own internal components lifespanwhen the lifespan is nearing to its end (Including the circuit board smoothing capacitor and cooling-fan, and excluding
the main circuit smoothing capacitor). Use this to get a reference for when the components should be replaced.
Particularly, consult the lifespan diagnosis monitor [dC-16] and the output terminal function selection [CC-01]〜[CC-07].
It should be noted that the warning itself is based on the design lifespan, and thus, is not a guaranteed measurement.
Depending on the environment, the operation conditions, etc. problems may arise, to avoid that, is recommended anearly maintenance.

6-5

Chapter 6

Inspection and Maintenance

6.8 Input/output voltage, current and power measurement methods
Standard equipment for measuring input/output voltage, current, and power measurement.
R
Power S
Supply

R

WI1

IR
ER

U

EU

Inverter

IS

WI2

S

WI3

T

V

V

IV

ES
T

EV

IT

W

Input powerWIN
Input power
factorPfIN
Outputvoltage
EOUT
Outputcurrent
IOUT
Outputpower
WOUT
Outputpower factor
PfOUT

Measuring point

EW

Measuring instrument

Remarks

Standard reference values
200V class:200〜240V 50/60Hz
400V class:380〜500V 50/60Hz
If there is unbalance in the input
supplyI IN=(IR+IS+ IT)/3

R-S, S-T, T-R
Moving-iron voltmeter or
Rectifier-type voltmeter(ER), (ES), (ET)R,
S,
T
Effective value
Moving-iron ammetercurrentof full waves(IR), (IS), (IT)R-S, S-T, T-R
Electrodynamometer-type wattmeter(WI1)+(WI2)+(WI3)
Is calculated from the measured values of the input voltage (EIN), input
current (IIN) and supply power (WIN).

WIN√3×FIN×IIN

PfIN=

Motor

W

WO2

IW

ET
Measureddata
Input voltage
EIN
Input current
IIN

U

WO1

IU

Three-wattmeter method

×100
Effective valueof fundamental
wave

U-V, V-W, W-U(EU), (EV), (EW)Moving-iron voltmeter or
Rectifier-type voltmeter

U, V, W current(IU), (IV), (IW)Moving-iron ammeter

U-V, V-W(WO1)+(WO2)Electrodynamometer-type wattmeter

Effective valueof full waves-

Two-wattmeter method(Otherwise the three-wattmeter
method)Is calculated from the measured values of the output voltage (EOUT), output
current (IOUT) and output power (WOUT).

PfOUT=WOUT√3×FOUT×IOUT

-

×100

Example method for measuring output voltage

S

U
Inverter

R

Motor

V

T
W
Diode
600V 0.1A or more (200V class)
1000V 0.1A or more (400V class)2W 220kΩ
+
VDC

Effective value of the fundamental wave VAC
VAC＝1.1×VDC－

6-6

Moving-coil voltmeter

300V (200V class)
600V (400V class)

When measuring…
1. To measure the output voltage, use
an instrument that reads the effective
value of the fundamental wave.
To measure the current or the power,
use an instrument that reads theeffective value of full waves.
2. Since the inverter output waveform iscontrolled by PWM, it has a large
margin of error, especially at low
frequencies. In many cases, generaltesters may be defective for themeasurement, because of theadverse effects of the noise.

Chapter 7

Specifications

Chapter 7 Specifications
7.1 200V class specifications
HF4322-Model name

Input

OutputVLD
Applicable motor (4 poles)
LD
(kW)
ND
VLD
Rated output current
LD
(A)
ND
VLD
Overload currentLDrating
ND
Rated output voltage
VLD
200V LD
ND
Rated capacity
(kVA)
VLD
240V LD
ND
VLD
Rated input current(A)
LD
*1)
ND
Rated input AC voltage *2)

VLD
LD
ND
VLD
Carrier frequency variation
LD
*4)
ND
Starting torque *5)Power supply capacity(kVA) *3)

Regenerative brake
Minimum resistance value(Ω)

Dimensions*6)

5A5

7A5

011

015

022

030

037

045

055

7.5

11

15

18.5

30

37

45

55

75

5.5
33.0
30.0
24.0

7.5
46.0
40.0
32.0

11
60.0
56.0
46.0

15
22
30
37
45
55
80.0
124
153
185
229
295
73.0
113
140
169
210
270
64.0
95.0
121
145
182
220
110% 60sec / 120% 3sec
120% 60sec / 150% 3sec
150% 60sec / 200% 3sec
Three-phase(3 wire)200 to 240V (Corresponding to the incoming voltage)
11.4
15.9
20.8
27.7
43.0
53.0
64.1
79.3
102.2
10.4
13.9
19.4
25.3
39.1
48.5
58.5
72.7
93.5
8.3
11.1
15.9
22.2
32.9
41.9
50.2
63.0
76.2
13.7
19.1
24.9
33.3
51.5
63.6
76.9
95.2
122.6
12.5
16.6
23.3
30.3
47.0
58.2
70.3
87.3
112.2
9.9
13.3
19.1
26.6
39.4
50.2
60.2
75.6
91.4
39.3
54.8
71.4
95.2
147.6
182.1
220.2
272.6
351.2
35.7
47.6
66.7
86.9
134.5
166.7
201.2
250.0
321.4
29.8
38.1
54.8
76.2
113.1
145.2
173.8
216.7
261.9
Control power supply: Single-phase 200 to 240V
Permissible AC voltage 170 to 264 , 50Hz/60Hz(±5%)
Three-phase(3 wire) 200 to 240V , Permissible AC voltage 170 to 264 , 50Hz/60Hz(±5%)
15.0
20.9
27.2
36.3
56.3
69.4
83.9
103.9
133.8
13.6
18.1
25.4
33.1
51.3
63.5
76.7
95.3
122.5
11.3
14.5
20.9
29.0
43.1
55.3
66.2
82.6
99.8
0.5 to 10.0kHz
0.5 to 12.0kHz
0.5 to 16.0kHz
150% or moreInternal BRD circuit (external discharge resistor value)
16

10

7.5

External regenerative braking unit

5-

H(height)(mm)

260

390

540

550

700

W(width)(mm)

210

245

300

390

480

D(Depth)(mm)

170

190

195

250

250

IP20 – UL Open Type
10
22

33

47

Protective structure
Aprox. weight (kg)6*1) The rated input current is the value when the drive is operated in the rated output current.
The value of the impedance at the supply side changes due to the wiring, breaker, input reactor, etc.
*2) Following are for Low Voltage Directive (LVD) compliant.
- Pollution degree 2- Overvoltage category 3*3) The power supply capacity is the value of the rated output current at 220V. The value of the impedance at the supply side changes
due to the wiring, breaker, input reactor, etc.
*4) It is necessary to set the carrier frequency settings [bb101]/ [bb201] equal or greater than the (maximum output frequency x 10)
Hz. For induction motor IM, set the carrier frequency to 2 kHz or more except V/f control. For synchronous motor (SM), permanent
magnet motor (PMM) set the carrier frequency to 8 kHz or more.
*5) The value is specified for the standard motor controlled by the sensor less vector control when ND rating.
Torque characteristics may vary by the control system and the use of the motor.
*6) The key height of keypad are exclued from dimensions. When an option is connected, the depth is increased. Refer to the each
optional instruction.

7-1

Chapter 7

Specifications

7.2 400V class specifications
HF4324-Model name

Input

OutputVLD
Applicable motor (4 poles)
LD
(kW)
ND
VLD
Rated output
LD
current(A)
ND
VLD
Overload currentLDrating
ND
Rated output voltage
VLD
400V LD
ND
Rated capacity
(kVA)
VLD
500V LD
ND
VLD
Rated input current(A)
LD
*1)
ND
Rated input AC voltage *2)

VLD
LD
ND
VLD
Carrier frequency variation
LD
*4)
ND
Starting torque *5)Power supply capacity(kVA) *3)

Regenerative brake
Minimum resistance value(Ω)

Dimensions*6)

5A5

7A5

011

015

022

030

037

045

055

7.5

11

15

18.5

30

37

45

55

75

5.5
17.5
16.0
14.8

7.5
25.0
22.0
19.0

11
31.0
29.0
25.0

15
22
30
37
45
55
40.0
62.0
77.0
93.0
116
147
37.0
57.0
70.0
85.0
105
135
32.0
48.0
61.0
75.0
91.0
112
110% 60sec / 120% 3sec
120% 60sec / 150% 3sec
150% 60sec / 200% 3sec
Three-phase(3 wire)380〜500V (Corresponding to the incoming voltage)
12.1
17.3
21.5
27.7
43.0
53.3
64.4
80.4
101.8
11.1
15.2
20.1
25.6
39.5
48.5
58.9
72.7
93.5
9.7
13.1
15.9
22.2
33.3
40.2
52.0
62.1
76.2
15.2
21.7
26.8
34.6
53.7
66.7
80.5
100.5
127.3
13.9
19.1
25.1
32.0
49.4
60.6
73.6
90.9
116.9
10.4
13.9
19.9
27.7
41.6
50.2
65.0
77.9
96.3
20.8
29.8
36.9
47.6
73.8
91.7
110.7
138.1
175.0
19.0
26.2
34.5
44.0
67.9
83.3
101.2
125.0
160.7
17.6
22.6
29.8
38.1
57.1
72.6
89.3
108.3
133.3
Control power supply : Single-phase 380 to 500V
Permissible AC voltage 323 to 550V , 50Hz/60Hz(±5%)
Three-phase(3 wire) 380 to 500V , Permissible AC voltage 323 to 550 , 50Hz/60Hz(±5%)
15.9
22.7
28.1
36.3
56.3
69.9
84.4
105.2
133.4
14.5
20.0
26.3
33.6
51.7
63.5
77.1
95.3
122.5
13.4
17.2
22.7
29.0
43.5
55.3
68.0
82.6
101.6
0.5〜10.0kHz
0.5〜12.0kHz
0.5〜16.0kHz
150% or more
External regenerative
Internal BRD circuit (external discharge resistor value)
braking unit
70

35

24

20

15

10

H(height)(mm)

260

390

540

550

W(width)(mm)

210

245

300

390

D(Depth)(mm)

170

190

195

250

IP20 – UL Open Type
8.5
22

31

Protective structure
Aprox. weight (kg)6*1) The rated input current is the value when the drive is operated in the rated output current. The value of the impedance at the
supply side changes due to the wiring, breaker, input reactor, etc.
*2) Make sure the following for Low Voltage Directive (LVD) compliant.
- Pollution degree 2- Overvoltage category 3 (for 380〜460Vac Input supply)- Overvoltage category 2 (for over 460Vac Input supply)*3) The power supply capacity is the value of the rated output current at 440V. The value of the impedance at the supply side changes
due to the wiring, breaker, input reactor, etc.
*4) It is necessary to set the carrier frequency settings [bb101]/[bb201] equal or greater than the (maximum output frequency x 10)Hz.
For induction motor IM, set the carrier frequency to 2 kHz or more except V/f control. For synchronous motor (SM), permanent
magnet motor (PMM) set the carrier frequency to 8 kHz or more.
*5) The value is specified for the standard motor controlled by the sensor less vector control when ND rating.
Torque characteristics may vary by the control system and the use of the motor.
*6) The key height of keypad are excluded from dimensions. When an option is connected, the depth is increased. Refer to the each
optional instruction.

7-2

Chapter 7

Specifications

7.3 Common specifications
PWM system

Sine-wave PWM system

Output frequency range *1)

0.00〜590.00Hz

Frequency accuracy

For the highest frequency, digital±0.01%, analog±0.2% (25±10℃)

Frequency resolution

Digital: 0.01Hz：Analog: Max. frequency/4000(VRF terminal/IRF terminal:12bit/0〜+10V or 0〜+20mA, VF2 terminal 12bit/-10〜+10V)

Control system *2)
Speed fluctuation *3)
Acceleration/deceleration time
Display
Start functions
Stop functions
Stall prevention function

Protection functions *4)

Other functions

External signal *5)

Communication port
KeypadExternal signal
Communication PortInput

RUN Stop
Forward/
ReverseFrequency
reference

Panel

Input terminals

Backup supply terminal
Functional safety STO
input terminal
Thermistor input terminal

V/f control (constant torque/reduced torque/ free / automatic boost control )V/f with encoder( constant torque/reduced torque/ free / automatic boost control )Cascade type sensorless vector control, 0Hz sensorless vector control, Vector control with encoder
SM/PMM synchronous startup for smart sensorless vector control , IVMS start type sensor less vector control±0.5%(sensorless vector control)IM

0.00〜3600.00s (Linear, S-curve, U-curve, Inverted-U-curve, EL-S-curve)
Output frequency, Output current, Output torque, trip history, input/output terminal status, input/output
terminal function
input/output power, PN voltage, etc, the rest is described in the chapter 4.
DC braking after the start, matching frequency after the start, active frequency matching start, Low-voltage
start, retry restart
After free run stop, deceleration stop, DC braking or external DC braking operation (Braking force, time,
adjustment of operation speed)
Overload limit function, overcurrent supression, overvoltage suppresion function
Overcurrent error, overload error, brake resistor overload, overvoltage error, memory error, undervoltage
error, current detector error, CPU error, external trip error, USP error, ground error, supply overvoltage error,
power loss error, temperature detector error, Cooling-fan rotation speed decrease, temperature error, phase
input error, IGBT error, phase output error, thermistor error brake error, low-speed range overload error,
inverter overload, RS485communication error, RTC error, the rest is described in the chapter 5.
V/f free setting (7 points), upper and lower speed limit, speed jump, curve acceleration and deceleration,
manual torque boost
energy-saven operation, analog output adjustment, minimun speed, carrier frequency adjustment, motor
electronic thermal function(free is possible), inverter thermal function, external start-end(speed and rate),frequency input selection, trip retry, restart stop, various signal output, inilization setting, PID control,
auto-decel at shut-off, brake control function, commercial switching function, auto-tuning (on/offline), etc. therest is described in the chapter 4.
UP, DOWN keys according to the set parameter.
VRF/IRF terminal (for voltage input)
0〜10Vdc set by the voltage input (Input impedance:10kΩ)VRF/IRF terminal (for current input)
0〜20mA set by the current input (Input impedance:100Ω)VF2 terminal-10〜+10Vdc set by the voltage input (Input impedance:10kΩ)Multi-speed terminal
16multi-speed(With the use of the intelligent input terminal)
Pulse train-input
Maximum 32kHz×2
RS485 serial communication (Protocol: Modbus-RTU)
By RUN/Stop key (With the set parameter, forward/reverse can be switched)
Forward (FR)/Reverse(RR)(When input terminal functions are allocated)
3-wire input allowed(When input terminal functions are allocated)
Set by RS485 communication (Maximum: 115.2kbps)
11 terminals (A or B terminal accept a pulse train)
FR(Forward rotation)/RR(Reverse rotation), DFL/DFM/DFH/DHH(Multi-speed 1〜4), SF1〜7(Multi-speed bit 1〜7), ADD(Trigger for frequency addition), AUT(Command change), STA(3-wire start)/STP(3-wire stop)/
F/R(Forward/reverse by 3-wire), AHD(Analog command holding, UP(Remote control up)/DWN(Remote controldown), UDC(Remote data clearance), F-OP(Forcible operation), SET(2nd-motor), RST(Reset), JOG(Jogging),
DB(External DC braking), AD2(2-stage accel/decel), MBS(Free-run stop), ES(External trip) USP(Unattended start
protection), CS(Commercial power supply switching), SFT(Software lock), BOK(Braking confirmation)
OLR(Overload restriction selection), KHC(Accumulated input power clear), OKHC(Accumulated input), PID(PID1
disable), PIDC(PID1 integration reset), PID2(PID2 disable), PIDC2(PID2 integration reset), PID3(PID3 disable),
PIDC3(PID3 integration reset), PID4(PID4 disable), PIDC4(PID4 integration reset), SVC1〜4(PID1 multistage
target value 1〜4), PRO(PID gain change), PIO1(PID output change 1), PIO2(PID output change 2), SLEP(SLEEP
trigger)/WAKE(WAKE trigger), TL(Enable torque limit), TRQ1/2(Torque limit 1/2), PPI(P/PI switching),
CAS(Control gain switching), SON(Servo-ON), FOC(Forcing), ATR(Enable torque command input), TBS(Enabletorque bias), ORT(Home search function), LAC(LAD cancellation), PCLR(Position deviation clearance),
STAT(Enable 90°-shift phase) PUP(Position bias addition), PDN(Position bias subtraction), CP1〜4(Multistage
position 1〜4), ORL(Zero-return limit function) ORG(Zero-return trigger function), FOT(Forward drive stop),
ROT(Reverse drive stop), SPD(Speed/position change), PSET(Position data pre-set), PCC(Pulse counterclearance), HLD(accel/decel stop), REN(Motion enable signal), DISP(Display lock), PLA(Pulse train input A),
PLB(Pulse train input B), EMF(Emergency-force drive activation), COK( Contactor check signal), DTR(Data trace
start signal) PLZ(Pulse train input Z), TCH( Teach-in signal)
P+/P-: DC24V input(Input allowable voltage: 24V±10%)
2 terminals (Simultaneous input)
1 terminal (PTC/NTC resistor allowed)

7-3

Chapter 7

Specifications

7.3 Common specifications (continue)

OutputOutput terminals

Relay/Alarm relay(1a, 1c) function

EDM output terminal
Output terminal monitor *6)
EMC filter *7)
PC external accessTransistor output terminal 5, 1a contact relay 1 point, 1c contact relay 1 point
DRV(While in run), UPF1〜5(Reached frequency signal), IRDY(Inverter ready), FRR(Forward rotation),
RRR(Reverse rotation), FREF(panel frequency reference), REF(panel motion operation), SETM(2nd-motor
selected), OPO(Option-Output), AL(Alarm signal), MJA(Major failure signal), OTQ(Over-torque), IP(Power loss),
UV(Undervoltage), TRQ(Torque limited), IPS(Decel. Power loss), RNT(RUN time exceeded), ONT(ON timeexceeded), THM(Motor electronic thermal warning), THC(Electronic thermal warning), WAC(Capacitor life
warning), WAF(Cooling-fan life warning), FS(Operation signal), OHF(heat sink overheat warning),
LOC/LOC2(Low-current indication signal), OL/OL2(Overload warning signal 1/2), BRK(Brake release)/BER(Brake
error)/CON(Contactor control), ZS(0Hz detection signal) DSE(Maximum speed deviation), PDD(Maximum position
deviation), POK(Positioning completed), PCMP(Pulse counter compare output) OD/OD2/OD3/OD4(Output
deviation for PID control), FBV/FBV2/FBV3/FBV4(PID feedback comparison), NDc(Communication disconnection),
VRFDc/IRFDc/VF2Dc(Analog VRF/IRF/VF2 disconnection), Ai4Dc/Ai5Dc/Ai6Dc(Option analog Ai4/Ai5/Ai6
disconnection) WCVRF/WCIRF/WCVF2(Window comparator VRF/IRF/VF2), WCAi4/WCAi5/WCAi6(Window
comparator Ai4/Ai5/Ai6),LOG1〜7(logical operation result 1〜7),EMFC(Emergency force drive
indicator),EMBP(Bypass mode indicator), WFT(Trace waiting signal), TRA(Trace running signal), LBK(Low batteryof panel), OVS(Overvoltage power Supply), AC0-3( Alarm code bit-0 to 4), SSE( PID soft start error)
Functional safety diagnostic output
The data of the monitor can be selected by the parameter of the output.
EMC filter can be enable (The filter exchange method can alter depending on the model)
USB Micro-B

Optional boards

Operating environment

ND-10〜50°C
LD-10〜45°C
VLD-10〜40°C-20〜65°Storage temperature *8)
Level of humidity
20〜90%RH(No condensation allowed)
Model: up to HF4322-022 and up to HF4324-022
5.9m/s2 (0.6G), 10〜55Hz
Vibration tolerance *9)
Model: more than HF4322-030 and more than HF4324-030
2.94m/s2 (0.3G), 10〜55Hz
A maximum altitude of 1000m, without gases or dust.
Installation place *10)
The life span of the main circuit smoothing capacitors is 10 years.
Components life span
The life span of the cooling-fan is 10 years.
UL, cUL, CE marking, RCM
Conformity standars *11)
Functional safety (STO function/ IEC61800-5-2,IEC62061,IEC61508: SIL3/ EN ISO13849-1: Cat.4 PLe)Black
Coating color
3 ports
Optional slots
Analog input/output option( available soon )Input/ouput option
CC-Link, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, Modbus-TCP
Communication option *12)
Line driver input (RS422)
Feedback option
Functional safety option(STO/SS1/SBC/SLS/SDI/SSM function / IEC61800-5-2,IEC62061,IEC61508: SIL3/ EN
Functional safety option
ISO13849-1: Cat.4 PLe )Braking resistor, AC reactor, DC reactor, Noise filter,Radio noise filter, Zero phase reactor,operator cable,
Other optional components
regenerative braking unit,
PC software*1) Output frequency range will depend on the motor control method and the motor used. Consult the motor manufacturer for the maximum
allowable frequency of the motor when operating beyond 60Hz.
*2) In case of the control mode is changed and the motor constant is not set appropriately, the desired starting torque cannot be obtained and also
exists the possibility of tripping.
*3) Regarding the speed range regulation of motor, the variable range depends on the client system and the environment in which the motor is used.
*4) If the IGBT error [E030] occurs by the protective function, it may have happened by the short-circuit protection, but also can occur if the IGBT isdamaged. Depending on the operation status of the inverter, instead of the IGBT error, the overcurrent error [E001] may also occur.
*5) At factory setting, the maximum output frequency for analogue input signal VRF/IRF is adjusted to 9.8V for voltage input and 19.6mA for current
input. In order to adjust the specification use analogue start/end function.
*6) The analogue voltage and analogue current monitor are estimated outputs of the analogue meter connection. Maximum output value might
deviate slightly from 10V or 20mA by variation of the analogue output circuit. If you want to change the characteristics, adjust the Ao1 and Ao2
adjustment functions.
There are some monitor data that cannot be output.
*7) In order to enable the EMC filter, connect to the neutral grounding supply. Otherwise, the leakage current may increase.
*8) Storage temperature is the temperature during transport.
*9) In accordance with the test methods of JIS C 60068-2-6:2010(IEC 60068-2-6:2007).
*10) In case of utilization at an altitude of 1000m or more, take into account that the atmospheric pressure is reduced by 1% for every 100m up. Apply
1% derating from the rated current by increasing every 100m, and conduct an evaluation test.
When using above 2500m ambient, please contact Hitachi Inverter distributer.
*11) Insulation distance is in accordance with the UL and CE standards.
*12) Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation Inc.
PROFIBUS® and PROFINET® is registered trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PNO).
Ambient temperature

7.4 Current derating
For using with carrier frequency over 2.1 kHz, or when changing load ratings to LD/VLD, refer to HF-430NEO user’s guidesection “20.4 Current derating table”.

7-4

List of Parameters

Appendix 1

List of Parameters
A1.1 What This Chapter Explains
This chapter describes lists of monitors and parameters as well as setting range of each parameter and theirinitial values.

A1.2 How to View Parameters and Lists
Structure of parameter number• A parameter consists of a parameter group, switch recognition number assigned by the 024[SET] terminal
function, and an in-group number.
• If the switch recognition number assigned by 024[SET] terminal function is “-”, it is enabled in both firstsetting and second setting.
• If the 024[SET] function is not set to the input terminal functions [CA-01] to [CA-11], the first setting is valid.

AA 1 01
Parameter
Group

In-Group
Number-: Always enabled in both the first setting and second setting
1: Enabled in the first setting when the [SET] terminal function is OFF
2: Enabled in the second setting when the [SET] terminal function is ON

About monitor mode
Code
XX-01

Name
Monitor name

Data range

Page

Data Range

Reference page

About parameter mode
Code
YY101

Name
Parameter name

YY-02＊

Parameter name

Data range
Data range(200V class) data range(400V class) data range

Initial value
ZZ(200V class) VV(400V class) WW

Note

Page

Write down the setting value

Reference page

＊Codes that can be changed during operation are underlined.

• The voltage class is shown by 200V/400V.
• See "Chapter 20 Specifications" for the product model.
The description applies to all models unless otherwise specified.
* Parameters other than those changeable during operation can be changed only when the device is stopped.
The user can change the parameter that cannot be changed during operation after the device decelerates
and stops and output is stopped. However, it cannot be changed if the soft-lock function is activated.
• The text includes notes with a symbol “*)”.
Notes on setting parameters• When setting parameters, we expect you to fully understand various points to be noted.
• Make sure to check and set the following parameters to protect the motor.
Do- [Hb102]-[Hb108] (for IM)- [Hd102]-[Hd108] (for SM/PMM)- [bC110] (electronic thermal level)→ for motor overload protection current- [bb160] (overcurrent level)* When setting the thermal subtraction characteristics, set a value in accordance with the characteristics of motor.
Otherwise, the motor may be burned.

App.1-1

List of Parameters

Appendix 1

After configuring settings for motor protection, choose the frequency command destination and operationcommand destination to run the device.
• With [AA101], choose a frequency command destination.
• With [AA111], choose an operation command destination.
• With [FA-01], check that the frequency command is received.
*) To run the inverter, a frequency command and operation command are required. If commands are sent
using V/f control, there is no output if the frequency command is 0Hz.

A1.3 List of Monitor Modes
Monitors related to output（D code：Monitor）
Code

Name

Data range

dA-01
dA-02

Output frequency monitor
Output current monitor

dA-03

Operation direction monitor

dA-04
dA-06
dA-08
dA-12
dA-14
dA-15
dA-16
dA-17
dA-18

Frequency command
Output frequency conversion monitor
Speed detection value monitor
Output frequency monitor (with sign)Frequency upper limit monitor
Torque command monitor (after calculation)
Torque limit monitor
Output torque monitor
Output voltage monitor

dA-20

Current position monitor

dA-26
dA-28
dA-30
dA-32
dA-34
dA-36
dA-38
dA-40
dA-41
dA-42
dA-43

Pulse string position deviation monitor
Pulse counter monitor
Input power monitor
Integrated input power monitor
Output power monitor
Integrated output power monitor
Motor temperature monitor
DC voltage monitor
Braking resistor circuit (DBTR) duty ratio monitor
Electronic thermal duty ratio monitor (motor)
Electronic thermal duty ratio monitor (inverter)Page

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.0~655.35 (A)F (Normal rotation in process)/r (Reverse rotation in process)d (0Hz output)/ o (Stopped)-590.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~59000.00 (Hz)-590.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~590.00 (Hz)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)
0.0~500.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)
0.0~800.0 (V)When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03 -268435455~+268435455(pls)
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03 -1073741823~+1073741823-2147483647~+2147483647 (pls)0~2147483647 (pls)0.00~75.00 (kW)0.0~1000000.0 (kW)0.00~75.00 (kW)0.0~1000000.0 (kW)-20.0~200.0 (°C)
0.0~1000.0 (V)

4-15

0.00~100.00 (%)

Monitors related to control circuit
Code

Name

dA-45

STO monitor

dA-46,47

Reserved

dA-50

Terminal block option mounted

dA-51

Input terminal monitor

dA-54

Output terminal monitor

dA-60

Analog I/O selection monitor

dA-61
dA-62
dA-63
dA-64
dA-65
dA-66
dA-70
dA-71

Analog input [VRF] monitor
Analog input [IRF] monitor
Analog input [VF2] monitor
Extended analog input [Ai4] monitor
Extended analog input [Ai5] monitor
Extended analog input [Ai6] monitor
Pulse string input monitor (main body)
Pulse string input monitor (HF-FB)

Data range
00 (no input)/ 01 (P-1A)/ 02 (P-2A)/ 03 (P-1b)
04 (P-2b)/05 (P-1C)/06 (P-2C)/ 07 (STO)
00 (P1-TM: standard terminal block)
02 (P1-TM2: terminal block with round screws)/15 (not connected)
LLLLLLLLLLL~HHHHHHHHHHH [L:OFF/H:ON][Left side] (terminal DHH) (terminal DFH) (terminal RST) - (terminal FR)[Right side]
LLLLLLL-HHHHHHH [L:OFF/H:ON][Left side] (terminal FL) (terminal RL) (terminal X3) - (terminal UPF) [Right side]
AAAAAAAA- VVVVVVVV [A: current/V: voltage][Left side] (terminal Ao4 (Io4/Vo4)) (terminal Ao3 (Io3/Vo3))(terminal Ai4 (Ii4/Vi4)) (terminal VF2 (Ii3/Vi3)) (terminal AMI)
(terminal AMV) (terminal IRF) (terminal VRF) [Right side]

Page

4-15

0.00~100.00 (%)-100.00~100.00 (%)
0.00~100.00 (%)-100.00~100.00 (%)

Option slot monitor
Code
dA-81
dA-82
dA-83

Name
Option slot 1 mounted
Option slot 2 mounted
Option slot 3 mounted

Data range

Page

00: (none) /01: (P1-EN) /03: (P1-PN) / 06: (P1-PB)
07: (P1-CCL) /18: (P1-AG) <hereafter only da-82 is indicated>33: (HF-FB)

4-15

App.1-2

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
 Monitors related to PID functionCodedb-01 to 23
db-30
db-32
db-34
db-36
db-38
db-40
db-42
db-44
db-50
db-51
db-52
db-53
db-54
db-55
db-56
db-57
db-58
db-59
db-60
db-61
db-62
db-63
db-64

Name
Reserved
PID1 feedback data 1 monitor
PID1 feedback data 2 monitor
PID1 feedback data 3 monitor
PID2 feedback data monitor
PID3 feedback data monitor
PID4 feedback data monitor
PID1 target value monitor
PID1 feedback data monitor
PID1 output monitor
PID1 deviation monitor
PID1 deviation 1 monitor
PID1 deviation 2 monitor
PID1 deviation 3 monitor
PID2 output monitor
PID2 deviation monitor
PID3 output monitor
PID3 deviation monitor
PID4 output monitor
PID4 deviation monitor
PID current P gain monitor
PID current I gain monitor
PID current D gain monitor
PID feed-forward monitor

Data range
-

Page
-

0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AH-04][AH-05][AH-06])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-04][AJ-05][AJ-06])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-24][AJ-25][AJ-26])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-44][AJ-45][AJ-46])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AH-04][AH-05][AH-06])

4-16-100.00~100.00 (%)

0~100.00 (%)
0.0~3600.0 (s)0.00~100.00 (s)Monitors for checking internal condition
Code
dC-01
dC-02

dC-07

dC-08
dC-10
dC-15

Name
Monitor for checking selection of
inverter duty spec
Rated current monitor

Main speed command destination
monitor

Auxiliary speed commanddestination monitor
Operation command destination
monitorCooling fin temperature monitor

dC-16

Life diagnostic monitor

dC-20
dC-21

Total start-up countPower-on countCumulative operating hours monitor
during RUN
Cumulative power-on time
Cumulative operating time of cooling
fan

dC-22
dC-24
dC-26

dC-37

Detailed monitor for icon 2LIM

dC-38

Detailed monitor for icon 2ALT

dC-39

Detailed monitor for icon 2RETRY

dC-40

Detailed monitor for icon 2NRDY

dC-45

IM/SM (PMM) monitor

dC-50
dC-53
dE-50

Firmware version monitor
Firmware grade monitor
Warning monitor

Data rangePage

00 (very low duty)
01 (low duty/02 (normal duty)
0.0~6553.5 (A)00 (disabled)/01 (VRF)/02 (IRF)/03 (VF2)/04 (Ai4)/05 (Ai5)/06 (Ai6)
07 (Multistage speed 0)/08 (auxiliary speed)/09 (Multistage speed 1)
10 (Multistage speed 2)/11 (Multistage speed 3)/12 (Multistage speed 4)
13 (Multistage speed 5)/14 (Multistage speed 6)/15 (Multistage speed 7)
16 (Multistage speed 8)/17 (Multistage speed 9)/18 (Multistage speed 10)
19 (Multistage speed 11)/20 (Multistage speed 12)/21 (Multistage speed 13)
22 (Multistage speed 14)/23 (Multistage speed 15)/24 (JOG)/25 (RS485)
26 (Option 1)/27 (Option 2)/28 (Option 3)/29 (Pulse array (main unit))
30 (Pulse array (HF-FB))/31 (Reserved)/32 (PID)/33 (Reserved)
34 (AHD retention speed)
00 ([FR]/[RR] terminal)/01 (3 wire)/02 (RUN key on operator keypad)
03 (RS485 setting)/04 (Option 1)/05 (Option 2)/06 (Option 3)-20.0~200.0 (°C)
LL - HH [L: normal/H: reduction of life][Left side ] (FAN life) (lives of the capacitors on the circuit board) [Right side]1 - 65535 (Counts)

1~1000000 (hr)00 (Condition other than below)/01 (Overcurrent suppression in process)02 (Overload being limited)/03 (Overvoltage suppression in process)04 (Torque being limited)
05 (Upper/lower limit and jump frequency setting being limited)
06 (Setting of minimum frequency being limited)
00 (Condition other than below)/01 (Overload advance notice)
02 (Motor thermal advance notice)/03 (Controller thermal advance notice)04 (Motor overheat advance notice)
00 (Condition other than below)/01 (Retry standby)/02 (Restart standby
00 (Preparation completed condition other than below IRDY=OFF)
01 (Trip occurred)/02 (Power supply abnormality)/03 (Resetting)/04 (STO)
05 (Standby)/06 (Data inconsistency Others (including no FB, consistency ofsettings of A and B phases, etc.))
07 (Sequence abnormality)/08 (Free run)/09 (Forced stop)
00 (Induction motor IM being selected)
01 (Synchronous motor SM (permanent magnet motor PMM) being selected)
0.000~99.255
00 (Standard)
See the right section

App.1-3

4-16

List of Parameters

Appendix 1■Monitors（F code：Reference Monitor / setting）
Code

Name

FA-01
FA-02
FA-10
FA-12
FA-15
FA-16

Main speed command monitor
Auxiliary speed command monitor
Acceleration time monitor
Deceleration time monitor
Torque command monitor
Torque bias command monitor

FA-20

Position command monitor

FA-30
FA-32
FA-34
FA-36
FA-38
FA-40

PID1 target value 1
PID1 target value 2
PID1 target value 3
PID2 target value
PID3 target value
PID4 target value

Data range

Note

Page

0.00~590.00 (Hz)-590.00 - 590.00 (Hz) (for monitoring)/0.00 - 590.00 (Hz) (for setting)0.00~3600.00 (s)-500.0~500.0 (%)
When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03 -268435455~+268435455 (pls)
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03 -1073741823~+1073741823 (pls)

4-170.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AH-04][AH-05][AH-06])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-04][AJ-05][AJ-06])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-24][AJ-25][AJ-26])
0.00~100.00 (%) (adjustable in [AJ-44][AJ-45][AJ-46])＊FA parameter indicates the current command value, and automatically displays data of the command destinationthat is being adopted.
Example 1：If the command destination is the operator keypad, it can be changed using the arrow keys.
Example 2：If the command destination is the analog input VRF, it can be changed by changing input to the terminal [VRF].

A1.4 List of Parameter Modes
Parameter mode (A code：Standard Function)
Code

Name

AA101 First main speed command selection

AA102

First auxiliary speed command
selection

AA104 First auxiliary speed setting
AA105 First operator selection
AA106 First additional frequency setting
AA111 First operation command selection
AA-12
AA-13

RUN key operation direction selection
STOP key selection

AA114 First operation direction limit selection
AA115 First stop mode selection

AA121 First control mode

AA123 First vector control mode selection

Data range
01 (VRF terminal input)/02 (IRF terminal input)
03 (VF2 terminal input)/04 (Ai4 terminal input)
05 (Ai5 terminal input)/06 (Ai6 terminal input)
07 (Parameter setting)/08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)
10 (Option 2)/11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)/14 (Reserved)
15 (PID calculation)/16 (Reserved)
00 (Disabled)/01 (VRF terminal input)/02 (IRF terminal input)
03 (VF2 terminal input)/04 (Ai4 terminal input)
05 (Ai5 terminal input)/06 (Ai6 terminal input)
07 (Parameter setting)/08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)
10 (Option 2)/11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)/14 (Reserved)
15 (PID calculation)/16 (Reserved)
0.00~590.00 (Hz)00 (Disabled)/01 (Addition)/02 (Subtraction)
03(Multiplication)-590.00~590.00 (Hz)00 ([FR]/[RR] terminal)/01 (3 wire)
02 (RUN key on operator keypad)/03 (RS485)/04 (Option 1)
05 (Option 2)/06 (Option 3)
00 (Normal rotation)/01 (Reverse rotation)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)/02 (Only reset is enabled)
00 (No limitation)/01 (Only normal rotation)
02 (Only reverse rotation)
00 (Deceleration stop)/01 (Free run stop)
00 ([V/f] Fixed torque characteristics (IM))
01 ([V/f] Reducing torque characteristics (IM))
02 ([V/f] Free V/f (IM))/03 ([V/f] Auto torque boost (IM))
04 ([V/f with sensor] Fixed torque characteristics (IM)05 ([V/f with sensor] Reduced torque characteristics (IM)06 ([V/f with sensor] Free V/f (IM)07 ([V/f with sensor] Auto torque boost (IM)08 (Sensorless vector control (IM))
09 (Zero-Hz range sensorless vector control (IM)) *1)
10 (Vector control with sensor (IM)) *1)
11 (Synchronous start type sensorless vector control(SM/PMM))
12 (IVMS start type sensorless vector control (SM/PMM)) *2)
00 (Speed/torque control mode)
01 (Pulse string position control mode)
02 (Absolute position control mode)
03 (High-resolution absolute position control mode)*1) Cannot be selected if [Ub-03] duty spec selection is 01 (LD) or 02 (VLD).
*2) Cannot be selected if [Ub-03] duty spec selection is 02 (VLD) or 02 (VLD).

App.1-4

Initial
value

Note

Page

07

4-18
00

0.00
00
0.00
02
00
01
00
00

4-19
00

00

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

AA201
AA202
AA204
AA205
AA206
AA211
AA214
AA215
AA221
AA223

Second main speed command selection
Second auxiliary speed command selection
Second auxiliary speed setting
Second operator selection
Second additional frequency setting
Second operation command selection
Second operation direction limit selection
Second stop mode selection
Second control mode
Second vector control mode selection

Data range
Same as AA101
Same as AA102
Same as AA104
Same as AA105
Same as AA106
Same as AA111
Same as AA114
Same as AA115
Same as AA121
Same as AA123

Initial
value
07
00
0.00
00
0.00
02

Note

Page

4-19

00

*1) Cannot be selected if [Ub-03] duty spec selection is 01 (LD) or 02 (VLD).
*2) Cannot be selected if [Ub-03] duty spec selection is 02 (VLD) or 02 (VLD).
Code

Name

Ab-01

Frequency conversion coefficient

Ab-03

Multistep speed selection

Ab110
Ab-11
Ab-12
Ab-13
Ab-14
Ab-15
Ab-16
Ab-17
Ab-18
Ab-19
Ab-20
Ab-21
Ab-22
Ab-23
Ab-24
Ab-25
Ab210

0th speed of the 1st multi-step speed
1st speed of the multi-step speed
2nd speed of the multi-step speed
3rd speed of the multi-step speed
4th speed of the multi-step speed
5th speed of the multi-step speed
6th speed of the multi-step speed
7th speed of the multi-step speed
8th speed of the multi-step speed
9th speed of the multi-step speed
10th speed of the multi-step speed
11th speed of the multi-step speed
12th speed of the multi-step speed
13th speed of the multi-step speed
14th speed of the multi-step speed
15th speed of the multi-step speed
0th speed of the 2nd multi-step speed

Code

Data range
0.01~100.00
00 (16th speed: binary (DFL~DHH))
01 (8th speed: bit (SF1-SF7))

AC-02

Multi-stage acceleration or deceleration selection

AC-03
AC-04

Acceleration pattern selection
Deceleration pattern selection

AC-05

Acceleration curve constant(S-shaped, U-shaped, reverse U-shaped)

AC115
AC116
AC117
AC120
AC122
AC124
AC126

00

0.00~590.00 (Hz)

Acceleration or deceleration time input typeselection

AC-08
AC-09
AC-10
AC-11

Page

4-20

AC-01

AC-06

Note

10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00

0.00

10.00

Name

Deceleration curve constant(S-shaped, U-shaped, reverse U-shaped)
Curvature 1 for EL-S-shaped acceleration
Curvature 2 for EL-S-shaped acceleration
Curvature 1 for EL-S-shaped deceleration
Curvature 2 for EL-S-shaped deceleration
First 2-stage acceleration or deceleration
selection
First 2-stage acceleration frequency
First 2-stage deceleration frequency
First acceleration time 1
First deceleration time 1
First acceleration time 2First deceleration time 2

Initialvalue
1.00

Data range
00 (Parameter setting)/01 (Option 1)
02 (Option 2)/03 (Option 3)/04 (Reserved)
00 (Common)
01 (Multi-stage acceleration/deceleration)
00 (Linear)/01 (S-shaped)/02 (U-shaped)
03 (Reverse U-shaped)/04 (Elevator S-shaped)

Initial
value

Page

00
4-20
00
00

1~10

2

0~100

25

00 ([AD2] terminal)/01 (Parameter setting)02 (Switching normal/reverse rotation)00

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00

0.00~3600.00 (s)30.00

App.1-5

Note

4-21

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
AC-30
AC-32
AC-34
AC-36
AC-38
AC-40
AC-42
AC-44
AC-46
AC-48
AC-50
AC-52
AC-54
AC-56
AC-58
AC-60
AC-62
AC-64
AC-66
AC-68
AC-70
AC-72
AC-74
AC-76
AC-78
AC-80
AC-82
AC-84
AC-86
AC-88
AC215
AC216
AC217
AC220
AC222
AC224
AC226

Code

Name
Acceleration time for multi-speed 1st speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 1st speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 2nd speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 2nd speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 3rd speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 3rd speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 4th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 4th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 5th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 5th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 6th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 6th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 7th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 7th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 8th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 8th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 9th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 9th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 10th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 10th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 11th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 11th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 12th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 12th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 13th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 13th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 14th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 14th speed
Acceleration time for multi-speed 15th speed
Deceleration time for multi-speed 15th speed
Second 2-stage acceleration or deceleration
selection
Second 2-stage acceleration frequency
Second 2-stage deceleration frequency
Second acceleration time 1
Second deceleration time 1
Second acceleration time 2
Second deceleration time 2

Torque command input selection

Ad-02

Torque command setting

Ad-03
Ad-04
Ad-11

Torque command polarity selection
Speed/torque control switch time
Torque bias input selection

Ad-12

Torque bias setting

Ad-13

Torque bias polarity selection
Torque bias enable terminal [TBS]selection

Ad-40

Ad-41
Ad-42

0.00~3600.00 (s)Torque control speed limit value
input selection
Torque control frequency limit value(for normal rotation)
Torque control frequency limit value(for reverse rotation)

Initial
value

Note

Page

0.00

4-22

00 ([AD2] terminal)/01 (Parameter setting)02 (Switching normal/reverse rotation)00

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00

0.00~3600.00 (s)

30.00

Name

Ad-01

Ad-14

Data range

Data range
00 (Disabled)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)/11 (Option 3)
12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)/15 (PID calculation)-500.0~500.0 (%)(Limited at a torque equivalent to 200% of inverter ND rating)
00 (As per the sign)/01 (Follow the revolution direction)
0~1000 (ms)Same as Ad-01-500.0~500.0 (%)(Limited at a torque equivalent to 200% of inverter ND rating)
00 (As per the sign)/01 (Follow the revolution direction)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled)
01 (VRF terminal input)/02 (IRF terminal input)
03 (VF2 terminal input)/04 (Ai4 terminal input)
05 (Ai5 terminal input)/06 (Ai6 terminal input)
07 (Parameter setting)/08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)
10 (Option 2)/11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)
0.00~590.00 (Hz)App.1-6

Initial
value

Note

Page

01

0.0
00
100
00
0.0
00
00

07

0.00

4-22

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
AE-01
AE-02
AE-03
AE-04
AE-05
AE-06
AE-07
AE-08

AE-11
AE-12

Name
Electronic gear installation position selection
Electronic gear ratio numerator
Electronic gear ratio denominator
Positioning completion range setting
Positioning completion delay time setting
Position control feed forward
Position loop gain
Position bias amount
Orientation stop position input
destination selection
Orientation stop position
Orientation speed setting

AE-13

Orientation direction setting

AE-20
AE-22
AE-24
AE-26
AE-28
AE-30
AE-32
AE-34
AE-36
AE-38
AE-40
AE-42
AE-44
AE-46
AE-48
AE-50

Position command 0
Position command 1
Position command 2
Position command 3
Position command 4
Position command 5
Position command 6
Position command 7
Position command 8
Position command 9
Position command 10
Position command 11
Position command 12
Position command 13
Position command 14
Position command 15

AE-52

Position range designation(forward rotation side)

AE-54

Position range designation(reverse rotation side)

AE-56
AE-60
AE-61

Positioning mode selection
Teaching selection
Memorization of current position at power-off

AE-62

Preset position data

AE-64
AE-65
AE-66
AE-67

Gain for calculating the deceleration stop distance
Bias for calculating the deceleration stop distanceAPR control speed limit
APR start speed

AE-70

Zero return mode selection

AE-71

Zero return direction selection

AE-72
AE-73

Low speed zero return speed
High speed zero return speed

AF101First DC braking selection

AF102

First braking mode selection

AF103
AF104
AF105
AF106
AF107
AF108
AF109

First DC braking frequency settingFirst DC braking delay timeFirst DC braking force at the time of the stop
First DC braking time at the time of the stop
First DC braking trigger selection
First DC braking force at the startFirst DC braking time at the start

AF120

First contactor control selection

AF121
AF122
AF123

First start waiting timeFirst contactor release delay timeFirst contactor check time

AE-10

Data range
00 (Feedback side)/01 (Command side)
1~10000
0~1000 (ms)0.00~10.00 (s)0.00~655.35
0.00~100.00-2048~2048
00 (Parameter setting)/01 (Option 1)
02 (Option 2)/03 (Option 3)
0~40950.00~120.00
00 (Normal rotation)
01 (Reverse rotation)

When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03-268435455~+268435455 (pls)
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03-1073741823~+1073741823 (pls)

When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03
0~+268435455 (pls)
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03
0~+1073741823 (pls)
When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03–268435455~0 (pls)
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03-1073741823~0 (pls)
00 (With limit)/01 (Without limit)
00 (X00)~15 (X15)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
When [AA121]≠10 or [AA123]≠03
0~+268435455
When [AA121]=10 and [AA123]=03
0~+1073741823
50.00~200.00
0.00~655.35
0.00~100.00
00 (Low speed zero return)01 (High speed zero return)02 (High speed zero return 2)
00 (Normal rotation)
01 (Reverse rotation)
0.00~10.00 (Hz)0.00~590.00 (Hz)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
02 (Frequency command)
00 (DC braking)/01 (Speed servo lock)
02 (Position servo lock)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~5.00 (s)0-100 (%) (with internal limitation)
0.00~60.00 (s)00 (Edge mode)/01 (Level mode)
0-100 (%) (with internal limitation)
0.00~60.00 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: primary side)
02 (Enabled: secondary side)
0.00~2.00 (s)0.00~5.00 (s)App.1-7

Initial value
00

Note

Page

1
5
0.00
0.00
0.50
0
00
0
5.00
00

0

4-23

268435455-268435455
00
X00
00
0
100.00
0.00
1.00
0.20
00
00
0.00
0.00

4-24

00
00
0.50
0.00
0
0.00
01
0
0.00
00
0.20
0.10

4-25

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

AF130
AF131
AF132
AF133
AF134
AF135
AF136
AF137
AF138
AF139
AF140
AF141
AF142
AF143
AF144
AF150
AF151
AF152
AF153
AF154
AF201
AF202
AF203
AF204
AF205
AF206
AF207
AF208
AF209
AF220
AF221
AF222
AF223
AF230
AF231
AF232
AF233
AF234
AF235

Data range

Initialvalue

00 (Disabled)
01 (Brake control 1 common forward/reverse rotation)
02 (Brake control 1 forward/reverse set individually)
03 (Brake control 2)00

0.00~5.00 (s)0.00

0.00~590.00 (Hz)

0.00

Name

First brake control selection
First brake release establishment
waiting time (normal rotation)
First acceleration waiting time(normal rotation)
First stop waiting time (normal rotation)
First brake confirmation waiting time(normal rotation)
First brake release frequency(normal rotation)
First brake release current(normal rotation)
First brake apply frequency(normal rotation)
First brake release establishment
waiting time (reverse rotation)
First acceleration waiting time
(reverse rotation)
First stop waiting time (reverse rotation)
First brake confirmation waiting time
(reverse rotation)
First brake release frequency(reverse rotation)
First brake release current(reverse rotation)
First brake apply frequency(reverse rotation)
First brake release delay timeFirst brake apply delay timeFirst brake check timeFirst servo lock time at startFirst servo lock time at stop
Second DC braking selection
Second braking mode selection
Second DC braking frequency setting
Second DC braking delay time
Second DC braking force at the time ofthe stop
Second DC braking time at the time ofthe stop
Second DC braking trigger selection
Second DC braking force at the start
Second DC braking time at the start
Second contactor control selection
Second start waiting time
Second contactor release delay time
Second contactor check time
Second brake control selection
Second brake release establishment
waiting time (normal rotation)
Second acceleration waiting time(normal rotation)
Second stop waiting time (normal
rotation)
Second brake confirmation waiting time(normal rotation)
Second brake release frequency(normal rotation)(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current (A)

0.00

0.00~5.00 (s)0.00

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00
1.00 ×Inverterratedcurrent

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00

0.00~2.00 (s)0.20

0.00~5.00 (s)0.10

0.00~10.00 (s)0.60Same as AF101
Same as AF102
Same as AF103
Same as AF104

0.50
0.00

Same as AF105

0Same as AF106

0.00

Same as AF104
Same as AF108
Same as AF109
Same as AF120
Same as AF121
Same as AF122
Same as AF123
Same as AF130

01
0
0.00
00
0.20

00

0.10
00

Same as AF131
Same as AF132
0.00
Same as AF133
Same as AF134
Same as AF135

0.00

AF236

Second brake release current(normal rotation)

Same as AF136

1.00 ×Inverterratedcurrent

AF237

Second brake apply frequency(normal rotation)

Same as AF137

0.00

App.1-8

Page

1.00 ×Inverterratedcurrent

0.00~590.00 (Hz)(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current (A)

Note

4-25

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
AF238
AF239
AF240
AF241
AF242
AF243

Name
Second brake release establishment
waiting time (normal rotation)
Second acceleration waiting time(normal rotation)
Second stop waiting time (normal rotation)
Second brake confirmation waiting time
(reverse rotation)
Second brake release frequency(reverse rotation)
Second brake release current(reverse rotation)

AF250
AF251
AF252
AF253
AF254
AG101
AG102
AG103
AG104
AG105
AG106
AG110
AG111
AG112
AG113
AG-20

Second brake apply frequency(reverse rotation)
Second brake release delay time
Second brake apply delay time
Second brake check time
Second servo lock time at start
Second servo lock time at stop
First jump frequency 1First jump frequency width 1First jump frequency 2First jump frequency width 2First jump frequency 3First jump frequency width 3First acceleration-stop frequency
First acceleration-stop timeFirst deceleration-stop frequency
First deceleration-stop time
Jogging frequency

AG-21

Selecting the jogging stop

AG201
AG202
AG203
AG204
AG205
AG206
AG210
AG211
AG212
AG213

Second jump frequency 1
Second jump frequency width 1
Second jump frequency 2
Second jump frequency width 2
Second jump frequency 3
Second jump frequency width 3
Second acceleration-stop frequency
Second acceleration-stop time
Second deceleration-stop frequency
Second deceleration-stop time

AH-01

PID1 selection

AH-02
AH-03
AH-04
AH-05
AH-06

PID1 deviation negative
PID1 unit selection
PID1 scale adjustment (0%)
PID1 scale adjustment (100%)
PID1 scale adjustment (decimal point)

AH-07

PID1 target value 1 input destination
selection

AF244

AH-10
AH-12
AH-14
AH-16
AH-18
AH-20
AH-22
AH-24
AH-26
AH-28
AH-30

PID1 target value 1 set value
PID1 multistage target value 1
PID1 multistage target value 2
PID1 multistage target value 3
PID1 multistage target value 4
PID1 multistage target value 5
PID1 multistage target value 6
PID1 multistage target value 7
PID1 multistage target value 8
PID1 multistage target value 9
PID1 multistage target value 10

Data range

Initial value

Note

Page

Same as AF138
Same as AF139
Same as AF140

0.00

Same as AF141
Same as AF142
Same as AF143

1.00 ×Inverter
rated current

Same as AF144

0.00

Same as AF150
Same as AF151
Same as AF152
Same as AF153
Same as AF154
0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~10.00 (Hz)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~10.00 (Hz)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~10.00 (Hz)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.0~60.0 (s)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.0~60.0 (s)0.00~10.00 (Hz)00 (Disabled during MBS operation at stop)
01 (Disabled during deceleration stop operation)
02 (Disabled during DB operation at stop)
03 (Enabled during MBS operation at stop)
04 (Enabled during deceleration stop operation)
05 (Enabled during DB operation at stop)
Same as AF101
Same as AF102
Same as AF103
Same as AF104
Same as AF105
Same as AF106
Same as AF110
Same as AF111
Same as AF112
Same as AF113
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled without reverse output)
02 (Enabled with reverse output)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
See <Unit options> at the end of Appendix-1-10000~10000
0~400 (None)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)
11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)-100.00~100.00 ＊＊Data range differs depending on [AH-04] - [AH-06].

App.1-9

4-25

0.20
0.10
0.60
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
5.00

01

4-26

0.00

0.0
0.00
0.0
00
00
01
0
10000
2

07
4-27

0.00

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

AH-32
AH-34
AH-36
AH-38
AH-40
AH-42
AH-44
AH-46
AH-48

PID1 multistage target value 11
PID1 multistage target value 12
PID1 multistage target value 13
PID1 multistage target value 14
PID1 multistage target value 15
PID1 target value 2 input destination selection
PID1 target value 2 set value
PID1 target value 3 input destination selection
PID1 target value 3 set value

AH-50

PID1 target value 1 operator selection

AH-51
AH-52
AH-53

PID1 feedback Data 1 Input destination selection
PID1 feedback Data 2 Input destination selection
PID1 feedback Data 3 Input destination selection

AH-54

PID1 feedback Data operator selection

AH-60
AH-61
AH-62
AH-63
AH-64
AH-65
AH-66
AH-67

PID1 gain switch method selection
PID1 proportional gain 1
PID1 integral gain 1
PID1 differential gain 1
PID1 proportional gain 2
PID1 integral gain 2
PID1 differential gain 2
PID1 gain switch time

AH-70

PID feed-forward selection

AH-71
AH-72
AH-73
AH-74
AH-75
AH-76
AH-78
AH-80

PID1 changeable range
PID1 deviation excessive level
PID1 feedback comparison signal OFF level
PID1 feedback comparison signal ON level
PID soft-start function selection
PID soft-start target level
Acceleration time for PID soft-start
PID soft-start time

AH-81

PID start abnormal judgment implement selection

AH-82

PID start abnormality judgment level

AH-85

PID sleep condition selection

AH-86
AH-87
AH-88
AH-89
AH-90
AH-91
AH-92

PID sleep start level
PID sleep operation time
Boost selection prior to PID sleep
Boost time prior to PID sleep
Boost amount prior to PID sleep
Minimum operation time prior to PID sleep
PID sleep status minimum retaining time

AH-93
AH-94
AH-95
AH-96

Data range

Initialvalue-100.00~100.00 ＊0.00

Same as AH-07-100.00~100.00 (%) ＊Same as AH-07-100.00~100.00 (%) ＊01 (Addition)/02 (Subtraction)
03(Multiplication)/04 (Division)

00
0.00
00
0.00

Same as AH-07
01 (Addition)/02 (Subtraction)
03 (Multiplication)/04 (Division)
00 (Only gain 1)/01 ([PRO] terminal switch)
0.0~100.0
0.0~3600.0 (s)0.00~100.00 (s)0.0~100.0
0.00~3600.0 (s)0.00~100.00 (s)0~10000 (ms)00 (Disabled)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)
0.00~100.00 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0.00~100.00 (%)
0.00~3600.00 (s)0.00~100.00 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: error output)
02 (Enabled: warning)
0.00~100.00 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Low output)
02 ([SLEP] terminal)
0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00~100.00 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0.00~100.00 (s)0.00~100.00 (%)

Note

Page

4-27

01
01
00
00
01
00
1.0
1.0
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.00
100

4-28

00
0.00
3.00
100.000.00
00
100.00
30.00
0.00
00
0.00

4-29

00
0.00
0.00
00
0.00
0.00

0.00~100.00 (s)0.00

PID wake condition selection

01 (Deviation amount)/02 (Low feedback)03 ([WAKE] terminal)

01

PID wake start level
PID wake operation time
PID wake start deviation amount0.00~100.00 (%)

0.00

4-30

＊Data range differs depending on [AH-04] - [AH-06].

App.1-10

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

AJ-01

PID2 selection

AJ-02
AJ-03
AJ-04
AJ-05
AJ-06

PID2 deviation negative
PID2 unit selection
PID2 scale adjustment (0%)
PID2 scale adjustment (100%)
PID2 scale adjustment (decimal point)

AJ-07

PID2 target value input destination selection

AJ-10

PID2 target value set value

AJ-12

PID2 feedback data input destination
selection

AJ-13
AJ-14
AJ-15
AJ-16
AJ-17
AJ-18
AJ-19

PID2 proportional gain
PID2 integral gain
PID2 differential gain
PID2 changeable range
PID2 deviation excessive level
PID2 feedback comparison signal OFF level
PID2 feedback comparison signal ON level

AJ-21

PID3 selection

AJ-22
AJ-23
AJ-24
AJ-25
AJ-26
AJ-27
AJ-30

AJ-33
AJ-34
AJ-35
AJ-36
AJ-37
AJ-38
AJ-39

PID3 deviation negative
PID3 unit selection
PID3 scale adjustment (0%)
PID3 scale adjustment (100%)
PID3 scale adjustment (decimal point)
PID3 target value input destination selection
PID3 target value set value
PID3 feedback data input destination
selection
PID3 proportional gain
PID3 integral gain
PID3 differential gain
PID3 changeable range
PID3 deviation excessive level
PID3 feedback comparison signal OFF level
PID3 feedback comparison signal ON level

AJ-41

PID4 selection

AJ-42
AJ-43
AJ-44
AJ-45
AJ-46
AJ-47
AJ-50

PID4 deviation negative
PID4 unit selection
PID4 scale adjustment (0%)
PID4 scale adjustment (100%)
PID4 scale adjustment (decimal point)
PID4 target value input destination 1 selection
PID4 target value set value 2
PID4 feedback data input destination
selection
PID4 proportional gain
PID4 integral gain
PID4 differential gain
PID4 changeable range
PID4 deviation excessive level
PID4 feedback comparison signal OFF level
PID4 feedback comparison signal ON level

AJ-32

AJ-52
AJ-53
AJ-54
AJ-55
AJ-56
AJ-57
AJ-58
AJ-59

Data range
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled without reverse output)
02 (Enabled with reverse output)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
See <Unit options> at the end of Appendix-1-10000~10000
0~400 (None)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)
11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)/15 (PID1 output)-100.00~100.00 (%) *1)
00 (None)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)
11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)
0.0~100.0
0.0~3600.0 (s)0.00~100.00 (s)0.00~100.00 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled without reverse output)
02 (Enabled with reverse output)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
See <Unit options> at the end of Appendix-1-10000~10000
0~4Same as AJ-12-100.00~100.00 (%) *2)
Same as AJ-12
0.0~100.0
0.00~3600.0 (s)0.0~100.00 (s)0.00~100.00 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled without reverse output)
02 (Enabled with reverse output)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
See <Unit options> at the end of Appendix-1-10000~10000
0~4Same as AJ-12-100.00~100.00 (%) *3)

Initial
value

00
01
0
10000
2

07

02

1.0
1.0
0.00
0.00
3.00
100.00
0.00
00
00
01
0
10000
2
07
0.00

4-31

02
1.0
0.00
0.00
3.00
100.00
0.00
00
00
01
0
10000
2
07
0.00

0.0~100.0
0.00~3600.0 (s)0.0~100.00 (s)

1.0
1.0
0.00
0.00
3.00
100.000.00

App.1-11

4-30

0.00

02

*1) Data range differs depending on [AJ-04] - [AJ-06].
*2) Data range differs depending on [AJ-24] - [AJ-26].
*3) Data range differs depending on [AJ-44] - [AJ-46].

Page

00

Same as AJ-12

0.00~100.00 (%)

Note

4-32

4-33

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Parameter mode (B code：Fine Tuning Function)
Code

Name

Data range

bA101

First frequency upper limit selection

00 (Disable)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)
11 (Option 3)/12 (Pulse string input (main body))
13 (Pulse string input HF-FB)

bA102
bA103

First frequency upper limiterFirst frequency lower limiter

0.00~590.00 (Hz)

bA110

bA111

First torque limit selection

First torque limit parameter mode selection

bA116
bA120
bA121

First torque limit 1(Four quadrant normal powered)First torque limit 2(Four quadrant reverse rotation regeneration)
First torque limit 3(Four quadrant reverse powered)First torque limit 4(Four quadrant normal rotation regeneration)
First torque LAD stop selection
First overcurrent suppression selection
First overcurrent suppression levelbA122

First stall prevention 1 selection

bA123
bA124
bA126
bA127
bA128

First stall prevention level 1First stall prevention 1 operation timeFirst stall prevention 2 selection
First stall prevention level 2First stall prevention 2 operation timebA-30

Instantaneous power failure non-stop
selection

bA112
bA113
bA114
bA115

bA-31
bA-32
bA-34
bA-36
bA-37
bA-38

Instantaneous power failure non-stop function
starting voltage
Instantaneous power failure non-stop target
level
Instantaneous power failure non-stop
deceleration time
Instantaneous power failure non-stop
deceleration starting range
Instantaneous power failure non-stop
constant DC voltage control P gain
Instantaneous power failure non-stop
constant DC voltage control I gain

bA140

First overvoltage suppression function

bA141

First overvoltage suppression level setting

bA142
bA144
bA145

First overvoltage suppression operating timeFirst DC voltage control P gainFirst DC voltage control I gain

bA146

First over-excitation function selection

bA147
bA148

First over-excitation filter time constantFirst over-excitation voltage gain

bA149

First over-excitation suppression level setting

00 (Disable)/01 (VRF terminal input)
02 (IRF terminal input)/03 (VF2 terminal input)
04 (Ai4 terminal input)/05 (Ai5 terminal input)
06 (Ai6 terminal input)/07 (Parameter setting)08 (RS 485)/09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)
11 (Option 3)
00 (Four quadrant specific)
01 ([TRQ] terminal switch)

0.0~500.0 (%)(Limited at a torque equivalent to 200% of inverter
ND rating)

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)(0.00 to 2.50) × Inverter rated current (A)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Accelerate at constant speed)
02 (Only constant speed)
03 (Accelerate at constant speed/Increase speed atregeneration)(0.20 to 2.50) × Inverter rated current (A)0.10~3600.00 (s)Same as bA122
Same as bA123
Same as bA124
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: deceleration stop)
02 (Enabled: no recovery)
03 (Enabled: with recovery)

Initial
value

00

0.00

4-33
00

200.0

00
00
*1)
01
*2)
1.00
01
*2)
1.00
00
220.0
440.0
360.0
720.0

0.01~3600.00 (s)1.00

0.00~10.00 (Hz)0.00

0.00~5.00

0.20

0.00~150.00 (s)1.00*1) 2.00 × Inverter rated current (A)*2) 1.70 × Inverter rated current (A)App.1-12Page

07(200V class) 0.0 - 410.0 (V)(400V class) 0.0 - 820.0 (V)

00 (Disabled)
01 (DC voltage constant deceleration)
02 (Acceleration only at deceleration)
03 (Acceleration at constant speed/deceleration)(200V class) 330.0 - 400.0 (V)(400V class) 660.0 - 800.0 (V)
0.00~3600.00 (s)0.00~5.00
0.00~150.00 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Regular operation)
02 (Operation only at deceleration)
03 (Level mode)
04 (Level mode only at deceleration)
0.00~1.00(s)50~400 (%)(200V class) 330.0 - 400.0 (V)(400V class) 660.0 - 800.0 (V)

Note

4-34

00
380.0
760.0
1.00
0.20
1.00
00
0.30
100
360.0
720.0

4-35

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
bA-60

Braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR)
use ratebA-61

Braking resistor circuit (DBTR) selection

bA-62

Braking resistor circuit (DBTR) ON levelbA-63

Braking resistor circuit (DBTR) resistancebA-70

Selection of the cooling fan operation

bA-71
bA201
bA202
bA203
bA210
bA211

bA216
bA220
bA221
bA222
bA223
bA224
bA226
bA227
bA228
bA240

Clear cumulative operating time of cooling fan
Second frequency upper limit selection
Second frequency upper limiter
Second frequency lower limiter
Second torque limit selection
Second torque limit parameter mode selection
Second torque limit 1(Four quadrant normal powering)
Second torque limit 2(Four quadrant reverse rotation regeneration)
Second torque limit 3(Four quadrant reverse powering)
Second torque limit 4(Four quadrant normal rotation regeneration)
Second torque LAD stop selection
Second overcurrent suppression selection
Second overcurrent suppression level
Second stall prevention 1 selection
Second stall prevention level 1
Second stall prevention 1 operation time
Second stall prevention 2 selection
Second stall prevention level 2
Second stall prevention 2 operation time
Second overvoltage suppression function

bA241

Second overvoltage suppression level setting

bA212
bA213
bA214
bA215

bA244
bA245
bA246
bA247
bA248

Second overvoltage suppression operating
time
Second DC voltage control P gain
Second DC voltage control I gain
Second over-excitation function selection
Second over-excitation filter time constant
Second over-excitation voltage gain

bA249

Second over-excitation control level setting

bb101

Carrier frequency

bb102

Sprinkle carrier pattern selection

bb103

Automatic carrier frequency reduction selection

bA242

Data range

Initialvalue

0.0 - 10.0×([bA-63]/minimum resistance)2 (%) *3)

10.0

Name

bb-10

Auto-reset selection

bb-11
bb-12
bb-13
bb-20
bb-21
bb-22
bb-23

Auto-reset alarm selection
Auto-reset waiting timeAuto-reset countInstantaneous power failure retry countUndervoltage retry count
Overcurrent retry count
Overvoltage retry countbb-24

Selection of instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage retrybb-25

Allowable instantaneous power failure time

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: disabled at stop)
02 (Enabled: enabled at stop)(200V class) 330.0 - 400.0 (V)(400V class) 660.0 - 800.0 (V)Minimum resistance（R） - 600 (Ω)
00 (Always ON)/01 (ON during operation)
02 (Temperature dependent)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Clear)
Same as bA101
Same as bA102
Same as bA103
Same as bA110
Same as bA111

Note

Page

00
360.0
720.0
Min.R

*3)
00
00
00
0.00
07
00

Same as bA112
Same as bA113
170.0
Same as bA114
4-35

Same as bA115
Same as bA116
Same as bA120
Same as bA121
Same as bA122
Same as bA123
Same as bA124
Same as bA126
Same as bA127
Same as bA128
Same as bA140(200V class) 330.0 - 400.0 (V)(400V class) 660.0 - 800.0 (V)

*1)
01
*2)
1.00
00
*2)
1.00
00
380.0
760.0

Same as bA142

1.00

Same as bA144
Same as bA145
Same as bA146
Same as bA147
Same as bA148(200V class) 330.0 - 400.0 (V)(400V class) 660.0 - 800.0 (V)[Ub-03]=02: Normal duty：0.5~16.0 (kHz)[Ub-03]=01: Low duty：0.5~12.0 (kHz)[Ub-03]=00: Very low duty：0.5~10.0 (kHz)00 (Disabled)/01 (Pattern 1 enabled)
02 (Pattern 2 enabled)/03 (Pattern 3 enabled)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: current)
02 (Enabled: temperature)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled with operation command OFF)02 (Enable after the setting time)
00 (Output)/01 (Not output)
0~600 (s)
0~10

0.20
1.00
02
0.30
100
360.0
720.0

00

2.0

00

2
3

0~16/255
0
0~500 (0Hz)/01 (Frequency matching)
02 (Frequency entrainment)/03 (Detection speed)
04 (Trip after frequency matching deceleration
stop)
0.3~25.0 (s)*1) 2.00 × Inverter rated current (A)*2) 1.70 × Inverter rated current (A)*3) The minimum resistance varies depending on inverter models.

App.1-13

01
1.0

4-36

List of Parameters

Appendix 1

Code
bb-26
bb-27

Name
Retry wait time after instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage
Instantaneous power failure
undervoltage tripping selection during
stop

Data range
0.3~100.0 (s)0.3

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled at stop)
02 (Disabled at stop and deceleration stop)00

00 (0Hz)/01 (Frequency matching)
02 (Frequency entrainment)/03 (Detection speed)
04 (Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop)
0.3~100.0 (s)00 (0Hz)/01 (Frequency matching)
02 (Frequency entrainment)/03 (Detection speed)
04 (Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop)
0.3~100.0 (s)00 (0Hz)/01 (Frequency matching)
02 (Frequency entrainment)/03 (Detection speed)
00 (0Hz)/01 (Frequency matching)
02 (Frequency entrainment)/03 (Detection speed)

bb-28

Overcurrent trip/retry selection

bb-29

Retry wait time after overcurrent

bb-30

Overvotage tripping
retry selection

bb-31

Overvoltage retry standby timebb-40

Restart mode after MBS releasebb-41

Restart mode after RST releasebb-42

Frequency matching lower limit setting

0.00~590.00 (Hz)bb-43

Level of frequency pull-in restart(0.00 to 2.50) × Inverter rated current (A)Constant (frequency) of frequency pull-in
restartConstant (voltage) of frequency pull-in
restart

0.10~30.00 (s)Overcurrent suppression level offrequency pull-in restart(0.20 to 2.50) × Inverter rated current (A)

bb-44
bb-45
bb-46

bb-50
bb160
bb-61

Start frequency selection of frequency
pull-in restart
Frequency matching filter gainFirst overcurrent detection level
Excessive voltage of accepted power

bb-62

Incoming overvoltage level selection

bb-64
bb-65
bb-66
bb-67
bb-70
bb-80
bb-81
bb-82

Ground fault detection selection
Input phase loss selection
Output phase loss selection
Output phase loss detection sensitivity
Thermistor error level
Over-speed error detection level setting
Over-speed error detection time
Operation for speed deviation error
Speed deviation error detection levelsetting
Speed deviation error detection time
Behavior when the position deviation isabnormalAbnormal position deviation detection
level
Abnormal position deviation time
Second carrier frequency
Second sprinkle carrier pattern selection
Second automatic carrier frequency
reduction selection
Second overcurrent detection level

bb-47

bb-83
bb-84
bb-85
bb-86
bb-87
bb201
bb202
bb203
bb260

Initialvalue

00 (Cutoff frequency)/01 (Maximum frequency)
02 (Setting frequency)
0~1000(%)
Depend on the inverter model
00 (Warning)/01 (Error)(200V class) 300.0 - 410.0 (V)(400V class) 600.0 - 820.0 (V)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)

0.3
4-36
01
0.3
00
0.00
1.00×
Inverterratedcurrent
0.50
1.00×
Inverterratedcurrent
00
50
00
390.0
780.0
01
00
10
3000
135.0
0.5
00

0.0~100.0 (%)

15.0

0.0~5.0 (s)0.5

00 (Warning)/01 (Error)00

0.0~65535 (×100pls)

4096

0.0~5.0 (s)Same as bb101
Same as bb102

0.5
2.0

Same as bb160

App.1-14

Page

01

1~100 (%)
0~10000 (Ω)
0.0~150.0 (%)
0.0~5.0 (s)00 (Warning)/01 (Error)

Same as bb103

Note

00

4-37

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

bC110

First electronic thermal level

bC111

First electronic thermal characteristics selection

bC112
bC113
bC-14
bC120
bC121
bC122
bC123
bC124
bC125

First electronic thermal subtraction function selection
First electronic thermal subtraction time
Electronic thermal counter memory at power-off
First free electronic thermal frequency 1First free electronic thermal current 1
First free electronic thermal frequency 2First free electronic thermal current 2
First free electronic thermal frequency 3First free electronic thermal current 3

00 (Reduction characteristics)
01 (Constant torque characteristics)
02 (Arbitrary setting)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
1~1000 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0.00~[bC122] (Hz)(0.00~3.00)× Inverter rated current[bC120]~[bC124] (Hz)(0.00~3.00)× Inverter rated current[bC122]~590.00 (Hz)(0.00~3.00)× Inverter rated current

bC210

Second electronic thermal level

Same as bC110

bC211

Same as bC111
Same as bC112

01

bC213
bC220
bC221
bC222
bC223
bC224
bC225

Second electronic thermal characteristics selection
Second electronic thermal subtraction function
selection
Second electronic thermal subtraction time
Second free electronic thermal frequency 1
Second free electronic thermal current 1
Second free electronic thermal frequency 2
Second free electronic thermal current 2
Second free electronic thermal frequency 3
Second free electronic thermal current 3

01
600
01
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.00× Inverter
rated current
00

600

bd-01

STO input indication selection

bd-02

STO allowable input switch time

bd-03

STO indication selection within allowable input time

bd-04

STOoperation selection after allowable input time

Same as bC113
Same as bC120
Same as bC121
Same as bC122
Same as bC123
Same as bC124
Same as bC125
00 (With indication)
01 (Without indication)/02 (Trip)
0.00~60.00 (s)00 (With indication)
01 (Without indication)
00 (Retain only the condition)
01 (Disabled)/02 (Trip)

bC212

Data range(0.00 - 3.00)× Inverter rated current

Initial value
1.00× Inverter
rated current

Note

Page

00

4-38

0.00

00
1.00
4-39
00

Parameter mode (C code：I/O terminals, RS485)
Code
CA-01
CA-02
CA-03
CA-04
CA-05
CA-06
CA-07
CA-08
CA-09
CA-10
CA-11
CA-21
CA-22
CA-23
CA-24
CA-25
CA-26
CA-27
CA-28
CA-29
CA-30
CA-31
CA-41
CA-42
CA-43
CA-44
CA-45
CA-46
CA-47
CA-48
CA-49
CA-50
CA-51
CA-55

Name
Input terminal function [FR] selection
Input terminal function [RR] selection
Input terminal function [DFL] selection
Input terminal function [DFM] selection
Input terminal function [AUT] selection
Input terminal function [MBS] selection
Input terminal function [JOG] selection
Input terminal function [ES] selection
Input terminal function [RST] selection
Input terminal function [DFH] selection
Input terminal function [DHH] selection
Selection of Input terminal [FR] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [RR] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [DFL] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [DFH] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [AUT] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [MBS] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [JOG] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [ES] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [RST] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [DFH] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of Input terminal [DHH] a/b (NO/NC)
Input terminal [FR] response time
Input terminal [RR] response time
Input terminal [DFL] response time
Input terminal [DFM] response time
Input terminal [AUT] response time
Input terminal [MBS] response time
Input terminal [JOG] response time
Input terminal [ES] response time
Input terminal [RST] response time
Input terminal [DFH] response time
Input terminal [DHH] response timeMulti-step input determination time

Data range

See <List of input terminal functions>

Initial value
001
002
003
004
015
032
029
033
028
005
006

00 (Normally open)
01 (Normally closed)00

0~400 (ms)20~2000 (ms)0

App.1-15

Note

Page

4-40

List of Parameters

Appendix 1

Code
CA-60
CA-61
CA-62
CA-64
CA-66

Name

Data range

UP/DWN target selection
UP/DWN memory selection
UP/DWN UDC mode selection
Acceleration time for UP/DWN functions
Deceleration time for UP/DWN functions

00 (Frequency command)/01 (PID1)
00 (Not save)/01 (Save)
00 (0Hz)/01 (saved data)
0.00~3600.00 (s)CA-70[F-OP] frequency command

CA-71[F-OP] Operation command

CA-72

Reset selection

CA-81
CA-82
CA-83
CA-84

Encoder constant set-up
Encoder phase sequence selection
Motor gear ratio's numerator
Motor gear ratio's denominator
Pulse string input (main body) detection target
selection

CA-90
CA-91

Pulse string input (main body) mode selection

CA-92

Pulse string frequency (main body) scale
Pulse string frequency (main body) filter time
constant
Pulse string frequency (main body) bias size
Pulse string frequency (main body) upperdetection limit
Pulse string frequency(main body) lower detection limit
Pulse count compare-match output ON level
Pulse count compare-match output OFF level
Maximum value for pulse count compare-match
output

CA-93
CA-94
CA-95
CA-96
CA-97
CA-98
CA-99

Code

Name

Cb-01
Cb-03
Cb-04
Cb-05
Cb-06
Cb-07
Cb-11
Cb-13
Cb-14
Cb-15
Cb-16
Cb-17
Cb-21

[VRF] terminal input filter time constant[VRF] terminal start amount[VRF] terminal end amount[VRF] terminal start ratio[VRF] terminal end ratio[VRF] terminal start selection[IRF] terminal input filter time constant[IRF] terminal start amount[IRF] terminal end amount[IRF] terminal start ratio[IRF] terminal end ratio[IRF] terminal start selection[VF2] terminal input filter time constant

Cb-22[VF2] terminal selection

Cb-23
Cb-24
Cb-25
Cb-26
Cb-30
Cb-31
Cb-32
Cb-33
Cb-34
Cb-35

[VF2] terminal start amount[VF2] terminal end amount[VF2] terminal start ratio[VF2] terminal end ratio[VRF] voltage/current bias adjustment[VRF] voltage/current adjustment gain
[IRF] voltage/current bias adjustment[IRF] voltage/current adjustment gain
[VF2] voltage bias adjustment[VF2] voltage adjustment gain

01 (VRF terminal input)/02 (IRF terminal input)
03 (VF2 terminal input)/04 (Ai4 terminal input)
05 (Ai5 terminal input)/06 (Ai6 terminal input)
07 (Parameter setting)/08 (RS 485)
09 (Option 1)/10 (Option 2)/11 (Option 3)
12 (Pulse string input: main unit)
13 (Pulse string input: HF-FB)
14 (Program function)/15 (PID calculation)
16 (Reserved)
00 ([FR]/[RR] terminal)/01 (3 wire)
02 (RUN key on operator keypad)/03 (RS485)
04 (Option 1)/05 (Option 2)/06 (Option 3)
00 (On to Release Trip)/01 (Off to Release Trip)
02 (On to Release at Trip)
03 (Of to Release at Trip)
32~65535 (pls)
00 (Phase-A is leading)/01 (Phase-B is leading)
1~10000

Initial
value
00

Note

Page

30.00

01

00
00
1024
00

4-43

1

00 (Pulse count)/01 (Frequency command)
02 (Speed feedback)/03 (Pulse count)00 (90° phase difference)
01 (forward/reverse rotation command androtation direction)
02 (forward/reverse rotation pulse string)
0.05~32.00 (kHz)

25.00

0.01~2.00 (s)0.10-100.0~100.0 (%)

0.0

00
00

100.0
0.0~100.0 (%)
0.0
000~65535

65535

Data range
1~500 (ms)0.00~100.00 (%)
0.0~ [Cb-06] (%)[Cb-05]~100.0 (%)
00 (Start amount)/01 (0%)
1~500 (ms)0.00~100.00 (%)
0.0~ [Cb-16] (%)[Cb-15]~100.0 (%)
00 (Start amount)/01 (0%)
1~500 (ms)00 (Single)/01 (Added to VRF/IRF: with reversibility)
02 (Added to VRF/IRF: without reversibility)-100.00~100.00 (%)-100.0~[Cb-26][Cb-25]~100.0-100.00~100.00
0~200.00-100.00~100.00
0~200.00-100.00~100.00
0~200.00

App.1-16

Initial
value
500
0.00
100.00
0.0
100.0
01
500
0.00
100.00
20.0
100.0
01
500
00
-100.00
100.00-100.0100.0
0.00
100.000.00
100.000.00
100.00

Note

Page

4-44

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

Cb-40

Thermistor selection

Cb-41
Cb-51
to
Cb-57
CC-01
CC-02
CC-03
CC-04
CC-05
CC-06
CC-07
CC-11
CC-12
CC-13
CC-14
CC-15
CC-16
CC-17
CC-20
CC-21
CC-22
CC-23
CC-24
CC-25
CC-26
CC-27
CC-28
CC-29
CC-30
CC-31
CC-32
CC-33
CC-40
CC-41
CC-42
CC-43
CC-44
CC-45
CC-46
CC-47
CC-48
CC-49
CC-50
CC-51
CC-52
CC-53
CC-54
CC-55
CC-56
CC-57
CC-58
CC-59
CC-60

Thermistor [TH+/TH-] adjustment

Data range
00 (Disabled)
01 (PTC resistance value enabled)02 (NTC resistance value enabled)
0.0~1000.0

Reserved
Selection of output terminal function [UPF]
Selection of output terminal function [DRV]
Selection of output terminal function [X1]Selection of output terminal function [X2]Selection of output terminal function [X3]Selection of output terminal function [RL]
Selection of output terminal function [FL]
Selection of output terminal [UPF] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [DRV] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [X1] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [X2] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [X3] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [RL] a/b (NO/NC)
Selection of output terminal [FL] a/b (NO/NC)
Output terminal [UPF] on-delay time
Output terminal [UPF off-delay time
Output terminal [DRV] on-delay time
Output terminal [DRV] off-delay time
Output terminal [X1] on-delay time
Output terminal [X1] off-delay time
Output terminal [X2] on-delay time
Output terminal [X2] off-delay time
Output terminal [X3] on-delay time
Output terminal [X3] off-delay time
Output terminal [RL] on-delay time
Output terminal [RL] off-delay time
Output terminal [FL] on-delay time
Output terminal [FL] off-delay time
Logical calculation output signal LOG1 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG1 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG1 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG2 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG2 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG2 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG3 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG3 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG3 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG4 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG4 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG4 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG5 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG5 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG5 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG6 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG6 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG6 operator selection
Logical calculation output signal LOG7 selection 1
Logical calculation output signal LOG7 selection 2
Logical calculation output signal LOG7 operator selection

Initial
value

Page

00
100.0

-

-

See <List of output terminal functions>

002
001
003
007
035
000
017

00 (Normally open)
01 (Normally closed)

Note

4-44

00

01

4-45

0.00~100.00 (s)0.00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)

00

See <List of output terminal functions>000

00 (AND)/01 (OR)/02 (XOR)00

App.1-17

4-47

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
Cd-01
Cd-02
Cd-03
Cd-04
Cd-05
Cd-10
Cd-11
Cd-12
Cd-13
Cd-14
Cd-15
Cd-21
Cd-22
Cd-23
Cd-24
Cd-25
Cd-31
Cd-32
Cd-33
Cd-34
Cd-35

00 (PWM)/01 (frequency)

Initialvalue
00

0~3600 (kHz)2880

See the List of output monitor functions[dA-01]Name[FRQ] terminal output form selection[FRQ] terminal standard frequency(for PWM output)[FRQ] terminal output selection[AMV] terminal output selection[AMI] terminal output selection
Analog monitor adjustment mode selection[FRQ] output filter time constant[FRQ] output data type selection[FRQ] bias adjustment[FRQ] gain adjustment[FRQ] output level in the adjustment mode
[AMV] output filter time constant[AMV] output data type selection[AMV] bias adjustment[AMV] gain adjustment[AMV] output level in the adjustment mode
[AMI] output filter time constant[AMI] output data type selection[AMI] bias adjustment[AMI] gain adjustment[AMI] output level in the adjustment mode

Data range

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
1~500 (ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)
1~500 (ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)
1~500 (ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)

100.0

100.0
100
00
20.0
80.0
100.0

CE101

First low current signal output mode selection

CE102
CE103

First low current detection level 1First low current detection level 2(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current

1.00 × Inverter
rated current

CE105First overload prewarning signal output mode
selection

00 (During acceleration/deceleration,
at constant speed)
01 (Only at constant speed)

01

CE106
CE107
CE-10
CE-11
CE-12
CE-13
CE120
CE121
CE122
CE123
CE-30
CE-31
CE-33
CE-34
CE-36
CE-40
CE-41
CE-42
CE-43
CE-44
CE-45
CE-46
CE-47
CE-48
CE-50

First overload prewarning level 1First overload prewarning level 2
Acceleration reaching frequency 1
Deceleration reaching frequency 1
Acceleration reaching frequency 2
Deceleration reaching frequency 2First over torque level (normal powered)First over torque level (reverse regenerative)
First over torque level (reverse powered)First over torque level (normal regenerative)
Electronic thermal warning level (Motor)
Electronic thermal warning level (Inverter)
0-Hz detection value level
Cooling fin heating prewarning level
RUN time/power-on time level
Window comparator [VRF] upper limit level
Window comparator [VRF] lower limit level
Window comparator [VRF] hysteresis range
Window comparator [IRF] upper limit level
Window comparator [IRF] lower limit level
Window comparator [IRF] hysteresis range
Window comparator [VF2] lower limit level
Window comparator [VF2] lower limit level
Window comparator [VF2] hysteresis range[VRF] operation level at disconnection(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current

1.00 × Inverter
rated current[VRF] operation level selection at disconnection

CE-52[IRF] operation level at disconnection

CE-53[IRF] operation level selection at disconnection

CE-54[VF2] operation level at disconnection

CE-55[VF2] operation level selection at disconnection

Initial value

0.00

0.0~500.0 (%)

100.0

0~100 (%)
0~10 (%)
0~100 (%)
0~10 (%)-100~100 (%)
0~10 (%)
0~100 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)
02 (Enabled: within the range)
0~100(%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)
02 (Enabled: within the range)-100~100(%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)
02 (Enabled: within the range)

App.1-18

Note

Page

01

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0~200 (°C)
0~100000 (hr)

4-47

100
00
0.0

Name

0.00~100.00 (%)

Page

00
100
00
0.0

Code

CE-51

Data range
00 (During acceleration/deceleration,
at constant speed)
01 (Only at constant speed)

Note

4-48

85.00
0.50
120
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
-100
0
0
00
0
00
0
00

4-49

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

CE201

Second low current signal output mode selection

CE202
CE203

Second low current detection level 1
Second low current detection level 2(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current

1.00 × Inverter
rated current

CE205

Second overload prewarning signal output mode
selection

00 (During acceleration/deceleration,
at constant speed)
01 (Only at constant speed)01(0.00 to 2.00) × Inverter rated current

1.00 × Inverter
rated current

CE206
CE207
CE220
CE221
CE222
CE223

Code

Second overload prewarning level 1
Second overload prewarning level 2
Second over torque level (normal powered)
Second over torque level(reverse regenerative)
Second over torque level (reverse powered)
Second over torque level(normal regenerative)

Data range
00 (During acceleration/deceleration,
at constant speed)
01 (Only at constant speed)

0.0~500.0 (%)

Name

CF-01

Communication transmission speed selection(baudrate selection)

CF-02

Communication station number selection

CF-03

Communication parity selection

CF-04

Communication stop bit selection

CF-05

Communication error selection

CF-06
CF-07

Communication timeout time
Communication waiting time

CF-08

Communication method selection

CF-11
CF-20
CF-21
CF-22
CF-23
CF-24
CF-25
CF-26
CF-27
CF-28
CF-29
CF-30
CF-31
CF-32
CF-33
CF-34
CF-35
CF-36
CF-37
CF-38
CF-50

Resister dataA,V% conversion function
EzCOM start INV station number
EzCOM stop INV station number
EzCOM start selection
Numer of EzCOM data sets
EzCOM transmission destination station number 1
EzCOM transmission destination register 1
EzCOM transmission source register 1
EzCOM transmission destination station number 2
EzCOM transmission destination register 2
EzCOM transmission source register 2
EzCOM transmission destination station number 3
EzCOM transmission destination register 3
EzCOM transmission source register 3
EzCOM transmission destination station number 4
EzCOM transmission destination register 4
EzCOM transmission source register 4
EzCOM transmission destination station number 5
EzCOM transmission destination register 5
EzCOM transmission source register 5
USB station number selection

Initial value

Initial
value

00
01
02
0.00
2
01
00

00 (ECOM) terminal)/01 (Modbus spec)
01~05
1~247

00
05
1

0000~FFFF

0000

1~247
0000~FFFF
1~247
0000~FFFF
1~247

App.1-19

Page

1

01

0000~FFFF

Note

04

01~08

0000~FFFF

4-49

100.0

03 (2400bps)/04 (4800bps)/05 (9600bps)
06 (19.2kbps)/07 (38.4kbps)/08 (57.6kbps)
09 (76.8kbps)/10 (115.2kbps)
1~247
00 (Without parity)/01 (Even number parity)
02 (Odd number parity)
01 (1bit)/02 (2bit)
00 (Error)/01 (Trip after deceleration stop)
02 (Ignore)/03 (Free run)/04 (Deceleration stop)
0.00~100.00 (s)0~1000 (ms)01 (Modbus-RTU)/02 (EzCOM)
03 (EzCOM management)
00 (A, V)/01 (%)

1~247

Page

01

Data range

1~247

Note

2
0000
3
0000
4
0000
5
0000
1

4-50

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Parameter mode (H code：Motor Control)
Code

Name

HA-01

Auto-tuning selection

HA-02

Operation command for auto-tuning

HA-03
HA110
HA112
HA113
HA115
HA120
HA121
HA122
HA123
HA124
HA125
HA126
HA127
HA128
HA129
HA130
HA131
HA132
HA133
HA134
HA210
HA212
HA213
HA215
HA220
HA221
HA222
HA223
HA224
HA225
HA226
HA227
HA228
HA229
HA230
HA231
HA232
HA233
HA234

Online tuning selection
First stability constantFirst stabilization ramp function end ratio
First stabilization ramp function start ratio
First speed responseFirst gain switch selection
First gain switch timeFirst gain switch intermediate frequency 1First gain switch intermediate frequency 2First gain mapping maximum frequency
First gain mapping P gain 1
First gain mapping I gain 1
First gain mapping P control P gain 1
First gain mapping P gain 2First gain mapping I gain 2First gain mapping P control P gain 2First gain mapping P gain 3First gain mapping I gain 3First gain mapping P gain 4First gain mapping I gain 4
Second stability constant
Second stabilization ramp function end ratio
Second stabilization ramp function start ratio
Second speed response
Second gain switch selection
Second gain switch time
Second gain switch intermediate frequency 1
Second gain switch intermediate frequency 2
Second gain mapping maximum frequency
Second gain mapping P gain 2
Second gain mapping I gain 2
Second gain mapping P control P gain 2
Second gain mapping P gain 2
Second gain mapping I gain 2
Second gain mapping P control P gain 2
Second gain mapping P gain 3
Second gain mapping I gain 3
Second gain mapping P gain 4
Second gain mapping I gain 4

Code

Name

Initialvalue

Data range
00 (Disabled)/01 (Non-rotation)/02 (Rotation)
03 (IVMS)
00 (RUN key on the operator keypad)
01 ([AA111]/[AA211])
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0~1000 (%)

0~1000 (%)
00 ([CAS] terminal)/01 (setting switch)
0~10000 (ms)

100
30
10
32
00
100

0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.00

0.0~1000.0 (%)

100.0

0~1000 (%)

100
30
10
32
00
100
00
100
0.00

0~100 (%)

0~100 (%)
0~1000 (%)
00 ([CAS] terminal)/01 (setting switch)
0~10000 (ms)0.00~590.00 (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (%)

Data range

100.0

Initial valueFirst IM motor capacity selection
Selection of number of first IM motor poles
First IM base frequency
First IM maximum frequency

0.01~75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (poles)＊
4

10.00~590.00 (Hz)

60.00

Hb106

First IM motor's rated voltage

1~1000 (V)

Hb108
Hb110
Hb112
Hb114
Hb116
Hb118
Hb130
Hb131

First IM motor's rated current
First IM motor constant R1First IM motor constant R2First motor constant L
First IM motor constant Io
First IM motor constant JFirst minimum frequency
First reduced voltage start time

0.01~10000.00 (A)

Hb102
Hb103
Hb104
Hb105

4-51

4-52

03

Motor setting, 1st-motor

Page

00

00：IE1 motor/01：AF motor
02：d2G4 motor/03：IE3 motor

Hb101

Note

Note

Page

4-52

200 V class : 200
400 V class : 400

0.000001~1000.000000 (Ω)
0.000001~1000.000000 (mH)0.01~10000.00 (A)0.00001~10000.00000 (kgm2)
0.10~10.00 (Hz)0~2000 (ms)

＊Varies depending on inverter models and settings of duty rating.

App.1-20

＊
4-53
0.50
36

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

Hb140

First manual torque boost operation mode
selection

Hb141
Hb142
Hb145

Data range
00 (Disabled)/01 (Always enabled)
02 (Enabled only for forward revolution)
03 (Enabled only for reverse revolution)
0.0~20.0 (%)
0.0~50.0 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)

Initial value

Hb180
Hb201

Second motor setting

Hb202

0.01~75.00 (kW)＊

2 to 48 (poles)

4

Hb204
Hb205

Second IM motor capacity selection
Selection of number of second IM motor
poles
Second IM base frequency
Second IM maximum frequency

Hb206

Second IM motor's rated voltage

1~1000 (V)

Hb208
Hb210
Hb212
Hb214
Hb216
Hb218
Hb230
Hb231

Second IM motor's rated current
Second IM motor constant R1
Second IM motor constant R2
Second IM motor constant L
Second IM motor constant Io
Second IM motor constant J
Second minimum frequency
Second reduced voltage start time

0.01~10000.00 (A)

Hb240

Second manual torque boost operation
mode selection

Hb150
Hb151
Hb152
Hb153
Hb154
Hb155
Hb156
Hb157
Hb158
Hb159
Hb160
Hb161
Hb162
Hb163
Hb170
Hb171

Hb203

Hb241
Hb242
Hb245
Hb246
Hb250
Hb251
Hb252
Hb253
Hb254
Hb255
Hb256
Hb257
Hb258
Hb259
Hb260
Hb261
Hb262
Hb263
Hb270
Hb271
Hb280

Second amount of manual torque boost
Second manual torque boost break point
Second energy-saving operation selection
Second energy-saving response/accuracy
adjustment
Second free V/f frequency 1
Second free V/f voltage 1
Second free V/f frequency 2
Second free V/f voltage 2
Second free V/f frequency 3
Second free V/f voltage 3
Second free V/f frequency 4
Second free V/f voltage 4
Second free V/f frequency 5
Second free V/f voltage 5
Second free V/f frequency 6
Second free V/f voltage 6
Second free V/f frequency 7
Second free V/f voltage 7
Second slip compensation I gain withsensor (V/f with sensor)
Second slip compensation I gain withsensor (V/f with sensor)
Second output voltage gain

1.0
0.8
00

0.0~100.0(%)

50.0

0.00~[Hb152] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb150]~[Hb154] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb152]~[Hb156] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb154]~[Hb158] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb156]~[Hb160] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb158]~[Hb162] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb160]~[Hb104] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)

0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0

0~1000 (%)
0~255 (%)
00：IE1 motor/01：AF motor
02：d2G4 motor/03：IE3 motor

10.00~590.00 (Hz)

Page

01

First amount of manual torque boost
First manual torque boost break pointFirst energy-saving operation selection
First energy-saving response/accuracy
adjustment
First free V/f frequency 1First free V/f voltage 1
First free V/f frequency 2First free V/f voltage 2First free V/f frequency 3First free V/f voltage 3
First free V/f frequency 4First free V/f voltage 4First free V/f frequency 5First free V/f voltage 5First free V/f frequency 6First free V/f voltage 6First free V/f frequency 7First free V/f voltage 7First slip compensation P gain with sensor(V/f with sensor)
First slip compensation I gain with sensor(V/f with sensor)
First output voltage gain

Hb146

Note

4-53

100

03

60.00
200 V class : 200
400 V class : 400

0.000001~1000.000000 (Ω)
0.000001~1000.000000 (mH)0.01~10000.00 (A)0.00001~10000.00000 (kgm2)
0.10~10.00 (Hz)0~2000 (ms)00 (Disabled)/01 (Always enabled)
02 (Enabled only for forward revolution)
03 (Enabled only for reverse revolution)
0.0~20.0 (%)
0.0~50.0 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)

＊

0.50
36
01
0.0
00

0.0~100.0 (%)

50.0

0.00~[Hb252] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb250]~[Hb254] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb252]~[Hb256] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb254]~[Hb258] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb256]~[Hb260] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb258]~[Hb262] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)[Hb260]~[Hb204] (Hz)0.0~1000.0 (V)

0
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0

0~1000 (%)
0~255 (%)

＊Varies depending on inverter models and settings of duty rating.

App.1-21

100

4-54

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

HC101
HC102
HC110
HC111
HC112

HC214
HC215
HC220
HC221
HC237
HC240
HC241
HC242
Hd102
Hd103
Hd104
Hd105
Hd106
Hd108
Hd110
Hd112
Hd114
Hd116
Hd118
Hd130
Hd131

First automatic torque boost voltage compensation gainFirst automatic torque boost slip compensation gainFirst zero-speed range limiter (IM-0Hz)
First amount of boost at the start (IM-SLV)First amount of boost at the start (IM-oHz)First selection of secondary-resistance correction that is
conducted or not.
First selection of reversal prevention
First selection for the torque transformation
First time constant for torque current command filter
First speed feed forward gainFirst flux setting level
First forcing level
First modulation threshold 1First modulation threshold 2Second automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain
Second automatic torque boost slip compensation gain
Second zero-speed range limiter (IM-0Hz)
Second amount of boost at the start (IM-SLV)
Second amount of boost at the start (IM-oHz)
Second selection of whether a secondary-resistance correction
is to be conducted.
Second selection of reversal prevention
Second selection for the torque transformation
Second time constant for torque current command filter
Second speed feed forward gain
Second flux setting level
Second forcing level
Second modulation threshold 1
Second modulation threshold 2First SM (PMM) motor capacity selection
First selection of number of SM (PMM) motor poles
First SM (PMM) base frequency
First SM (PMM) maximum frequency
First SM (PMM) motor's rated voltage
First SM (PMM) motor's rated current
First SM (PMM) motor's constant R
First SM (PMM) motor's constant Ld
First SM (PMM) motor's constant Lq
First SM (PMM) motor's constant Ke
First SM (PMM) motor's constant JFirst SM (PMM) minimum frequency
First SM (PMM) no-load current

Hd132

First SM (PMM) start method selection

Hd133

Hd135
Hd136
Hd137
Hd-41
Hd-42

First SM (PMM) initial position estimation zero-V stand-by times
First SM (PMM) initial position estimation detection stand-by
timesFirst SM (PMM) initial position estimation detection times
First SM (PMM) initial position estimation voltage gainFirst initial position estimation magnetic-pole position offset
IVMS carrier frequency*2)
Filter gain of IVMS detection current
*2)

Hd-43

Open-phase voltage detection gain selection.

Hd-44
Hd-45
Hd-46
Hd-47
Hd-48
Hd-49
Hd-50
Hd-51
Hd-52
Hd-58

Selection of open-phase switch threshold correction.
*2)
Speed control P gain
*2)
Speed control I gain
*2)
Waiting time for open-phase switching*2)
Restriction on the rotation-direction determination*2)
Adjustment of the timing for detecting the open-phase voltage *2)
Minimum pulse-width adjustment*2)
Current limit of IVMS threshold*2)
IVMS threshold gain
*2)
IVMS carrier-frequency switching start/finish point
*2)

HC113
HC114
HC115
HC120
HC121
HC137
HC140
HC141
HC142
HC201
HC202
HC210
HC211
HC212
HC213

Hd134

Data range*2)*1) Varies depending on inverter models and settings of duty rating.
*2) Hd-41 to 58 are reserved parameters.

App.1-220~255 (%)

Initial
value

Note

Page

100

0~100 (%)
0~50 (%)

0
10

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)00

00 (Torque)/01 (Current)
0~100 (ms)0~10000.0~100.0 (%)
0~1000 (%)

01
2
0
80.0
100

0~133 (%)

115

0~255 (%)

100

0~100 (%)

80
0
10

4-55

0~50 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)

00

Same as HC115
0~100 (ms)0~1000Same as HC137
Same as HC140
Same as HC141
Same as HC142
0.01~75.00 (kW)
2 to 48 (poles)

01
2
0
80.0
100
115

10.00~590.00 (Hz)
1~1000 (V)
0.01~10000.00 (A)0.000001~1000.000000 (Ω)*1)

0.000001~1000.000000 (mH)
0.1~100000.0 (mVs/rad)
0.00001~10000.00000 (kgm2)
0~50 (%)
0~100 (%)
00 (Position estimation disabled)
01 (Position estimation enabled)
0~255
0~200 (%)
0~359 (deg)0.5~16.0 (kHz)0~100000 (Gain 0)/01 (Gain 1)
02 (Gain 2)/03 (Gain 3)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0~10000~10000
0~100000 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0~1000

8
10
00
10
4-56
30
100
0
2.0
100
00
01
100
15
01
10
100

0~255

100

0~50 (%)

5

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

Hd202
Hd203
Hd204
Hd205
Hd206
Hd208
Hd210
Hd212
Hd214
Hd216
Hd218
Hd230
Hd231
Hd232

Second SM (PMM) motor capacity selection
Second selection of number of SM (PMM) motor poles
Second SM (PMM) base frequency
Second SM (PMM) maximum frequency
Second SM (PMM) motor's rated voltage
Second SM (PMM) motor's rated current
Second SM (PMM) motor's constant R
Second SM (PMM) motor's constant Ld
Second SM (PMM) motor's constant Lq
Second SM (PMM) motor's constant Ke
Second SM (PMM) motor's constant J
Second SM (PMM) minimum frequency
Second SM (PMM) no-load current
Second SM (PMM) start method selection
Second SM (PMM) initial position estimation zero-V stand-by
times
Second SM (PMM) initial position estimation detection stand-by
times
Second SM (PMM) initial position estimation detection times
Second SM (PMM) initial position estimation voltage gain
Second initial position estimation magnetic-pole position offset

Hd233
Hd234
Hd235
Hd236
Hd237

Data range
Same as Hd-102
Same as Hd-103
Same as Hd-104
Same as Hd-105
Same as Hd-106
Same as Hd-108
Same as Hd-110
Same as Hd-112
Same as Hd-114
Same as Hd-116
Same as Hd-118
Same as Hd-130
Same as Hd-131
Same as Hd-132

Initial
value

Note

Page

*1)

4-57
8
10
00

Same as Hd-133
10Same as Hd-134
Same as Hd-135
Same as Hd-136
Same as Hd-137

30
100
0

*1) Varies depending on inverter models and settings of duty rating.

Parameter mode (O code：Option Card)
Code

Name

Data range

oA-10
oA-11

Operation selection when option error occurs (slot 1)
Communication monitoring timer setting (slot1)

oA-12

Operation setting at the time of communication error(slot1)00 (Error)/01 (Continue operation)
0.00~100.00 (s)00 (Error)/01 (Trip after deceleration stop)
02 (Ignore)/03 (Free run)04 (Deceleration stop)
00 (Operation command disabled)01 (Operation command enabled)
00 (Error)/01 (Continue operation)
0.00~100.00 (s)00 (Error)/01 (Trip after deceleration stop)
02 (Ignore)/03 (Free run)04 (Deceleration stop)
00 (Operation command disabled)01 (Operation command enabled)
00 (Error)/01 (Continue operation)
0.00~100.00 (s)00 (Error)/01 (Trip after deceleration stop)
02 (Ignore)/03 (Free run)04 (Deceleration stop)
00 (Operation command disabled)01 (Operation command enabled)
32~65535 (pls)
00 (Phase-A is leading)
01 (Phase-B is leading)

oA-13
oA-20
oA-21
oA-22
oA-23
oA-30
oA-31
oA-32
oA-33
ob-01

Selection of operation command behavior at start(slot 1)
Operation selection when option error occurs (slot 2)
Communication monitoring timer setting (slot 2)
Operation setting at the time of communication error(slot 2)
Selection of operation command behavior at start(slot 2)
Operation selection when option error occurs (slot 3)
Communication monitoring timer setting (slot 3)
Operation setting at the time of communication error(slot 3)
Selection of operation command behavior at start(slot 3)
Encoder constant set-up (option)

ob-02

Encoder phase sequence selection (option)

ob-03
ob-04

Motor gear ratio's numerator (option)
Motor gear ratio's denominator (option)
Pulse train input SA/SB (option) detection target
selection

ob-10
ob-11

Pulse train input (option) mode selection

ob-12
ob-13
ob-14
ob-15
ob-16

Pulse train input (option) scale
Pulse train input (option) filter time constantPulse train input (option) bias size
Pulse train input (option) upper detection limit
Pulse train input (option) lower detection limit

1~1000000 (Command)
01 (Pulse string position command)00 (90° phase difference)
01 (forward/reverse rotation command androtation direction)
02 (forward/reverse rotation pulse string)
0.05~200.0 (kHz)0.01~2.00 (s)-100.0~100.0 (%)
0.0~100.0 (%)＊For details, refer to the instruction manual provided together with the each optional cassette.

App.1-23

Initial
value
00
1.00

Note

Page

01

00
1.00
01

00

4-57

1.00
01
00
1024
00
1
00
01
25.00
0.10
0.0
100.0
0.0

4-58

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
oC-01
to
oC-28
oE-01
oE-03
oE-04
oE-05
oE-06
oE-07
oE-11
oE-13
oE-14
oE-15
oE-16
oE-17
oE-21
oE-23
oE-24
oE-25
oE-26
oE-28
oE-29
oE-30
oE-31
oE-32
oE-33
oE-35
oE-36
oE-37
oE-38
oE-39
oE-40
oE-41
oE-42
oE-43
oE-44
oE-45
oE-46
oE-47
oE-48
oE-49
oE-50
oE-51
oE-52
oE-56
oE-57
oE-58
oE-59
oE-60
oE-61
oE-62
oE-63
oE-64
oE-65
oE-66
oE-67
oE-68
oE-69
oE-70

Name

Data range

Initial value

Note

-

-

-

Reserved[Ai4] terminal input filter time constant[Ai4] terminal start amount[Ai4] terminal end amount[Ai4] terminal start ratio[Ai4] terminal end ratio[Ai4] terminal start selection[Ai5] terminal input filter time constant[Ai5] terminal start amount[Ai5] terminal end amount[Ai5] terminal start ratio[Ai5] terminal end ratio[Ai5] terminal start selection[Ai6] terminal input filter time constant[Ai6] terminal start amount[Ai6] terminal end amount[Ai6] terminal start ratio[Ai6] terminal end ratio[Ai4] voltage/current bias adjustment[Ai4] voltage adjustment gain
[Ai5] voltage/current bias adjustment[Ai5] voltage adjustment gain
[Ai6] voltage bias adjustment[Ai6] voltage adjustment gain
Window comparator [Ai4] upper limit level
Window comparator [Ai4] lower limit level
Window comparator [Ai4] hysteresis range
Window comparator [Ai5] upper limit level
Window comparator [Ai5] lower limit level
Window comparator [Ai5] hysteresis range
Window comparator [Ai6] upper limit level
Window comparator [Ai6] lower limit level
Window comparator [Ai6] hysteresis range[Ai4] operation level at disconnection[Ai4] operation level selection at disconnection[Ai5] operation level at disconnection[Ai5] operation level selection at disconnection[Ai6] operation level at disconnection[Ai6] operation level selection at disconnection[Ao3] terminal output selection[Ao4] terminal output selection[Ao5] terminal output selection[Ao3] output filter time constant[Ao3] output data type selection[Ao3] bias adjustment (voltage/current)[Ao3] gain adjustment (voltage/current)[Ao3] output level in the adjustment mode
[Ao4] output filter time constant[Ao4] output data type selection[Ao4] bias adjustment (voltage/current)[Ao4] gain adjustment (voltage/current)[Ao4] output level in the adjustment mode
[Ao5] output filter time constant[Ao5] output data type selection[Ao5] bias adjustment (voltage)[Ao5] gain adjustment (voltage)[Ao5] output level in the adjustment mode

1~500 (ms)0~10 (%)-100~100 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)
0~100 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)
0~100 (%)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled: out of range)

16
0.00
100.00
0.0
100.0
01
16
0.00
100.00
0.0
100.0
01
16
-100.00
100.00-100.0100.0
0.00
100.000.00
100.000.00
100.00
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
-100
0
0
00
0
00
0
00

See the List of output monitor functions

dA-01

1~500 (ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)
1~500 (ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)
1~500(ms)00 (absolute value)/01 (with sign)-100.0~100.0 (%)-1000.0~1000.0 (%)-100.0~100.0 (%)

100
00
0.0

0.00~100.00 (%)
0.0~ [oE-06] (%)[oE-05]~100.0 (%)
00 (Start amount [oE-03])/01 (0%)
1~500 (ms)0.00~100.00 (%)
0.0~ [oE-16] (%)[oE-15]~100.0 (%)
00 (Start amount [oE-13])/01 (0%)
1~500 (ms)-100.00~100.00 (%)-100.0~ [oE-26] (%)[oE-25]~100.0 (%)-100.00~100.00 (%)
0.00~200.00 (%)-100.00~100.00 (%)
0.00~200.00 (%)-100.00~100.00 (%)
0.00~200.00 (%)
0~100 (%)
0~10 (%)
0~100 (%)
0~10 (%)-100~100 (%)＊For details, refer to the instruction manual provided together with the each optional cassette.

App.1-24

100.0
100
00
0.0
100.0
100
00
0.0
100.0

Page

4-58

4-59

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

oH-01
oH-02

IP address selection (P1-EN)
Transmission speed (port 1) (P1-EN)

oH-03

Transmission speed (port 2) (P1-EN)

oH-04
oH-05
oH-06
oH-20
oH-21
oH-22
oH-23

Ethernet communication timeout (P1-EN)
Modbus TCP port number (IPv4)
Modbus TCP port number (IPv6)
Profibus Nobe address
Profibus Clear Mode selection
Profibus Map selection
Selection of setting from the Profibus masterSelection of setpoint telegram/Actual value
telegram Gr
IP address selection (P1-PN)
Transmission speed (port 1) (P1-PN)

oH-24
oH-30
oH-31
oH-32

Transmission speed (port 2) (P1-PN)

oH-33

Ethernet communication timeout (P1-PN)
Selection of setpoint telegram/Actual value
telegram Gr

oH-34
Code
oJ-01
oJ-02
oJ-03
oJ-04
oJ-05
oJ-06
oJ-07
oJ-08
oJ-09
oJ-10
oJ-11
oJ-12
oJ-13
oJ-14
oJ-15
oJ-16
oJ-17
oJ-18
oJ-19
oJ-20
oJ-21
oJ-22
oJ-23
oJ-24
oJ-25
oJ-26
oJ-27
oJ-28
oJ-29
oJ-30
oJ-31
oJ-32
oJ-33
oJ-34
oJ-35
oJ-36
oJ-37
oJ-38
oJ-39
oJ-40
oJ-41
oJ-42
oJ-43
oJ-44
oJ-45
oJ-46
oJ-47
oJ-48
oJ-49

Initialvalue

Data range
00 (Gr.1)/01 (Gr.2)
00 (Auto negotiation)/01 (100M: full duplex)
02 (100M: half duplex)/03 (10M: full duplex)04 (10M: half duplex)
1~65535 (×10ms)

3000

502, 1024~65535

502

0~125
00 (Clear)/01 (Value retained the last time)
00 (PPO)/01 (Comvertional)/02 (FlexibleMode)
00 (Allowed)/01 (Not allowed)

0
4-60

00 (Gr.A)/01 (Gr.B)/02 (Gr.C)

00

3000

00 (Gr.A)/01 (Gr.B)/02 (Gr.C)

502

App.1-25

Data range

Page

00

00 (Gr.1)/01 (Gr.2)
00 (Auto negotiation)/01 (100M: full duplex)
02 (100M: half duplex)/03 (10M: full duplex)04 (10M: half duplex)
1~65535 (×10ms)

Name
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 1
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 2
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 3
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 4
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 5
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 6
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 7
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 8
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 9
Gr.A flexible command registration writing register 10
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 1
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 2
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 3
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 4
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 5
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 6
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 7
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 8
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 9
Gr.A flexible command registration reading register 10
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 1
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 2
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 3
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 4
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 5
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 6
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 7
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 8
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 9
Gr.B flexible command registration writing register 10
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 1
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 2
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 3
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 4
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 5
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 6
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 7
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 8
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 9
Gr.B flexible command registration reading register 10
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 1
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 2
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 3
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 4
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 5
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 6
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 7
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 8
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 9

Note

Initial value

Note

Page

4-60

0000~FFFF

0000

4-61

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code
oJ-50
oJ-51
oJ-52
oJ-53
oJ-54
oJ-55
oJ-56
oJ-57
oJ-58
oJ-59
oJ-60
oL-01
oL-02
oL-03
oL-04
oL-05
oL-06
oL-07
oL-08
oL-09
oL-10
oL-11
oL-12
oL-20
oL-21
oL-22
oL-23
oL-24
oL-25
oL-26
oL-27
oL-28
oL-29
oL-30
oL-31
oL-32
oL-33
oL-34
oL-35
oL-36
oL-40
oL-41
oL-42
oL-43
oL-44
oL-45
oL-46
oL-47
oL-48
oL-49
oL-50
oL-51
oL-60
oL-61
oL-62
oL-63
oL-64
oL-65
oL-66
oL-67
oL-68
oL-69
oL-70
oL-71
oL-72
oL-73
oL-74
oL-75
oL-76

Name
Gr.C flexible command registration writing register 10
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 1
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 2
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 3
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 4
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 5
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 6
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 7
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 8
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 9
Gr.C flexible command registration reading register 10
Gr.1 IPv4 IP address (1)Gr.1 IPv4 IP address (2)Gr.1 IPv4 IP address (3)Gr.1 IPv4 IP address (4)Gr.1 IPv4 subnet mask (1)Gr.1 IPv4 subnet mask (2)Gr.1 IPv4 subnet mask (3)Gr.1 IPv4 subnet mask (4)Gr.1 IPv4 default gateway (1)Gr.1 IPv4 default gateway (2)Gr.1 IPv4 default gateway (3)Gr.1 IPv4 default gateway (4)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (1)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (2)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (3)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (4)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (5)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (6)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (7)Gr.1 IPv6 IP address (8)Gr.1 IPv6 subnet prefix
Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (1)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (2)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (3)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (4)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (5)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (6)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (7)Gr.1 IPv6 default gateway (8)Gr.2 IPv4 IP address (1)Gr.2 IPv4 IP address (2)Gr.2 IPv4 IP address (3)Gr.2 IPv4 IP address (4)Gr.2 IPv4 subnet mask (1)Gr.2 IPv4 subnet mask (2)Gr.2 IPv4 subnet mask (3)Gr.2 IPv4 subnet mask (4)Gr.2 IPv4 default gateway (1)Gr.2 IPv4 default gateway (2)Gr.2 IPv4 default gateway (3)Gr.2 IPv4 default gateway (4)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (1)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (2)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (3)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (4)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (5)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (6)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (7)Gr.2 IPv6 IP address (8)Gr.2 IPv6 subnet prefix
Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (1)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (2)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (3)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (4)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (5)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (6)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (7)Gr.2 IPv6 default gateway (8)Data range

Initial value

0000~FFFF

0000

0~255

192
168
0
2
255
255
255
0
192
168
0
1

0000~FFFF

0000

0~127

64

0000~FFFF

0000

0~255

192
168
0
2
255
255
255
0
192
168
0
1

0000~FFFF

0000

0~127

64

0000~FFFF

0000

Page

4-61

4-62

＊For details, refer to the instruction manual provided together with the each optional cassette.

App.1-26

Note

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Parameter mode (P code：Special Function)
Code

Name

PA-01
PA-02
PA-03
PA-04
PA-05
PA-20
PA-21

Forced operation mode selection
Forced operation frequency setting
Forced operation rotation direction command
Commercial power supply bypass function selection
Bypass function delay time
Simulation mode selection
Selection of error code for alarm test

PA-22

Output current monitor optional output selection

PA-23

Output current monitor optional setting value

PA-24

P-N voltage monitor optional output selection

PA-25

P-N voltage monitor optional setting value

PA-26

Output voltage monitor optional output selection

PA-27

Output voltage monitor optional setting value

PA-28

Output torque monitor optional output selection

PA-29

Output torque monitor optional setting value

PA-30

Frequency adjustment optional output selection

PA-31

Frequency matching optional setting value

Data range
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0.00~590.00 (Hz)00 (Normal rotation)/01 (Reverse rotation)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
0.0~1000.0 (s)00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)000~255
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled: parameter setting [PA-23])
02 (Enabled: set from [VRF])
03 (Enabled: set from [IRF])
04 (Enabled: set from [VF2])
05 (Enabled: set from [Ai4])
06 (Enabled: set from [Ai5])07 (Enabled: set from [Ai6])
0.0 to 3.0 × Inverter rated current (A)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled: parameter setting [PA-25])
02 (Enabled: set from [VRF])
03 (Enabled: set from [IRF])
04 (Enabled: set from [VF2])
05 (Enabled: set from [Ai4])
06 (Enabled: set from [Ai5])07 (Enabled: set from [Ai6])
200V class: 0.0 to 450.0 (Vdc)
400V class: 0.0 to 900.0 (Vdc)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled: parameter setting [PA-27])
02 (Enabled: set from [VRF])
03 (Enabled: set from [IRF])
04 (Enabled: set from [VF2])
05 (Enabled: set from [Ai4])
06 (Enabled: set from [Ai5])07 (Enabled: set from [Ai6])
200V class: 0.0-300.0 (V)400V class: 0.0-600.0 (V)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled: parameter setting [PA-29])
02 (Enabled: set from [VRF])
03 (Enabled: set from [IRF])
04 (Enabled: set from [VF2])
05 (Enabled: set from [Ai4])
06 (Enabled: set from [Ai5])07 (Enabled: set from [Ai6])-500.0~+500.0 (%)
00 (Disabled)
01 (Enabled: parameter setting [PA-31])
02 (Enabled: set from [VRF])
03 (Enabled: set from [IRF])
04 (Enabled: set from [VF2])
05 (Enabled: set from [Ai4])
06 (Enabled: set from [Ai5])07 (Enabled: set from [Ai6])
0.0~590.00 (Hz)App.1-27

Initial
value
00
0.00
00
00
5.0
00
000

Note

Page

01

0.0

01

270.0
540.0
4-63

01

0.0

01

0.0

01

0.00

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Parameter mode (U code：Set-up, PDN)
Code

Name

UA-01
UA-02

Password input for display selection
Soft-lock password input

UA-10

Display selection

UA-12
UA-13
UA-14
UA-15
UA-16

Clearing of integrated input power
Integrated input power display gain
Clearing of integrated output power
Integrated output power display gain
Soft-lock selection

UA-17

Soft-lock target selection

UA-18
UA-19

Data R/W selection
Battery level warning selection

UA-20

Operation at disconnection of operator keypad

UA-21
UA-22
UA-30
UA-31
UA-32
UA-33
UA-34
UA-35
UA-36
UA-37
UA-38
UA-39
UA-40
UA-41
UA-42
UA-43
UA-44
UA-45
UA-46
UA-47
UA-48
UA-49
UA-50
UA-51
UA-52
UA-53
UA-54
UA-55
UA-56
UA-57
UA-58
UA-59
UA-60
UA-61
UA-62
UA-90
to
UA-94

Selection of second setting parameter display
Selection of option parameter display
Selection of user parameter automatic setting
User parameter 1 selection
User parameter 2 selection
User parameter 3 selection
User parameter 4 selection
User parameter 5 selection
User parameter 6 selection
User parameter 7 selection
User parameter 8 selection
User parameter 9 selection
User parameter 10 selection
User parameter 11 selection
User parameter 12 selection
User parameter 13 selection
User parameter 14 selection
User parameter 15 selection
User parameter 16 selection
User parameter 17 selection
User parameter 18 selection
User parameter 19 selection
User parameter 20 selection
User parameter 21 selection
User parameter 22 selection
User parameter 23 selection
User parameter 24 selection
User parameter 25 selection
User parameter 26 selection
User parameter 27 selection
User parameter 28 selection
User parameter 29 selection
User parameter 30 selection
User parameter 31 selection
User parameter 32 selection

Data range
0000~FFFF

Selection of factory default initialization

Ub-02
Ub-03
Ub-05
UC-01

Selection of initial values
Duty type selection
Initialization start selection
Debug mode selection

Note

Page

0000

00 (Full display)/01 (By function)/02 (User setting)03 (Conveyor display)/04 (Only monitor display)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Clear)
1~100000 (Disabled)/01 (Clear)
1~100000 ([SFT] terminal)/01 (Always enabled)
00 (All data cannot be changed)
01 (Data other than set frequency cannot be changed)
00 (R/W enabled)/01 (R/W disabled)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Warning)/02 (Error)
00 (Error)/01 (Error after deceleration stop)
02 (Ignore)/03 (Free run)/04 (Deceleration stop)
00 (Not display)/01 (Display)

00
00
1
00
1
00
00
00
00
02
00

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)

4-64

no/***** (select a parameter)

Reserved

Ub-01

Initialvalue

00 (Disabled)/01 (Trip history)
02 (Parameter initialization)
03 (Trip history + parameters)/04 (Reserved)
05 (Other than terminal function)
06 (Other than communication function)
07 (Other than terminal&communication functions)
08 (Reserved)
00 (Mode 0)/01 (Mode 1)/02 (Mode 2)/03 (Mode 3)
00 (VLD)/01 (LD)/02 (ND)
00 (Disabled)/01 (Start initialization)(do not change)

App.1-28

no

-

00

00
02
00
00

4-65

List of Parameters

Appendix 1
Code

Name

Ud-01
Ud-02
Ud-03
Ud-04
Ud-10
Ud-11
Ud-12
Ud-13
Ud-14
Ud-15
Ud-16
Ud-17
Ud-20
Ud-21
Ud-22
Ud-23
Ud-24
Ud-25
Ud-26
Ud-27
Ud-28
Ud-29
Ud-30
Ud-31
Ud-32
Ud-33
Ud-34
Ud-35
Ud-36
Ud-37
Ud-38
Ud-39
Ud-40
Ud-41
Ud-42
Ud-43

Trace function selection
Trace start
Selection of the number of trace data sets
Selection of the number of trace signals
Selection of trace data 0
Selection of trace data 1
Selection of trace data 2
Selection of trace data 3
Selection of trace data 4
Selection of trace data 5
Selection of trace data 6
Selection of trace data 7
Trace signal 0 I/O selection
Trace signal 0 input terminal selection
Trace signal 0 output terminal selection
Trace signal 1 I/O selection
Trace signal 1 input terminal selection
Trace signal 1 output terminal selection
Trace signal 2 I/O selection
Trace signal 2 input terminal selection
Trace signal 2 output terminal selection
Trace signal 3 I/O selection
Trace signal 3 input terminal selection
Trace signal 3 output terminal selection
Trace signal 4 I/O selection
Trace signal 4 input terminal selection
Trace signal 4 output terminal selection
Trace signal 5 I/O selection
Trace signal 5 input terminal selection
Trace signal 5 output terminal selection
Trace signal 6 I/O selection
Trace signal 6 input terminal selection
Trace signal 6 output terminal selection
Trace signal 7 I/O selection
Trace signal 7 input terminal selection
Trace signal 7 output terminal selection

Ud-50

Selection of trace trigger 1

Ud-51
Ud-52
Ud-53
Ud-54
Ud-55
Ud-56
Ud-57

Selection of trigger 1 operation at trace data
trigger
Trigger 1 level at trace data trigger
Selection of trigger 1 operation at trace
signal trigger
Selection of trace trigger 2
Selection of trigger 2 operation at trace data
trigger
Trigger 2 level at trace data trigger
Selection of trigger 2 operation at trace
signal trigger

Ud-58

Trigger condition selection

Ud-59

Trigger point setting

Ud-60

Sampling time setting

Data range

Initialvalue

00 (Disabled)/01 (Enabled)
00 (Stop)/01 (Start)

00

0~8

1

See Appendix 1-30
<List of output monitor functions>.

00 (Input: [Ud-21])/01 (Output: [Ud-22])*1)*2)00 (Input: [Ud-24])/01 (Output: [Ud-25])*1)*2)
00 (Input: [Ud-27]/01 (Output: [Ud-28])*1)*2)
00 (Input: [Ud-30])/01 (Output: [Ud-31])*1)*2)
00 (Input: [Ud-33])/01 (Output: [Ud-34])*1)*2)
00 (Input: [Ud-36])/01 (Output: [Ud-37])*1)*2)
00 (Input: [Ud-39])/01 (Output: [Ud-40])*1)*2)00 (Input: [Ud-42])/01 (Output: [Ud-43])*1)*2)
00 (Trip)/01 (Trace data 0)/02 (Trace data 1)
03 (Trace data 2)/04 (Trace data 3)/05 (Trade data 4)
06 (Trace data 5)/07 (Trace data 6)/08 (Trace data 7)
09 (Trace signal 0)/10 (Trace signal 1)
11 (Trace signal 2)/12 (Trace signal 3)
13 (Trace signal 4)/14 (Trace signal 5)
15 (Trace signal 6)/16 (Trace signal 7)
00 (Operate when it is above the trigger level)01 (Operate when it is below the trigger level)0~100 (%)
00 (Operate when the signal is ON)
01 (Operate when the signal is OFF)Same as Ud-50
00 (Rising edge)
01 (Falling edge)
0~100 (%)
00 (Operate when the signal is ON)
01 (Operate when the signal is OFF)00 (When trigger 1 is satisfied)
01 (When trigger 2 is satisfied)
02 (When trigger 1 or 2 is satisfied)
03 (When trigger 1 and 2 are satisfied)
0~100 (%)
01 (0.2ms)/02 (0.5ms)/03 (1ms)/04 (2ms)/05 (5ms)
06 (10ms)/07 (50ms)/08 (100ms)/09 (500ms)
10 (1000ms)*1) See Appendix 1-31 <List of input terminal functions>.
*2) See Appendix 1-32 <List of output terminal functions>.

App.1-29

Note

Page

dA-01

00
001
00

4-65

001
00
001
00
001
00
001
00
001
00
001
00
001

00

00
0
00
00
00
0
00
00
0
03

4-66

List of Parameters

Appendix 1<List of output monitor functions>Monitor No.
dA-01
dA-02
dA-04
dA-08
dA-12
dA-14
dA-15
dA-16
dA-17
dA-18
dA-30
dA-34
dA-38
dA-40
dA-41
dA-42
dA-43
dA-61
dA-62
dA-63
dA-64
dA-65
dA-66
dA-70
dA-71
db-01 to db-23
db-30
db-32
db-34

Function
Output frequency monitor
Output current monitor
Frequency command after calculation
Speed detection value monitor
Output frequency monitor (with sign)Frequency upper limit monitor
Torque command monitor after calculation
Torque limit monitor
Output torque monitor
Output voltage monitor
Input power monitor
Output power monitor
Motor temperature monitor
DC voltage monitor
DBTR load factor monitor
Electronic thermal duty ratio monitor MTR
Electronic thermal duty ratio monitor CTL
Analog input [VRF] monitor
Analog input [IRF] monitor
Analog input [VF2] monitor
Analog input [Ai4] monitor
Analog input [Ai5] monitor
Analog input [Ai6] monitor
Pulse string input monitor main body
Pulse string input monitor option
Reserved
PID1 feedback data 1 monitor
PID1 feedback data 2 monitor
PID1 feedback data 3 monitor

Monitor No.
db-36
db-38
db-40
db-42
db-44
db-50
db-51
db-52
db-53
db-54
db-55
db-56
db-57
db-58
db-59
db-60
db-64
dC-15
FA-01
FA-02
FA-15
FA-16
FA-30
FA-32
FA-34
FA-36
FA-38
FA-40

<Unit options>
No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Unit
non
%
A
Hz
V
kW
W
hr
s
kHz
ohm
mA
ms
P
kgm2
pls
mH
Vdc
°C
kWh
mF
mVs/rad
Nm
min-1
m/s
m/min
m/h
ft/s
ft/min
ft/h

No.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

Unit
m
cm
°F
l/s
l/min
l/h
m3/s
m3/minm3/h
kg/s
kg/min
kg/h
t/min
t/h
gal/s
gal/min
gal/h
ft3/s
ft3/min
ft3/hlb/s
lb/min
lb/h
mbar
bar
Pa
kPa
PSI
mm

App.1-30

Function
PID2 feedback data monitor
PID3 feedback data monitor
PID4 feedback data monitor
PID1 target value monitor after calculation
PID1 feedback data
PID1 output monitor
PID1 deviation monitor
PID1 deviation 1 monitor
PID1 deviation 2 monitor
PID1 deviation 3 monitor
PID2 output monitor
PID2 deviation monitor
PID3 output monitor
PID3 deviation monitor
PID4 output monitor
PID4 deviation monitor
PID feed-forward monitor
Cooling fin temperature monitor
Main speed command
Auxiliary speed command
Torque command monitor
Torque bias monitor
PID1 target value 1
PID1 target value 2
PID1 target value 3
PID2 target value
PID3 target value
PID4 target value

List of Parameters

Appendix 1<List of input terminal functions>
Function
No.
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017

Abbreviation

Function name

no
FR
RR
DFL
DFM
DFH
DHH
SF1
SF2
SF3
SF4
SF5
SF6
SF7
ADD
AUT
STA
STP

Without allocation
Normal rotation
Reverse rotation
Multistage speed 1
Multistage speed 2
Multistage speed 3
Multistage speed 4
Multistage speed bit 1
Multistage speed bit 2
Multistage speed bit 3
Multistage speed bit 4
Multistage speed bit 5
Multistage speed bit 6
Multistage speed bit 7
Addition of frequency
Switching of command
3-wire starting up
3-wire stopping

018

FS

3-wire normal and reverse

019

AHD

020

UP

021

DWN

022

UDC

023

F-OP

024
028
029

SET
RST
JOG

030

DB

031

AD2

032
033

MBS
ES

034

USP

035
036
037

CS
SFT
BOK

038

OLR

039

KHC

040

OKHC

041

PID

042

PIDC

043

PID2

044

PIDC2

045

PID3

046

PIDC3

047

PID4

048

PIDC4

051

SVC1

Retention of analog
commandAcceleration throughremote operation
Deceleration throughremote operation
Clearing of remote
operation data
Forced switching ofcommandSecond control
Reset
Jogging
Braking with external
direct current
2-stepacceleration/deceleration
Free-run stop
External abnormality
Prevention of power
restoration restarting
Commercial switch
Soft-lock
Brake check
Switching of stall
prevention
Clearing of integrated
input power
Clearing of integrated
output power
PID1 disabled
Resetting of PID1
integration
PID2 disabled
Resetting of PID2
integration
PID3 disabled
Resetting of PID3
integration
PID4 disabled
Resetting of PID4
integration
PID1 multistage target
value 1

Page

4-36

Function
No.
052
053
054
055
056
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
066
067
068
069
071
072

Abbreviation

Function name

SVC2
SVC3
SVC4
PRO
PIO
SLEP
WAKE
TL
TRQ1
TRQ2
PPI
CAS
FOC
ATR
TBS
ORT
LAC
PCLR

PID1 multistage target value 2
PID1 multistage target value 3
PID1 multistage target value 4
Switching of PID gain
Switching of PID output
Satisfaction of SLEEP condition
Satisfaction of WAKE condition
Validation of torque limit
Torque limit switchover 1
Torque limit switchover 2
PPI control switch
Control gain switch
Auxiliary excitation
Validation of torque control
Validation of torque bias
Orientation
Cancellation of LAD
Clearing of positional deviation
Permission to inputting of Pulse
string position command

073

STAT

074

PUP

Addition of positional bias

075

PDN

Subtraction of positional bias

076

CP1

Positional command selection 1

077

CP2

Positional command selection 2

078

CP3

Positional command selection 3

079
080
081

CP4
ORL
ORG

082

FOT

083

ROT

084
085
086
to
096
097
098

SPD
PSET

Positional command selection 4
Origin limit signal
Return-to-origin start up signal
Stopping of normal rotation
driving
Stopping of reverse rotation
driving
Switching of speed position
Presetting of positional data

PCC
ECOM

099

-

100

HLD

Stopping ofacceleration/deceleration-

Reserved
Clearing of pulse counter
Starting up of EzCOM
Reserved

101

REN

Operation permission signal

102

DISP

Fixation of display

103

PLA

Pulse string input A

104

PLB

Pulse string input B

105

EMF

Emergency forced operation

107

COK

Contactor check signal

108

DTR

Data trace starting signal

109

PLZ

Pulse string input Z

110

TCH

Teaching signal

App.1-31

Page

4-36

4-37

List of Parameters

Appendix 1<List of output terminal functions>
Function
Abbreviation
Function name
No.
000
no
Without allocation
001
DRV
During operation

Page

Function No. Abbreviation
068
069 to 075

LOG7
-

002

UPF1

When the constant speed is attained

076

EMFC

003
004
005

UPF2
UPF3
UPF4

Equal to or above the set frequency
Set frequency only
Equal to or above the set frequency 2

077
078
079

EMBP
WFT
TRA

006

UPF5

Set frequency only 2

080

LBK

007

IRDY

Operation ready completion

081

OVS

008
009
010
011
012
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067

FRR
RRR
FREF
REF
SETM
OPO
AL
MJA
OTQ
IP
UV
TRQ
IPS
RNT
ONT
THM
THC
WAC
WAF
FS
OHF
LOC
LOC2
OL
OL2
BRK
BER
CON
ZS
DSE
PDD
POK
PCMP
OD
FBV
OD2
FBV2
NDc
VRFDc
IRFDc
VF2Dc
Ai4Dc
Ai5Dc
Ai6Dc
WCVRF
WCIRF
WCVF2
WCAi4
WCAi5
WCAi6
LOG1
LOG2
LOG3
LOG4
LOG5
LOG6

During normal rotation operation
During reverse rotation operation
Frequency command panel
Operation command panel
Second control under selection
Optional output
Alarm signal
Severe failure signal
Excessive torqueDuring instantaneous power failure
Under insufficient voltage
During torque limitation
During power failure deceleration
RUN time elapsed
Power ON time elapsed
Electronic thermal warning
Electronic thermal warning
Capacitor life advance notice
Fan life advance notice
Operation command signal
Cooling fin heating advance notice
Low current signal
Low current signal 2
Overload advance notice
Overload advance notice 2
Brake release
Brake abnormality
Contactor control
0 Hz detection signal
Excessive speed deviation
Excessive positional deviation
Positioning completedPulse count compare-match output
PID excessive deviation
PID feedback comparison
PID2 excessive deviation
PID2 feedback comparison
Communication disconnection
Analog disconnection VRF
Analog disconnection IRF
Analog disconnection VF2
Analog disconnection Ai4
Analog disconnection Ai5
Analog disconnection Ai6
Window comparator VRF
Window comparator IRF
Window comparator VF2
Window comparator Ai4
Window comparator Ai5
Window comparator Ai6
Result of logical operation 1
Result of logical operation 2
Result of logical operation 3
Result of logical operation 4
Result of logical operation 5
Result of logical operation 6

084
085
086
087
089
090
091
092
093

AC0
AC1
AC2
AC3
OD3
FBV3
OD4
FBV4
SSE

4-40

4-41

App.1-32

Function namePage

Result of logical operation 7
Reserved
Forced operation in process
signalDuring-bypass-mode signal
Trace trigger stand-by signal
During-tracing signal
Operation panel battery
insufficient
Excessive voltage of accepted
4-41
power
Alarm code bit 0
Alarm code bit 1
Alarm code bit 2
Alarm code bit 3
PID3 excessive deviation
PID3 feedback comparison
PID4 excessive deviation
PID4 feedback comparison
PID soft start abnormality

Appendix 2

Quick Start

Quick Start
Thoroughly read “Chapter 1 Safety
Instructions” and “Chapter 2 Installation and
DANGER Wiring” in the Instruction Manual for
installation and wiring of the inverter.

・Part of the keypad screen is shown in below.

Frequency setting from keypad
AA101
Main Speed source_M1
1 Term.[VRF]
2 Term.[IRF]・ ・
7 Keypad

How to use the keypad

Back

⑥

①
⑧

⑦

③

④
⑤

No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

In case of AA101 = 7
set the frequency from
Setting.

In case of AA101 = 1
set the frequency fromthe VRF terminal.

FA-01
Set Speed M(Keypad)M(Keypad)Analog input/output

Description
F1 key Displays the functions in the lower left
corner of the screen (e.g. Return to the top pageand Cancel).
F2 key Displays the functions in the lower rightcorner of the screen (e.g. Data memory).
RUN key Runs when the key is enabled.
STOP/RESET key Selects Deceleration stop and Trip
reset.
Selects data on the screen by using the right/left
and the up/down arrow keys and confirms theselection by using the O key at the center.
Display screen
RUN LED. Turns on when incoming command for
operation.
POWER LED. Turns on when the power is supplied
to keypad.

StatusWarning

<a>
<h>

<b>
<g>

COM VRF ＋V

46.49 Hz[0.00-60.00]

Back

Save

3

Potentiometer for
frequency source(1kΩ, 1W or more isrecommended)

Operation setting from keypad
AA111
Run-cmd. Source_M1
0 Term.[FR] / [RR]
1 3 Wire2 Runkey(Keypad)
3 RS485
Back<c> <ｄ><f> <e>2

1

How to read the display screen (6)Operation

Save

②

Save

In case of AA111 = 2
set run/stop from theoperator keypad.

In case of AA111 = 0
set run/stop from the
FR/RR terminal.
Input
BC

Data/Parameter display area

RR

FR

RUN key-enabled
F1
Function

Frequency
CommandF2
Function<a>24V supply state, <b> SET function,<c> Parameter display restrictions, <d> Display screenNo., <e> Functional safety operation, <f> Commandcontrol mode, <h> Special status indication

RUN

STOP

Although there are many functions on the inverter, you
do not need to use all the functions. If you need to set
functions in more detail, refer to this Instruction Manualand User’s Guide (You can download from Sumitomo
Heavy Industries, Ltd.’ Website).

App.2-1

IndexA

F
absolute position control ................................... 4-23
accel/decal curve selection ............................. 4-21
acceleration curve constant .............................. 4-21
acceleration time ............................................... 4-21
acceleration (2) time ......................................... 4-21
ADD .................................................................. 4-41
AD2 ................................................................... 4-41
AHD .................................................................. 4-41
Auto learning function ....................................... 4-23
Auto tuning ........................................................ 4-51
automatic carrier frequency
reduction ........................................................... 4-36
automatic torque boost ..................................... 4-55
AVR ................................................................... 4-35

FOC .................................................................. 4-42
forward operation.............................................. 4-41
FOT .................................................................. 4-42
free setting of electronic thermal
characteristics .................................................. 4-38
free V/f characteristics ...................................... 4-54
free-run stop ..................................................... 4-19
frequency addition ............................................ 4-41
frequency arrival setting for accel. .................... 4-48
frequency arrival setting for decel. .................... 4-48
frequency limit .................................................. 4-33
frequency lower limit ......................................... 4-33
frequency matching ........................................ 4-37
frequerncy reference ........................................ 4-18
frequency reached signal ................................. 4-45
frequency conversion gain ................................ 4-20
frequency to be added ...................................... 4-18
frequency lower limit ......................................... 4-36
FR..................................................................... 4-41
FRQ .................................................................. 2-23
FRR .................................................................. 4-45

B
BOK .................................................................. 4-41
braking control .................................................. 4-35
BRK .................................................................. 4-45

C
capacitor life warning ........................................ 4-45
carrier frequency ............................................... 4-36
commercial power supply ................................. 4-41
constant-torque characteristics ......................... 4-19
control mode selection ...................................... 4-19
control circuit terminal ....................................... 2-20
control gain change........................................... 4-42
cooling-fan operation ........................................ 4-35
cooling fin temperature monitor......................... 4-16
CS ..................................................................... 4-41

H
heat sink overheat warning ............................... 4-45
home search ..................................................... 4-23

I
Individual Accel/Decel for multispeed....................................................................... 4-20
initialization ....................................................... 4-65
input terminal response time .............................. 3-6
input method for Accel/Decel time .................... 4-20
inspection ........................................................... 6-1
input terminal .................................................... 2-20
input terminal status ........................................... 4-2
output terminal .................................................. 2-21
inverter ready signal ......................................... 4-45
IRDY ................................................................. 4-45
IVMS................................................................. 4-56

D
data comparison display ................................... 4-64
DB ..................................................................... 4-24
DBTR ................................................................ 4-35
DC braking ........................................................ 4-24
DC bus voltage monitoring ................................ 4-63
deceleration time setting ................................... 4-21
deceleration curve constant .............................. 4-21
deceleration stop at power loss ........................ 4-34
derating ............................................................... 7-4
DFL, DFM, DFH, DHH ...................................... 4-41
DSE .................................................................. 4-46
Dwell ................................................................. 4-21

EJ
JOG .................................................................. 4-41
jogging .............................................................. 4-41
jump
(Resonant frequency avoidance) ...................... 4-26

Kelectronic gear .................................................. 4-23
electronic thermal.............................................. 4-38
electronic thermal warning levelsetting ............................................................... 4-48
enable position saving ...................................... 4-23
energy saving operation .................................... 4-53
external dynamic brake ..................................... 4-41
external thermistor ............................................ 2-22
external fault ..................................................... 4-41

Keypad key settings ......................................... 4-19
KHC .................................................................. 4-41

L

App.3-1

LAC .................................................................. 4-42
LOC .................................................................. 4-45
LOG1, LOG2, LOG3, LOG4, LOG5,
LOG6 ................................................................ 4-46
logic output terminals........................................ 4-47
low-current indication signal ............................. 4-48

IndexM

Tmain circuit terminal ............................................ 2-8
major failure signal ........................................... 4-45
manual torque boost ......................................... 4-53
MBS .................................................................. 4-36
MJA .................................................................. 4-45
Modbus ............................................................. 4-50
monitor mode...................................................... 4-2
motor constant .................................................. 4-53
multispeed command ...................................... 4-20
multistage position settings............................... 4-42

test run ............................................................... 3-1
thermistor ......................................................... 2-23
THM ................................................................. 4-45
torque bias setting ............................................ 4-22
torque boost ..................................................... 4-48
torque control ................................................... 4-17
torque limitation ................................................ 4-28
torque monitoring ............................................. 4-10
troubleshooting................................................... 5-1
TRQ ................................................................... 5-4
TRQ1, TRQ2 .................................................... 4-36

N
NDc .................................................................. 4-46
NO/NC .............................................................. 4-40

U

OHF .................................................................. 4-45
OL, OL2 ............................................................ 4-45
OLR .................................................................. 4-41
online auto-tuning ............................................. 4-51
operation after error event ................................ 4-36
operation frequency .......................................... 4-18
operation time over signal (RNT) ...................... 4-40
overcurrent suppress ........................................ 4-34
overvoltage suppresion .................................... 4-34

V

UDC ................................................................. 4-41
unattended start protection .............................. 4-41
UPF1 to UPF5 .................................................. 4-45
user parameter ................................................. 4-64
USP .................................................................. 4-41
UV .................................................................... 4-45

O

vector control with encoder .............................. 4-19

W
WAC ................................................................. 4-45
WAF ................................................................. 4-45
window comparator .......................................... 4-49
3-wire input....................................................... 4-19

P
power-on time over signal (ONT)...................... 4-40
PID1 ................................................................. 4-27
Position contrl ................................................... 4-23
Pre set position ................................................. 4-23
P - ................................................................. 2-23

Z

R
Restart operation .............................................. 4-19
Resonant frequency avoidance ........................ 4-26
Run command selection ................................... 4-19
Run command direction restriction ................... 4-19
running signal ................................................... 4-45
RR .................................................................... 4-41
RVR .................................................................. 4-45

S
scaled output frequency monitoring....................................................................... 4-20
sensorless vector control .................................. 4-19
servo-on ........................................................... 4-42
SET .................................................................. 4-41
SFT ................................................................... 4-41
SF1, SF2, SF3, SF4, SF5, SF6, SF7....................................................................... 4-31
SLV ................................................................... 4-55
software lock..................................................... 4-64
SPD .................................................................. 4-42
Speed limit for torque control ............................ 4-22
speed/position switching ................................... 4-42
STAT ................................................................. 4-42
stall prevention function .................................... 4-34
STP .................................................................. 4-41
2-step acceleration/deceleration ....................... 4-41

App. 3-2

0Hz speed detection signal .............................. 4-49
zero speed detection ........................................ 4-46
zero-return function .......................................... 4-24
ZS .................................................................... 4-46

Appendix 4
Warranty
Warranty
periodThe warranty shall be 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months after initial
operation, whichever is shorter.

Warranty
condition

In the event that any problem or damage to the Product arises during the “Warranty
Period” from defects in the Product whenever the Product is properly installed andcombined with the Buyer’s equipment or machines maintained as specified in themaintenance manual, and properly operated under the conditions described in the
catalog or as otherwise agreed upon in writing between the Seller and Buyer or its
customers; the Seller will provide, at its sole discretion, appropriate repair or replacementof the Product without charge at a designated facility, except as stipulated in the“Warranty Exclusions” as described below.
However, if the Product is installed or integrated into the Buyer’s equipment or machines,
the Seller shall not reimburse the cost of: removal or re-installation of the Product orother incidental costs related thereto, any lost opportunity, any profit loss or otherincidental or consequential losses or damages incurred by the Buyer or its customers.

Warranty
exclusion

Not withstanding the above warranty, the warranty as set forth herein shall not apply to
any problem or damage to the Product that is caused by:
1.Installation, connection, combination or integration of the Product in or to the otherequipment or machine that rendered by any person or entity other than the Seller.
2.Insufficient maintenance or improper operation by the Buyer or its customers such that
the Product is not maintained in accordance with the maintenance manual provided ordesignated by the Seller;
3.Improper use or operation of the Product by the Buyer or its customers that is not
informed to the Seller, including, without limitation, the Buyer’s or its customers’
operation of the Product not in conformity with the specifications;4.Any problem or damage on any equipment or machine to which the Product isinstalled, connected or combined or any specifications particular to the buyer or its
customers;
5.Any changes, modifications, improvements or alterations to the Product or thosefunctions that are rendered on the Product by any person or entity other than the
Seller;6.Any parts in the Product that are supplied or designated by the Buyer or its customers;
7.Earthquake, fire, flood, salt air, gas, lightning, acts of God or any other reasons beyond
the control of the Seller;
8.Normal wear and tear, or deterioration of the Product’s parts, such as the cooling fan
bearings;
9.Any other troubles, problems or damage to the Product that are not attributable to theSeller.

OthersThe Seller will not be responsibility for the installation and removal of the inverter. Any
inverter transportation cost shall be born by both Seller and Buyer.

App.4-1

Appendix 4
To inverter users:
The inverter described in this operation manual is used for variable-speed operation of 3-phaseinduction motors for general industry use.

！ CAUTION▼ The inverter described in this manual is not designed and manufactured for use in equipment or asystem used under the following conditions that will directly lead to death or injury: atomic energy
control, aerospace equipment, traffic equipment, medical instrument and all kinds of safety devices.
When our products are applied to the above equipment or system, be sure to consult us.
▼ Our products are manufactured under stringent quality control. However, install a safety device on
the equipment side in order to prevent serious accidents or loss when our products are applied toequipment that may cause serious accidents or loss due to failure or malfunction.
▼ Do not use the inverter for any load other than 3-phase induction motors.
When an explosion-proof motor is selected, pay attention to the installation environment, because
the inverter is not of an explosion-proof type.
▼ Carefully read the “Operation Manual” before use for correct operation.
Read the manual carefully also for long-term storage.
▼ Electrical work is necessary for installation of the inverter. Leave the electric work to specialists.

App.4-2

U.S.A
Sumitomo Machinery Corporation of America(SMA)
4200 Holland Blvd. Chesapeake, VA 23323, U.S.A.
TEL (1)757-485-3355 FAX (1)757-485-7490
CanadaSM Cyclo of Canada, Ltd. (SMC)
1453 Cornwall Road, Oakville, Canada ON L6J 7T5
TEL (1)905-469-1050 FAX (1)905-469-1055
MexicoSM Cyclo de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. (SMME)
Av. Desarrollo 541, Col. Finsa, Guadalupe,
Nuevo León, México, CP67132
TEL (52)81-8144-5130 FAX (52)81-8144-5130
BrazilSumitomo Industrias Pesadas do Brasil Ltda.
(SHIB)
Rodovia do Acucar (SP-075) Km 26
Itu, Sao Paulo, Brasil
TEL (55)11-4886-1000 FAX (55)11-4886-1000
Chile
SM-Cyclo de Chile Ltda. (SMCH)
Camino Lo Echevers 550, Bodegas 5 y 6,
Quilicura, Región Metropolitana, Chile
TEL (56)2-892-7000
FAX (56)2-892-7001
Argentina
SM-Cyclo de Argentina S.A. (SMAR)
Ing Delpini 2230, B1615KGB Grand Bourg,
Malvinas Argentinas, Buenos Aires, Argentina
TEL (54)3327-45-4095 FAX (54)3327-45-4099
GuatemalaSM Cyclo de Guatemala Ensambladora, Ltda.
(SMGT)
Parque Industrial Unisur, 0 Calle B 19-50 Zona 3,
Bodega D-1 Delta Bárcenas en Villa Nueva, Guatemala
TEL (502)6648-0500 FAX (502)6631-9171
Colombia
SM Cyclo Colombia, S.A.S. (SMCO)
Parque Industrial Celta, Km 7.0 Autopista Medellín,
Costado Occidental, Funza, Cundinamarca, Colombia
TEL (57)1-826-9766
Peru
SM Cyclo de Perú, S.A.C (SMPE)
Jr. Monte Rosa 255, Oficina 702, Lima,
Santiago de Surco, PerúTEL (51)1-713-0342
FAX (51)1-715-0223
Germany
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH
(SCG)
Cyclostraße 92, 85229 Markt Indersdorf, Germany
TEL (49)8136-66-0
FAX (49)8136-5771

Austria
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH(SCG)SCG Branch Austria Office
Gruentalerstraße 30A, 4020 Linz, Austria
TEL (43)732-330958 FAX (43)732-331978

Korea
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Korea, Ltd. (SCK)Royal Bldg. 19 Rm. 913, 5 Saemunan-ro 5-Gil Jongro-Gu
Seoul, Korea 03173
TEL (82)2-730-0151
FAX (82)2-730-0156

Belgium
Hansen Industrial Transmissions NV (HIT)
Leonardo da Vincilaan 1, Edegem, Belgium
TEL (32)34-50-12-11 FAX (32)34-50-12-20

TaiwanTatung SM-Cyclo Co., Ltd. (TSC)
22 Chungshan N. Road 3rd., Sec. Taipei, Taiwan 104,
R.O.C.
TEL (886)2-2595-7275 FAX (886)2-2595-5594

FranceSM-Cyclo France SAS (SMFR)
8 Avenue Christian Doppler, 77700 Serris, France
TEL (33)164171717
FAX (33)164171718
Italy
SM-Cyclo Italy Srl (SMIT)
Via dell' Artigianato 23, 20010 Cornaredo (MI), Italy
TEL (39)293-481101 FAX (39)293-481103
Spain
SM-Cyclo Iberia, S.L.U. (SMIB)
C/Gran Vía Nº 63 Bis, Planta 1, Departamento 1B
48011 Bilbao–Vizcaya, SpainTEL (34)9448-05389 FAX (34)9448-01550
United Kingdom
SM-Cyclo UK Ltd. (SMUK)Unit 29, Bergen Way, Sutton Fields Industrial Estate,
Kingston upon Hull, HU7 0YQ, East Yorkshire,
United Kingdom
TEL (44)1482-790340 FAX (44)1482-790321
TurkeySM Cyclo Turkey Güç Aktarım Sis. Tic. Ltd. Sti.
(SMTR)
Barbaros Mh. Çiğdem Sk. Ağaoğlu, Office Mrk. No:1 Kat:4 D.18
Ataşehir, İstanbul, Turkey
TEL (90)216-250-6069 FAX (90)216-250-5556
India
Sumi-Cyclo Drive India Private Limited (SDI)
Gat No. 186, Raisoni Industrial Park, Alandi Markal Road,
Fulgaon-Pune, Maharashtra, India
TEL (91)96-0774-5353
China
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive China, Ltd. (SCT)
11F, SMEG Plaza, No. 1386 Hongqiao Road,
Changning District, Shanghai, China （P.C. 200336）
TEL (86)21-3462-7877 FAX (86)21-3462-7922
Hong Kong
SM-Cyclo of Hong Kong Co., Ltd. (SMHK)
Rm 1301, CEO Tower, 77 Wing Hong Street,
Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon, Hong Kong
TEL (852)2460-1881 FAX (852)2460-1882

Singapore
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte.
Ltd. (SCA)
15 Kwong Min Road, Singapore 628718
TEL (65)6591-7800
FAX (65)6863-4238
Philippines
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd.
Philippines Branch Office (SMPH)
C4 & C5 Buildings Granville Industrial Complex, Carmona,
Cavite 4116, Philippines
TEL (63)2-584-4921
FAX (63)2-584-4922
Vietnam
SM-Cyclo (Vietnam) Co., Ltd. (SMVN)
Factory 2B, Lot K1-2-5, Road No. 2-3-5A,
Le Minh Xuan Industrial Park, Binh Chanh Dist.,
HCMC, Vietnam
TEL (84)8-3766-3709 FAX (84)8-3766-3710
Malaysia
SM-Cyclo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. (SMMA)
No.7C, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/56, Kota Kemuning,
Seksyen 31, 40460 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan,
Malaysia
TEL (60)3-5121-0455 FAX (60)3-5121-0578

HF-430NEO Series Operating and Maintenance Manual

Worldwide Locations

HF-430NEO Series
High-performance Inverter
5.5〜55kW/200V Class
5.5〜55kW/400V Class

Operating and Maintenance ManualIndonesia
PT. SM-Cyclo Indonesia (SMID)
Jalan Sungkai Blok F 25 No. 09 K, Delta Silicon III,
Lippo Cikarang, Bekasi 17530, Indonesia
TEL (62)21-2961-2100 FAX (62)21-2961-2211
Thailand
SM-Cyclo (Thailand) Co., Ltd. (SMTH)
195 Empire Tower, Unit 2103-4, 21st Floor, South
Sathorn Road, Yannawa, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120,
ThailandTEL (66)2670-0998
FAX (66)2670-0999
Australia
Sumitomo (SHI) Hansen Australia Pty. Ltd.
(SHAU)
181 Power St, Glendenning, NSW 2761, Australia
TEL (61)2-9208-3000 FAX (61)2-9208-3050
Japan
Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd. (SHI)
ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-6025, JapanTEL (81)3-6737-2511 FAX (81)3-6866-5160

NOTICE

Specifications, dimensions, and other items are subject to change without prior notice.

Power Transmission & Controls Group
Headquarter ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan

No.DM3401E-1.0
EA10 Printed 2020.01

1. Make sure that this operating and maintenence manual isdelivered to the end user of inverter unit.
2. Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter
unit, and store it in a safe place for reference.

Manual DM3401E-1